Content Manager User Guide

Content Manager 2.
User Guide
September 2006
PM-2006-1213 v2
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
About Content Manager ............................................................2
About This Guide .....................................................................2
Logging In to Content Manager ..................................................3
Changing Your Login and Password Information ...........................3
Logging Out .......................................................................4
The Content Manager Interface ..................................................5
The Welcome Screen ............................................................5
Viewing and Working With Lists ...............................................6
Using the Filters Screen ........................................................8
Chapter 2 Understanding Rights

Content Manager and Rights Management ................................. 12
Account Rights ...................................................................... 12
Group Rights ......................................................................... 12
Navigation Rights................................................................... 14
Service Rights ....................................................................... 14
System History Rights ............................................................ 15
Content Provider Rights .......................................................... 15
Content Category Rights ......................................................... 16
Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights ................................ 17
Catalog Rights ....................................................................... 18
Content Topic Rights............................................................... 18
System Administration Rights .................................................. 19
Tracking Rights ...................................................................... 19
Offer Rights .......................................................................... 19
Chapter 3 Getting Started

Configuring a Bulk Campaign................................................... 22
Step 1: Configuring the End-User Database Structure.................. 22
Step 2: Configuring the Content Repository .............................. 23
Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential i

Step 3: Import Accounts ..................................................... 25
Step 4: Creating Content ..................................................... 28
Step 5: Configuring Delivery Options ...................................... 33
Step 6: Configuring the MO Interface ...................................... 36
Step 7: Creating a Bulk Import Process ................................... 37
Chapter 4 Back-Office Management

Managing Back-Office Groups .................................................. 41
Viewing Back-Office Groups .................................................. 41
Searching Back-Office Groups ............................................... 42
Creating a New Back-Office Group.......................................... 43
Editing a Back-Office Group .................................................. 44
Deleting Back-Office Groups ................................................. 49
Defining Back-Office Global Rights ......................................... 49
Managing Back-Office Accounts................................................ 51
Viewing Back-Office Accounts ............................................... 51
Searching Back-Office Accounts ............................................. 52
Creating a New Back-Office Account ....................................... 53
Editing a Back-Office Account ............................................... 54
Deleting Back-Office Accounts ............................................... 59
Chapter 5 Front-Office Management

Managing Services ................................................................. 61
Viewing Services ............................................................... 61
Searching Services ............................................................ 62
Creating a New Service ....................................................... 62
Editing a Service ............................................................... 64
Deleting a Service ............................................................. 69
Managing Global Service Rights ............................................. 69
Managing Front-Office Groups.................................................. 71
Viewing Front-Office Groups ................................................. 71
Searching Front-Office Groups .............................................. 72
Creating a New Front-Office Group ......................................... 73
Editing a Front-Office Group ................................................. 74
Deleting a Front-Office Group ............................................... 80
Managing Front-Office Accounts ............................................... 81
Searching for a Front-Office Account ....................................... 81
Creating a New Front-Office Account ....................................... 83
Editing a Front-Office Account ............................................... 84
Deleting a Front-Office Account ............................................. 97
Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential ii

Searching Front-Office Account History Logs .............................. 98
Managing Mobile Devices ........................................................ 99
Searching for a Device by IMEI ............................................. 99
Searching for Devices by Unresolved IMEI .............................. 100
Searching Devices by Unresolved IMEIs ................................. 100
Uploading Accounts .............................................................. 101
Viewing Account Imports ................................................... 101
Searching Bulk Account Imports .......................................... 102
Creating a Bulk Account Import File ...................................... 102
Chapter 6 Content Management

Managing Content Providers .................................................. 107
Viewing Content Providers ................................................. 107
Searching Content Providers ............................................... 108
Creating a New Content Provider ......................................... 109
Editing a Content Provider ................................................. 110
Deleting a Content Provider ................................................ 113
Defining Global Content Provider Rights ................................. 113
Managing Content Categories ................................................ 114
Viewing Categories .......................................................... 115
Searching Categories ........................................................ 116
Creating a New Category ................................................... 116
Editing a Category ........................................................... 117
Deleting a Category ......................................................... 121
Managing Global Category Rights ......................................... 121
Using Content Templates....................................................... 123
Viewing Content Templates ................................................ 123
Editing Content Templates ................................................. 124
Editing a Content Template Version ...................................... 124
Managing Content ................................................................ 137
Viewing Content .............................................................. 137
Searching Content ........................................................... 138
Creating New Content ....................................................... 139
Editing Content ............................................................... 140
Cloning Content .............................................................. 157
Deleting Content ............................................................. 157
Importing Bulk Contents ....................................................... 158
Searching Import Processes ............................................... 159
Starting a Bulk Import Process ............................................ 160
Creating a Process ........................................................... 160
Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential iii

Accessing a Bulk Process ................................................... 164
Deleting a Bulk Process ..................................................... 164
Using Zip Files ..................................................................... 164
Algorithms of Zip File Processing.......................................... 164
Zip File Structure and XML Files ........................................... 165
Chapter 7 Device Management

Managing Devices by Brand................................................... 172
Searching Devices by Brand ............................................... 173
Creating a Brand ............................................................. 174
Editing a Brand ............................................................... 174
Deleting a Brand ............................................................. 177
Activating a Brand ........................................................... 177
Deactivating a Brand ........................................................ 177
Managing Devices by Model................................................... 178
Searching Devices by Model ............................................... 179
Creating a Device ............................................................ 180
Editing a Device .............................................................. 180
Deleting a Device ............................................................ 194
Activating Devices ........................................................... 194
Deactivating Devices ........................................................ 194
Managing Features ............................................................... 195
Searching Features .......................................................... 196
Creating a Feature ........................................................... 197
Editing a Feature ............................................................. 197
Deleting a Feature ........................................................... 200
Activating Features .......................................................... 200
Deactivating Features ....................................................... 200
Managing Capability Groups .................................................. 201
Viewing Capability Groups.................................................. 201
Searching Capability Groups ............................................... 202
Editing a Capability Group .................................................. 203
Creating a Capability Group ................................................ 204
Deleting a Capability Group ................................................ 205
Managing Capability Group Handlers....................................... 206
Viewing Capability Group Handlers ....................................... 206
Searching Capability Group Handlers .................................... 207
Creating a Capability Group Handler ..................................... 207
Editing a Capability Group Handler ....................................... 208
Deleting a Capability Group Handler ..................................... 211
Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential iv

Managing Formatting Tokens ................................................. 212
Viewing Formatting Tokens ................................................ 212
Searching Formatting Tokens.............................................. 213
Editing a Formatting Token ................................................ 213
Creating a Formatting Token .............................................. 216
Deleting a Formatting Token ............................................... 218
Managing Device Detection Rules ........................................... 218
Viewing Detection Rules .................................................... 218
Searching Detection Rules ................................................. 219
Editing a Detection Rule .................................................... 220
Creating a Detection Rule .................................................. 222
Deleting a Detection Rule .................................................. 223
Managing Device Detection Sets ............................................ 224
Viewing Detection Sets ..................................................... 224
Using the Detection Tool ....................................................... 225
Managing Device Application Types......................................... 226
Viewing Device Application Types ......................................... 226
Searching Device Application Types ...................................... 228
Editing a Device Application Type ......................................... 228
Creating a Device Application Type ....................................... 230
Deleting a Device Application Type ....................................... 231
Activating Device Application Types ...................................... 231
Deactivating Device Application Types ................................... 231
Managing Device Applications ................................................ 232
Viewing Device Applications................................................ 232
Searching Device Applications ............................................. 233
Editing a Device Application................................................ 233
Creating a Device Application .............................................. 236
Deleting a Device Application .............................................. 237
Activating Device Applications ............................................. 238
Deactivating Device Applications .......................................... 238
Managing Device Application Versions ..................................... 238
Viewing Device Application Versions ..................................... 238
Searching Device Application Versions ................................... 240
Editing a Device Application Version ..................................... 240
Creating a Device Application Version ................................... 243
Deleting a Device Application Version .................................... 244
Activating Device Application Versions ................................... 244
Deactivating Device Application Versions................................ 244
Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential v

Managing Formatting Systems ............................................... 245
Viewing Formatting Systems............................................... 245
Searching Formatting Systems ............................................ 245
Chapter 8 DKB Management

Managing Devices Through a Search....................................... 248
Searching Devices Using Quick Search .................................. 248
Searching Devices by IMEI Range ........................................ 249
Managing Devices By IMEI Range ........................................ 249
Searching Devices by User Agent ......................................... 252
Managing Devices by User Agent ......................................... 253
Searching Device Profiles ...................................................... 255
Managing Device Profiles ................................................... 256
Creating a Device Profile ................................................... 258
Editing a Device Profile ..................................................... 258
Searching Device Profile Capabilities....................................... 277
Managing Device Profile Capabilities ..................................... 278
Managing Trust Sources ........................................................ 282
Viewing Trust Sources ...................................................... 282
Editing a Trust Source ...................................................... 283
Creating a Trust Source .................................................... 286
Deleting a Trust Source ..................................................... 287
Managing DKB Versions ........................................................ 287
Viewing DKB Versions ....................................................... 287
Searching DKB Versions .................................................... 288
Editing a DKB Version ....................................................... 289
Deleting a Version ........................................................... 290
Managing DKB Archives ........................................................ 290
Managing DKB Synchronizations ............................................ 291
Viewing Synchronization Processes ....................................... 292
Searching Synchronization Processes .................................... 293
Monitoring a Synchronization Process.................................... 293
Creating a Synchronization Process ...................................... 296
Managing Device and DKB Rights ........................................... 297
Granting Device and DKB Rights .......................................... 297
Revoking Device and DKB Rights ......................................... 298
Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential vi

Chapter 9 Delivery Management
Managing Categories ............................................................ 300
Viewing Categories .......................................................... 300
Searching Categories ........................................................ 302
Creating a New Category ................................................... 302
Editing a Category ........................................................... 304
Deleting a Category ......................................................... 309
Managing Offers .................................................................. 310
Viewing Offers ................................................................ 310
Searching Offers ............................................................. 312
Creating a New Offer ........................................................ 312
Editing an Offer............................................................... 314
Managing Global Offer Rights .............................................. 334
Managing Download Codes ................................................. 335
Deleting an Offer ............................................................. 336
Managing Bundles ................................................................ 337
Viewing Bundles .............................................................. 337
Searching Bundles ........................................................... 339
Creating a Bundle ............................................................ 339
Editing a Bundle .............................................................. 341
Deleting a Bundle ............................................................ 355
Downloading a Bundle ...................................................... 355
Creating a Bundle Bulk Process ........................................... 357
Viewing Popular Downloads ................................................... 362
Managing Triggers................................................................ 363
Searching Triggers ........................................................... 364
Managing Subscriptions ........................................................ 365
Editing or Deleting a Subscription ........................................ 366
Managing Back-Office Catalog Rights ...................................... 367
Managing Content Topics....................................................... 368
Viewing Topics ................................................................ 368
Searching Topics ............................................................. 370
Creating a New Topic ........................................................ 370
Editing a Topic ................................................................ 372
Deleting a Topic .............................................................. 377
Managing Topic Rights ...................................................... 377
Publishing Topics ............................................................. 379
Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential vii

Managing Content Systems ................................................... 381
Viewing Content Systems .................................................. 381
Searching Content Systems ................................................ 382
Creating a New Content System .......................................... 382
Editing a Content System .................................................. 384
Deleting a Content System ................................................. 385
Chapter 10 System Configuration

Cache Management .............................................................. 387
Viewing and Modifying Cache Management Details.................... 387
Managing Messaging Credentials ............................................ 391
Viewing Credentials .......................................................... 391
Searching Credentials ....................................................... 392
Creating New Credentials ................................................... 393
Editing Credentials ........................................................... 394
Deleting Credentials ......................................................... 394
Managing Message Patterns................................................... 395
Viewing Message Patterns .................................................. 395
Searching Message Patterns ............................................... 396
Creating a New Message Pattern .......................................... 396
Editing a Message Pattern .................................................. 399
Deleting a Message Pattern ................................................ 403
Managing Session Sequences ................................................ 403
Viewing Session Sequences ................................................ 403
Searching Session Sequences ............................................. 404
Creating a New Session Sequence ........................................ 404
Editing a Session Sequence ................................................ 406
Deleting a Session Sequence .............................................. 406
Understanding Session Sequences ....................................... 407
Managing Workflows............................................................. 408
Viewing Workflows ........................................................... 408
Searching Workflows ........................................................ 409
Creating a New Workflow ................................................... 409
Editing a Workflow ........................................................... 410
Deleting a Workflow ......................................................... 423
Managing System Administration Rights .................................. 424
Managing Bulk Content Processes .......................................... 425
Viewing Bulk Content Processes........................................... 425
Searching Bulk Content Processes ........................................ 426
Accessing a Bulk Content Process ........................................ 426
Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential viii

Managing Sessions............................................................... 428
Viewing Session Reports .................................................... 428
Editing Session Details ...................................................... 430
Purging Sessions ............................................................. 432
Managing Retry Sessions ...................................................... 432
Viewing Retry Sessions ..................................................... 432
Searching Retry Sessions................................................... 433
Viewing Session Details ..................................................... 433
Creating a Retry Sessions Bulk Process.................................. 434
Purging Retry Sessions ..................................................... 435
Managing Purges ................................................................. 435
Viewing Purges ............................................................... 436
Searching Purged Sessions................................................. 437
Viewing Purge Details ....................................................... 437
Deleting Bulk Content Process Reports .................................. 439
Managing Session and Bulk Process Rights .............................. 439
Chapter 11 Statistics
Managing Statistics Processes................................................ 442
Searching Statistic Processes .............................................. 442
Viewing Process Details ..................................................... 443
Statistics Tracking ................................................................ 447
Searching Statistics Compilations ......................................... 448
Viewing Statistic Compilation Details ..................................... 448
Device Statistics .................................................................. 451
Downloads Per Brand ....................................................... 451
Downloads Per Model........................................................ 452
Content Statistics................................................................. 453
Downloads Per Provider..................................................... 453
Downloads Per Content ..................................................... 454
Content Per Provider ........................................................ 454
Other Statistics.................................................................... 455
Downloads Per Offer ......................................................... 455
Downloads Per Service ...................................................... 456
Chapter 12 System Information

Managing Countries.............................................................. 459
Viewing Countries ............................................................ 459
Searching Countries ......................................................... 460
Adding a Country ............................................................ 461
Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential ix

Editing a Country ............................................................ 461
Deleting a Country ........................................................... 462
Managing Mobile Network Operators ....................................... 463
Viewing Mobile Network Operators ....................................... 463
Searching Operators......................................................... 464
Creating a New Operator ................................................... 465
Editing an Operator .......................................................... 465
Deleting an Operator ........................................................ 466
Managing Phone Prefixes ...................................................... 467
Viewing Prefixes .............................................................. 467
Searching Prefixes ........................................................... 468
Creating New Prefixes ....................................................... 469
Editing a Prefix ............................................................... 469
Deleting a Prefix.............................................................. 470
History File Configuration ...................................................... 471
Viewing the Dispatch File Configuration ................................. 471
Managing History Rights ....................................................... 473
Glossary ................................................................................. 474
Index ..................................................................................... 479
Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential x

1 Introduction
This chapter includes the following information:
About Content Manager.............................................................................................. 2

About This Guide ....................................................................................................... 2
Logging In to Content Manager ................................................................................... 3
Changing Your Login and Password Information ............................................................. 3
Logging Out.............................................................................................................. 4
The Content Manager Interface ................................................................................... 5
The Welcome Screen.................................................................................................. 5
Viewing and Working With Lists ................................................................................... 6
Using the Filters Screen ............................................................................................. 8
Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential 1

Introduction
About Content Manager
Content Manager 2.1 is a powerful new content management solution that integrates a
comprehensive device database, intelligent content adaptation, powerful storefront
publishing, flexible APIs, subscription services, Application Manager, and WAP billing
capabilities into a single, powerful platform.
Content Manager brings together the key elements of mobile content management—from
content creation to billing and settlement on a global basis—enabling you to consolidate
mobile content offerings and reach the largest possible number of operators, handsets, and
mobile subscribers.
Content Manager provides:

• Support for the broadest range of mobile devices and content formats
• An intelligent workflow that streamlines the process of creating, adapting,
organizing, rating, and publishing mobile content
• Content aggregation tools, enabling you to centralize content from a variety of
sources into a single global hosting environment
• Web tools and APIs that enable you to automatically publish both Web and WAP
storefronts
• A workflow engine, enabling you to implement creative campaigns and complex
subscriber interactions
• A direct link into Mobile 365’s robust and reliable APEX Network, enabling reach
into mobile markets worldwide
• Distribution to more than 500 global operators
• Detailed statistical and transactional reporting
About This Guide
This guide describes all back-office (administrative level) and front-office (end-user level)
tasks performed and functionality available in Content Manager 2.1.
NOTE: You may not have access to all functions listed in this document, depending on the
rights attributed to your account. For more information, see “Understanding Rights”
on page 11.

Introduction
Logging In to Content Manager
1. To access the Mobile 365 Content Manager 2.1 interface, type the Web URL of the Content
Manager 2.1 server into your browser’s address field and press the Enter key.
3 The Content Manager 2.1 Login screen displays.
Figure 1.1: Login Screen
2. Enter your Login and Password.
3. Click Enter.
3 The Welcome screen displays (Figure 1.3 on page 5).
NOTE: It is recommended that you change your login and password as soon as possible
during your first Content Manager session.
Changing Your Login and Password Information
1. From the Administrators menu, select Accounts > List accounts.
2. Click Show table.

3 The List accounts screen displays.
3. From the Name list, click the appropriate account.
3 The Edit account screen for the selected account displays (Figure 1.2 on page 4).

Introduction
Figure 1.2: The Edit account Screen
4. In the New password field, enter a new password.
5. In the Confirm new password field, enter the new password again.
6. Click Submit.
3 Your changes will take effect the next time you log into Content Manager.
Logging Out
To log out of Content Manager, click Logout in the upper right corner of the application (see
Figure 1.3 or Figure 1.5 on page 6, for more detail).

Introduction
The Content Manager Interface
This section provides an overview to using the Content Manager interface.
CAUTION: While using the Content Manager application, it is recommended that you do
not use your browser’s Back and Next buttons to navigate the program.
Instead, use the menus, buttons, and links provided by Content Manager.
The Welcome Screen
The Content Manager Welcome screen is the first screen you see when you log in to the
application. From here, you can access all Content Manager functions using the menu bar.
Figure 1.3: The Welcome Screen
The Menu Bar
Figure 1.4: The Menu Bar
The menu bar consists of the following menus:
NOTE: Depending on the implementation of Content Manager and rights granted, you may
only have access to certain menus and functions. For more information, see
“Understanding Rights” on page 11.
• Administrators — Manage back-office (or administrator/client) groups, accounts, and
rights. For more information, see “Back-Office Management” on page 40.
• End-users — Manage front-office (or end-user) services, groups, accounts, and
rights. For more information, see “Front-Office Management” on page 60.

Introduction
• Content — Manage content categories, providers, and templates. For more

information, see “Content Management” on page 106.
• Device — Manage devices as well as the Device Knowledge Base (DKB). For more
information, see “Device Management” on page 170 and “DKB Management” on
page 247.
• Delivery — Manage the content delivery service logic and delivery system
configuration. For more information, see “Delivery Management” on page 299 and
“System Configuration” on page 386.
• Statistics — Access statistics tables on the platform. For more information, see
“Statistics” on page 441.
• System — Manage system configuration. For more information, see “System
Information” on page 458.
Additional Options
Additional menu options are located in the far upper right corner of the Welcome screen:
• You are — Your login information
• Preferences — Click to modify interface (skin, language, and Welcome screen)
preferences
• Logout — Click to end the current session
Figure 1.5: Additional Menu Options
Content Manager Version Information
To access information about the Content Manager application, click the Mobile 365 logo
located in the far upper left corner of the Welcome screen.
3 The Version Information screen displays, listing information about both the Content
Manager application and the platform on which it operates.
Viewing and Working With Lists
Elements of Content Manager include entities such as back-office (administrator-level) and

front-office (end-user) groups, services, content, devices, and more. Each time you view a
list of groups, for example, Content Manager displays a screen similar to Figure 1.6 on
page 7.
NOTE: The List groups screen is used in this generic example. Functions available at the
top of the screen may differ depending on the element you are viewing. Element-
specific functionality is described in its appropriate section of this guide.

Introduction
Figure 1.6: The List groups Screen
1. This area displays the current location of the application. Click available links to jump to
that location in Content Manager.
2. Click Edit filters to modify filter settings for searches within an element. For more
information, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
3. Click Reset filters to remove all existing filters.
4. Click Hide or Show filters to hide or display all filtering criteria.
5. Use the pull-down menu to show a specific number of items per page — 5, 10, 15, 20, 50,
100, or 500 items per page.
6. Click Refresh to update the list of elements.
7. Browse pages: Previous — go back; Next — go to next page.
8. If present, click the next to each filter to delete.
9. Select an item using the check box located in the first column on the left. Click the top
check box to select all items in the list.
10. Click available column headings to sort column items alphabetically (default is
descending; click again to sort ascending).
NOTE: Some columns may not be available for sorting.

Introduction
Using the Filters Screen
Whenever you perform a search using Content Manager, you can create a filter using various
search criteria in order to sift records and return a specific set of search results. Although the
filter criteria may differ between the type of information you are searching, the process of
creating and applying filters is the same.
Figure 1.7: List groups > Filters Screen
From the Filters screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click Show table to view a list of elements matching criteria set in the current filter. If
no filter is currently selected, the Show table link returns you to the full list of
elements.
• Enter filter criteria and click the corresponding to add a new filter.
• Check the not box to reverse the operator. For example, “contains” becomes “does not
contain”.
• Click Reset filters to delete active filters for the related element.
When a filter is applied, the following information is provided in the Current filters area of
the Filters screen:
• The criteria on which the filter is applied.
• The operator used for the filter (for example, “contains”).
• The variable value entered for the filter.
• Click the next to the filter to delete.
Filter Criteria and Operators
A search is defined using both text and numeric filter criteria. Filter criteria is considered the
information by which to perform your search. For example, searching by a Name.
Filter operators narrow the search by defining the criteria further. For example, searching for
an account containing a specific Name.
NOTE: Depending on the search you are conducting, filter criteria and operators available
may differ.

Introduction
Text Operators
Text criteria is information used in a search that is textual in value — a search by a name or
description, for example.
The following table describes the textual filter operators available:
NOTE: The following operators may or may not be available depending on the type of filter
you are creating or viewing.
Operator Description
contains Returns records containing a specific case-sensitive search string.
contains (insensitive) Returns records containing a specific search string (not case-sensitive).
equal to Returns records exactly equal to a specific case-sensitive search string.
equal to (insensitive) Returns records exactly equal to a specific search string (not case-sensitive).
is like Returns records containing a certain case sensitive search string with specified
parameters. For more information, see the table below.
like (insensitive) Returns records containing a certain search string with specified parameters (not
case-sensitive). For more information, see the table below.
greater than Returns records larger than a specific search string.
less than Returns records smaller than a specific search string.
less than or equal to Returns records smaller than or equal to a specific search string.
greater than or equal to Returns records larger than or equal to a specific search string.

Introduction
The following values are also available for more precise filtering the text operator “is like”:
Operator Values Effect Examples

is like % Replace any character string. Name | is like | %pont
Displays only groups with name ending in “pont”
Description | is not like | 336%6

Displays only groups for which description does
not start with “336” and end with “6”
– Replace any character Name | is like | d_pont
Displays only groups with name equal to
“d...pont” (for example, “dupont,” “depont,” etc.)
[] Replace a predefined list of Name | is not like | d[a-d]pont
characters in a range: [a-z] Displays only groups for which name is not equal
or in a list: [abc] to “d...pont” where “...” is comprised between
“a” and “d”: “dapont,” “dbpont,” “dcpont,”
“ddpont”
Name | is like | d[aeiou]pont

Displays only groups for which name is equal to
“d...pont” where “...” is equal to a, e, i, o, or u:
“dapont,” “depont,” “dipont,” “dopont,” “dupont”
[^] Replace all characters except Name | is not like | d[^r-u]pont
a predefined list of charac- Displays only groups for which name is not equal
ters in a range: [a-z] to “d...pont” where “...” is not comprised
or in a list: [abc] between “r” and “u”: “drpont,” “dspont,”
“dtpont,” “dupont”
Name | is like \ d[^kzj]pont

Displays only groups for which name is equal to
“d...pont” where “...” is not equal to k, z, or j:
“dkpont,” “dzpont,” “djpont”
Additional Operators
Other criteria includes information used in a search that is numeric in value — a search by a
phone number or IMEI, for example.
The following table describes additional filter operators available:
NOTE: The following operators may or may not be available depending on the type of filter
you are creating or viewing.
Operator Description
equal to Returns records equal to a specific search string.
greater than Returns records greater than a specific search string.
greater than or equal to Returns records greater than or equal to a specific search string.
less than or equal to Returns records less than or equal to a specific search string.
less than Returns records less than a specific search string.
NOTE: Date and time criteria formats are YYYY-MM-DD and HH:MM:SS.

2 Understanding Rights
Content Manager and Rights Management .................................................................. 12

Account Rights ........................................................................................................ 12
Group Rights .......................................................................................................... 12
Navigation Rights .................................................................................................... 14
Service Rights......................................................................................................... 14
System History Rights.............................................................................................. 15
Content Provider Rights............................................................................................ 15
Content Category Rights .......................................................................................... 16
Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights .................................................................. 17
Catalog Rights ........................................................................................................ 18
System Administration Rights.................................................................................... 19
Tracking Rights ....................................................................................................... 19
Offer Rights ............................................................................................................ 19
Content Topic Rights ................................................................................................ 18

Understanding Rights
This chapter defines the rights granted to various elements within Content Manager.
Content Manager and Rights Management
Content Manager uses a user type and rights hierarchy structure that allows for customized
group, account, and individual user levels of access and functionality within the application.
Every user of the system uses an account to access specific Content Manager functions.
Users may include content providers, brand marketers, or portal owners, for example.
Depending on the rights assigned to each user type, functionality available may include
access to all or several elements of the Content Manager application.
Account Rights
Back-office (administrator) account rights are associated to only those user accounts with
access to the functions available in the Administrator menu. Back-office accounts inherit
the same rights as their associated parent groups.
NOTE: If the back-office account is not associated with a parent group, then the account
will have no rights. If you log in using an account that does not have rights, the
only screen available is the Welcome screen (Figure 1.3 on page 5).
Front-office (end-user) account rights are inherited from their associated parent groups. If
there is no parent group associated with an account, the account assumes the rights granted
to its associated end-user group determined by the service(s) to which it is subscribed.
Group Rights
Groups are designed to organize and give user accounts a structure. For instance, a portal
owner may have back-office groups such as “Backend administrators”, “Storefront
administrators”, and “Content validators”. Front-office groups are used to collectively manage
a client's target end-users. Front-office groups may include groups such as “News
subscribers” and “Content download service users”.
There are three types of group rights:

• global back-office — Rights are granted to groups affecting all groups
simultaneously. For information about managing back-office global rights, see
“Defining Back-Office Global Rights” on page 49.
• back-office group — Administrator groups inherit rights from associated parent
groups. If there is no parent group associated with the administrator group, rights
must be assigned to the administrator group itself. For information about managing
individual back-office group rights, see “Using the Rights On Group Tab” on page 47.

• front-office group — End-user groups are designed to collectively manage a client’s

target end-users. When a group subscribes to a service, the group assumes the rights
granted to the service. For more information, see “Using the Rights Tab” on page 76.
The following table describes the rights available for association with Content Manager
groups:
Right Description Global Back-Office Front-Office

Back-Office Group Group
all rights Assigns all rights for all resource to a
selected group
3
read any account View all back-office accounts 3
create accounts anywhere Create an account member for any back- 3
office group
update any account Modify any back-office account
3
manage any account Change the parent groups of any
account
3
delete any account Delete any account
3
read any group View all groups
3
create groups anywhere Create a group no matter what its
parent group may be
3
update any group Edit any back-office group
3
manage any group Assign rights to any back-office group
3
delete any group Delete any back-office group
3
read children accounts View account members associated with
the edited group.
3 3
create children accounts Create an account member for the 3
edited group.
update children accounts Modify accounts associated with the
edited group.
3 3
manage children accounts Change the parent groups of the
accounts currently associated with the
3 3
edited group.
delete children accounts Delete accounts associated with the
edited group.
3 3
read children groups View the edited group and its associated
child groups.
3
create children groups Create a child group associated with the 3
edited group.
update children groups Modify child groups associated with the
edited group.
3
manage children groups Assign rights to child groups associated
with the edited group.
3
delete children groups Delete child groups associated with the 3
edited group.

Navigation Rights
The Navigation rights tab allows you to define resource access to the Web administration
pages. You cannot use the Navigation rights tab to define rights directly to managed
objects.
For example, you may give access to a back-office group to the End-users menu, but you
will also need to grant rights for end-user services and groups to enable this back-office
group to completely manage end-users.
The “view navigation node” right allows resources to access a Content Manager menu or
menu option.
For information about managing navigation rights, see “Using the Navigation Rights Tab” on
page 48.
Service Rights
There are two types of service rights available for association with Content Manager services:
global — Rights are granted to groups globally affecting all available services. For
information about managing global service rights, see “Managing Global Service Rights” on
page 69.
service — Rights are granted to groups individually affecting a selected service. For
information about managing individual service rights, see “Editing a Service” on page 64.
The following table describes the service rights available:
Right Description Global Service

read services Allows the group to view services.
3 3
create services Allows groups to create new services.
3
update services Allows groups to update services.
3
delete services Allows groups to delete services.
3
subscribe services Allows the group to subscribe users to a service.
3 3
read children groups Allows the group to view children groups of a
service.
3 3
create children groups Allows the group to create children groups for the
service.
3 3
update children groups Allows the group to update children groups associ- 3 3
ated with the service.
manage children groups Allows the group to manage children groups associ-
3 3
delete children groups Allows the group to delete children groups associ-
3 3

Right Description Global Service

read children accounts Allows the group to view end-user accounts
subscribed to the service.
3 3
NOTE: You must have the “read services right
granted in order to list accounts on which you have
rights.
create children accounts Allows groups to create new end-user accounts. 3
NOTE: This right can be assigned only from the
Rights on all services screen.
update children accounts Allows the group to modify accounts in the service.
3 3
manage children accounts Allows a group to change the parent groups of
accounts associated with the service.
3 3
delete children accounts Allows a group to delete accounts subscribed to the 3 3
service
System History Rights
History rights are granted to allow groups to view and/or store history logs. History logs track
user activity within Content Manager. For more information about defining history rights, see
“Managing History Rights” on page 473.
The following table describes the system history rights used by Content Manager:
Right Description
read history traces allows the group to view history logs
store history traces allows the group to store history logs
Content Provider Rights
Content provider rights are granted to allow groups to manage content and content versions.
There are two types of content provider rights:

• global — Rights are granted to groups affecting all existing content providers
simultaneously. For information about managing global content provider rights, see
“Defining Global Content Provider Rights” on page 113.
• new provider — While creating a new provider, rights are granted to groups affecting
only the new provider. For more information about creating a new provider, see
“Creating a New Content Provider” on page 109.
NOTE: You can grant only those rights that you already have on content providers.

The following table describes the content provider rights available:
Right Description Global New

Provider
read content provider Allows groups to view a content provider and its 3 3
published content.
update content provider Allows groups to modify content provider
information.
3
create content provider Allows groups to create new content providers.
3
delete content provider Allows groups to delete content providers.
3
publish as content provider Allows groups to add contents using the content
provider identity.
3 3
NOTE: You must also have rights granted to each cat-
egory associated to the content provider in order for
administrators to create contents for that provider.
Content Category Rights
Category rights are granted to allow groups to manage content and content categories.
There are two types of content category rights:

• global — Rights are granted to groups globally affecting all content categories
simultaneously. For more information, see “Managing Global Category Rights” on
page 121.
• new category — When creating a category, rights are granted to groups affecting the
only the new category. For more information, see “Editing a Category” on page 117.
The following table describes the content category rights used by Content Manager:
Right Description Global New Category

read content category Allows groups to view categories. 3 3
update content category Allows groups to modify category descriptions, 3 3
content providers, and rights.
delete content category Allows groups to delete categories.
3 3
create content category Allows groups to create new categories.
3
read content Allows groups to view content in a category.
3 3
update content Allows groups to modify content in a category.
Administrators must also have the rights that the
3 3
content provider associates with the edited content.
add content Allows groups to add content to a category. 3 3
NOTE: You must also have the “publish contents”
right on at least one content provider in order to add
content.
delete content Allows groups to delete content from a category. 3 3

Right Description Global New Category

validate content Allows groups to change the status of contents in a
category to “validated”. Administrators must also
3 3
have the rights that the content provider associates
with the edited content.
update content version Allows groups to modify content versions associated
with contents published in a category.
3 3
add content version Allows groups to add content versions to contents 3 3
published in a category.
delete content version Allows groups to delete content versions associated
with contents published in a category.
3 3
validate content version Allows groups to change the status of content
versions associated with contents published in a
3 3
category.
In order to view or modify content, you must have the following rights:
• “Read content” granted to the content parent category
• “Read published contents” granted to the content provider
NOTE: When viewing or modifying content, the following rules apply:
• If you have only the “update content” right on parent categories of the content,
you can modify all elements of the content except the content status.
• If you have only the “validate content” right on all parent categories of the
content, you can modify only the content status.
• If you have both rights, you can modify all elements of the content, even if the
content status is “validation pending”.
NOTE: When viewing or editing a content version, the following rules apply:
• If you have only the “edit content version” right, you can modify all elements of
the content version except the status.
• If you have only the “validate content version” right, you can modify only the
content version status.
• If you have both rights, you can modify all elements of the content, even if the
content status is “validation pending”, or the content version is stored as
“validated”.
Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights
Device rights are granted to groups to manage devices and information in the Device
Knowledge Base (DKB). For more information, see “Managing Device and DKB Rights” on
page 297.
The following table describes the device rights used by Content Manager:
Right Description
Global read Allows groups total read access to the DKB.
Manage structure Allows groups to manage system structure and the DKB.

Right Description
Sign structure Allows groups to sign (certify) data in the knowledge database that
can be exported to a DKB archive.
Delete structure Allows groups to delete data from the DKB.
Import archive Allows groups to manage DKB archive import (synchronization)
processes.
Export archive Allows groups to manage DKB archive export (generation)
processes.
Manage applications Allows groups to manage applications types, applications, applica-
tion versions, associated user agents, and detection rules.
Delete applications Allows groups to delete applications types, applications, application
versions, associated user agents, and detection rules.
Manage profiles Allows groups to manage device profiles and profile capabilities, as
well as data related to a device model (aliases, IMEI, and so on).
Delete profiles Allows groups to delete device profiles and profile capabilities, as
well as data related to a device model (aliases, IMEI, and so on).
All
Catalog Rights
Catalog rights are granted to allow groups to manage catalog items for a specific service. For
more information, see “Managing Back-Office Catalog Rights” on page 367.
The following table describes the administrator-level catalog rights used by Content
Manager:
Right Description
create catalog item Allows groups to create offers, bundles, and triggers associated to
the selected service.
update catalog item Allows groups to modify offers, bundles, and triggers associated to
delete catalog item Allows groups to delete offers, bundles, and triggers associated to
read catalog item Allows groups to view offers, bundles, and triggers associated to
Content Topic Rights
Content topic rights are granted to allow groups to manage content topics. For more
information, see “Managing Topic Rights” on page 377.
The following table describes the administrator-level content topic rights used by Content
Manager:
Right Description
create topics Allows groups to create topics.
update topics Allows groups to modify topics.

Right Description
delete topics Allows groups to delete topics.
read topics Allows groups to view topics associated with the selected content system.
System Administration Rights
System administration rights are granted to allow groups to manage system elements. For
more information, see “Managing System Administration Rights” on page 424.
The following table describes the administrator-level system configuration rights used by
Content Manager:
Right Description
create system item Allows back-office groups to create system elements.
update system item Allows back-office groups to modify system elements.
delete system item Allows back-office groups to delete system elements.
read system item Allows back-office groups to view system elements.
Tracking Rights
Tracking rights (session and bulk process rights) are granted to allow groups to manage
delivery operations for a selected service. For more information, see “Managing Session and
Bulk Process Rights” on page 439.
The following table describes the administrator-level tracking rights available for all sessions
and bulk-processes used by Content Manager:
Right Description
create sessions and bulk processes Allows back-office groups to start new sessions or bulk processes
associated with the selected service.
update sessions and bulk processes Allows back-office groups to modify sessions or bulk processes
delete sessions and bulk processes Allows back-office groups to delete sessions or bulk processes
read sessions and bulk processes Allows back-office groups to view sessions or bulk processes asso-
ciated with the selected service.
Offer Rights
There are two offer rights:

• The “buy offer” right is the only offer right available to front-office groups.
• The “Read catalog item” right is the only right available to back-office groups.
There are two ways to grant the “buy offer” right:

• global — Rights are granted to groups globally affecting all offers. For more
information, see “Using the Administration Rights Tab” on page 333.
• new offers — While creating a new offer, rights are assigned to groups affecting only
the new offer. For more information, see “Using the End-Users Rights Tab” on
page 332.

3 Getting Started
This chapter contains the following information:
Configuring a Bulk Campaign .................................................................................... 22

Step 1: Configuring the End-User Database Structure .................................................. 22
Step 2: Configuring the Content Repository ................................................................ 23
Step 3: Import Accounts .......................................................................................... 25
Step 4: Creating Content.......................................................................................... 28
Step 5: Configuring Delivery Options.......................................................................... 33
Step 6: Configuring the MO Interface ......................................................................... 36
Step 7: Creating a Bulk Import Process ...................................................................... 37

Getting Started
This chapter is intended as a quick start guide to configuring a bulk campaign.
Configuring a Bulk Campaign
This section provides instruction on how to configure Content Manager to quickly start a
Short Message Service (SMS) bulk campaign.
Step 1: Configuring the End-User Database Structure
1. From the End-users menu, select Structure > Services.

3 The Services screen displays.
2. Click New service.
3 The New service screen displays.
Figure 3.1: New service Screen
3. Provide the following information:

• Name: type a name for the new service (for example “CM2”)
• Check Subscribe anonymous account.

Getting Started
4. Click Submit.
3 The new service is created, and the Edit service screen displays.
5. From the End-users menu, select Structure > Groups.
3 The Groups screen displays.
6. Click New group.
3 The New group screen displays.
Figure 3.2: New group Screen

• Name: type a name for the new group
• Description: type a brief description of the new group
• User association: choose Automatic
8. Click Submit.
3 The new group is created, and the Edit group screen displays. For information about
editing a group, see “Editing a Front-Office Group” on page 74.
Step 2: Configuring the Content Repository
1. From the Content menu, select Structure > Providers.

3 The Providers screen displays.
2. Click New provider.
3 The New provider screen displays.

Getting Started
Figure 3.3: New provider Screen
3. In the Name field, type a name for the new provider.
4. From the Templates list box, select all available templates. Press and hold Ctrl to select
multiple templates.
5. Click Submit.
3 The new provider is created.
6. From the Content menu, select Structure > Categories.
3 The Categories screen displays.
7. Click New category.
3 The New category screen displays.

Getting Started
Figure 3.4: New category Screen
8. In the Name field, type a name for the new category.
9. From the Content providers list box, select the provider you created.
10. Click Submit.

3 The new category is created.
Step 3: Import Accounts
1. From the End-users menu, select Bulk Operations > List imports.
3 The List imports screen displays.
2. Click Create import.
3 The Import accounts screen (1 of 2) displays (Figure 3.5 on page 26).

Getting Started
Figure 3.5: Import accounts Screen (1 of 2)
3. Select the following options:

• Select file: select the file you have previously imported to the CM server
• New accounts: choose Create
• Existing accounts: choose Update, and check ALL options (Account details,
Billing, Device, Activate last device, and Services)
4. Click Next.

Getting Started
Figure 3.6: Import accounts Screen (2 of 2)
5. Review the options you selected, and click Start to start the bulk operation.
6. To refresh your view of the operation status until the Progression (fourth from the
bottom) has reached 100%, repeatedly click Refresh.
NOTE: To check that accounts were successfully imported, search for one of the MSISDNs
you imported to ensure that it is attached to the created service.
Searching for an MSISDN
1. From the End-users menu, select Users > Search account.

3 The Search account screen displays (Figure 3.7 on page 28).

Getting Started
Figure 3.7: Search account Screen
2. On the Search by address tab, type the MSISDN you imported in the Address field.
3. Click List accounts by address.

3 Search results display on the right.
Step 4: Creating Content
1. From the Content menu, select Data > New content.

3 The New content screen displays.
Figure 3.8: New content Screen

Getting Started

• Content provider: select the provider you created
• Template: select SMS Message system
• Content categories: select the category you created
• Name: type a name for the new content (for example, “Alert Message”)
3. Click Submit.
3 The new content is created, and the Details tab on the Edit content screen displays.
4. Click the Versions tab.
5. Click New content version.
3 The Add content version screen displays.
Figure 3.9: Add content version Screen

• Content version template: select SHORT
• Name: type a name for the new version (for example, “Default”)
• Status: select Published
• Language: select none
• Short content: type the text that will be sent by default (if no language was
selected for the campaign)
NOTE: You can utilize variables in the message: “$firstname” or “$lastname” for
the first and last names of the user. You may change the text later. For more
information about content variables, see “Adding Content Versions” on
page 144.

Getting Started
7. Click Submit.
3 The Compatibilities tab on the Edit content version screen for the new content
version displays (Figure 3.10 on page 31).
8. Check the Selected brands box.

3 The Compatibilities tab refreshes and displays a list of available devices by brand.
9. Select the brands to associate with the new content version. Press and hold Ctrl to select
multiple brands.
10. To list the specific features for the selected brands, check the Selected features box.
3 The Compatibilities tab refreshes and displays a drop-down list of features.
11. To list available device profiles, click Show device profiles.
3 The Compatibilities tab refreshes and displays a list of available device profiles.
Figure 3.10 on page 31 shows the Compatibilities tab expanded to display features,
brands, and device profiles.

Getting Started
Figure 3.10: Edit content version Screen — Compatibilities Tab
12. Select the device profiles to use with the content version.

Getting Started
13. Click Submit.

3 The Object has been successfully saved message displays across the top of the
Edit content screen.

• Content version template: select SHORT
• Name: type a name for the new version (for example, “English”)
• Status: select Published
• Language: select English
• Short content: type the text that will be sent in English
16. Click Submit.

3 The Compatibilities tab for the new content version displays.
17. Check the Selected brands box. In the list of brands that displays, select all brand
devices for the new content version. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands.
18. To list the device profiles available for the selected brands, click Show device profiles.
3 The Compatibilities tab expands to show device profiles.
19. Check the boxes next to all compatible devices.
20. Click Submit.

screen.

• Content version template — select SHORT
• Name — type a name for the new version (for example, “French”)
• Status — select Published
• Language — select French
• Short content — type the text that will be sent in French
23. Click Submit.

3 The Compatibilities tab for the new content version displays.
24. Check the Selected brands box. From the list of brands that displays, select the brand
devices for the new content version. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brand devices.

Getting Started
25. To list the specific device profiles for the selected brands, click Show device profiles.
3 The Compatibilities tab expands to show device profiles.
26. Select all compatible devices.
27. Click Submit.

screen.
Step 5: Configuring Delivery Options
1. From the Delivery menu, select Content > Topics.
2. Click Show table to view a list of created topics.
3. Ensure that a topic was created following the new content creation. It should have the
same name.
4. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Offers.
5. Click New offer.

3 The Create offer screen displays.
Figure 3.11: Create offer Screen
6. Provide the following information for the new offer:

• Name — type a name (for example, “Offer 1”)
• End-user service — select the service you previously created
• Application ID — select the ID that applies to your account
• Status — select Draft

Getting Started
• Technical — check this box to indicate that this is a technical offer

NOTE: Technical offers are used for passwords, activation codes, credit notifications, or
any kind of “dynamic content” depending on end-users profiles. These offers are
not reachable from storefronts.
7. Click Submit.
3 The Edit offer screen displays.
8. Click the Bundles tab.
9. Click New bundle.

3 The Create bundle screen displays.
Figure 3.12: Create bundle Screen
10. Provide the following information for the new bundle:

• Offer — select an offer for the bundle
• Name — type a name for the bundle (for example, “Bundle 1”)
• Session sequence — select Simple session
11. Click Submit.

3 The bundle is created, and the Details tab on the Edit bundle screen displays.
12. To manage topics associated with the bundle, click the Topics tab.

Getting Started
Figure 3.13: Edit bundle Screen — Topics Tab
13. Click a topic from the Topic name column corresponding to the previously created
content (it should have the same name).
14. Click Add topic.

3 The Topic and message patterns screen displays.
Figure 3.14: Topic and message patterns Screen
15. Select the previously created Message pattern.
16. Click Add.

3 The pattern is added to the list of authorized patterns for this topic.

Getting Started
17. To return to the Edit bundle screen, which now lists the selected topic and its associated
topic patterns, click Edit bundle.
Step 6: Configuring the MO Interface
NOTE: This step is optional. You need to perform the following actions only if you want to
configure an MO keyword enabling users to request the content you defined above.
1. On the Edit bundle screen, click the Triggers on message tab.
2. Click New trigger.

3 The Create trigger on message screen displays.
NOTE: This screen enables you to create a new trigger by defining several rules. This
trigger will enable the user to download content. To be activated, all conditions
defined in the trigger must be met.
3. Select filter(s) for the trigger. Upon reception of a message respecting these filters on the
Application ID associated with the parent offer, the content delivery will automatically be
triggered.
For example, for text criteria Content:

• Select the operator “contains” (default)
• Type “SMS” as the value to be checked
NOTE: These two criteria together stipulate that the search for content will find all
records that contain the text string “SMS.”
• Click the corresponding to add the filter
3 The new filter displays in the Current filters list on the right.
4. In the Type area:
• Select the operator “equal to” (default)
• Select the value “SMS”
NOTE: These two criteria together stipulate that the trigger will only be activated
by SMS messages.
• Click the corresponding to add the filter
3 The new filter displays in the Current filters list on the right.
5. After you have specified all filters, click Create trigger.
3 The Triggers on message tab displays again, listing the new trigger and its Current
filters. All SMS-MO received on the Application ID containing the keyword “SMS” will
trigger a content delivery.
NOTE: Notice that you can edit or remove the new trigger using the links at the far
right.

Getting Started
6. To return to the Edit offer screen, click Edit offer.
7. To define front-office (end-user) groups’ rights for the offer, click the End-users rights
tab.
Figure 3.15: Edit offer Screen — End-users rights Tab
8. Check the Buy offer box.
9. Select the group (previously created) from the Groups list.
10. Click Add right.

3 The end-user “Buy offer” right is assigned to the selected group, and displays on the
right.
NOTE: To delete a listed group and its associated right, click the next to the
corresponding group.
Step 7: Creating a Bulk Import Process
1. From the Content menu, select Import contents > Bulk process.
3 The Bulk process screen displays.
2. Click Create process.
3 The Create bulk process screen displays (Figure 3.16 on page 38).

Getting Started
Figure 3.16: Create bulk process Screen
3. Check Publish content to publish the contents created.
4. Check Publish content version to publish the content version created.
5. Select Skip to skip content bundles that already exist.
6. From the Content provider list, select a provider for the content.
7. Click Next.
3 The Targets tab on the Create bulk process screen displays.
Figure 3.17: Create bulk process Screen — Targets Tab
8. Select a Target type:

• Select ZIP file on file server allows you to select a .zip file that exists on the server.
• Upload zip allows you to upload a zip file containing the content to import. Enter the
complete file path in the field.

Getting Started
9. Click Next.
3 The Bulk flow control strategy tab displays.
10. Click Next.
3 The Timeslots tab displays.
11. Specify the days of the week and running time on which the process runs. Click Add
timeslot when finished.
EXAMPLE: Select every day of the week, select “08:00” as the Authorized start time,
select “20:00” as the Authorized end time, and click Add timeslot.
12. Click Next.

3 The Confirmation tab displays
13. Review the information and click Submit to launch the process.

4 Back-Office Management
Managing Back-Office Groups.................................................................................... 41

Viewing Back-Office Groups ...................................................................................... 41
Searching Back-Office Groups ................................................................................... 42
Creating a New Back-Office Group ............................................................................. 43
Editing a Back-Office Group ...................................................................................... 44
Deleting Back-Office Groups...................................................................................... 49
Defining Back-Office Global Rights ............................................................................. 49
Managing Back-Office Accounts ................................................................................. 51
Viewing Back-Office Accounts.................................................................................... 51
Searching Back-Office Accounts................................................................................. 52
Creating a New Back-Office Account........................................................................... 53
Editing a Back-Office Account.................................................................................... 54
Deleting Back-Office Accounts ................................................................................... 59

Back-Office Management
This chapter describes the functionality available from the Administrators menu. The
options in the Administrators menu are intended only for those users who have
administrative rights on the applications: administrators and back-office accounts. In
addition, the Administrators menu is accessible only if you are a member of an authorized
group. Authorized groups are groups with at least one right over a back-office group.
For a complete listing of rights used by Content Manager, see “Understanding Rights” on
page 11.
Managing Back-Office Groups
The Administrators menu enables management of administrator groups. They are groups
of administrators to which you can attribute rights for specific resources: contents, front-
office groups, other back-office groups, and more.
Viewing Back-Office Groups
The List Groups option found under the Administrators menu lists all authorized
administrator groups.
NOTE: Only groups to which you have rights are listed.
To view a list of all back-office groups:
1. From the Administrators menu, select Groups > List groups.

3 The List groups > Filters screen displays.

3 The List groups screen displays. For information about the List groups > Filters
screen, see “Searching Back-Office Groups” on page 42.
Figure 4.1: List groups Screen

The List groups screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content
Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working With
Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the List groups screen, you can perform the following
tasks:
• From the Name column, click a group name to edit. For more information about
editing a group, see “Editing a Back-Office Group” on page 44.
• Click New Group to create a new back-office group. For more information, see
“Creating a New Back-Office Group” on page 43.
• Click Delete to remove all selected groups. For more information, see “Deleting Back-
Office Groups” on page 49.
NOTE: You must have the “delete children groups” right for all parent groups from
which to remove child groups. The Parent groups column displays the
parent groups to which a child group is assigned.
• Click Global Rights to modify permissions on all back-office groups. For more
information, see “Defining Back-Office Global Rights” on page 49.
Searching Back-Office Groups
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of groups specific to
that criteria.
To manage back-office group filters:
1. From the List groups screen (Figure 4.1 on page 41), click Edit filters.
3 The List groups > Filters screen displays.
Figure 4.2: List groups > Filters Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter
determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about using
filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.

Creating a New Back-Office Group
NOTE: To create a new back-office group associated with an existing group, you must have
the “create children groups” right for the existing group or the “create groups
anywhere” right.
To create a back-office group:
1. From the Administrators menu, select Groups > List groups.

3 The List groups screen displays (Figure 4.1 on page 41).
2. Click New group.

NOTE: The New group function is also available when searching for or editing a
group. For more information, see “Searching Back-Office Groups” on
page 42 and “Editing a Back-Office Group” on page 44.
3. In the Name field, type a name for the group.
4. In the Description field, type a short description of the group (optional).
5. From the Parent groups list, select the parent groups with which to associate the group.
Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple parent groups.
NOTE: Only groups for which you have the “create children groups” right display in
the Parent groups list.
6. Click Submit to create the new group.

Editing a Back-Office Group
NOTE: To edit a group, you must have the appropriate rights. For more about these rights,
see “Group Rights” on page 12.
To edit a group:
1. From the Name column on the List groups screen (Figure 4.1 on page 41), click a group
to edit.
3 The Edit group screen displays.
Figure 4.4: Edit group Screen — Details Tab
The Edit group screen displays the following information:

• Name — The name of the group. The group name can be modified only if you have the
“update children groups” right granted to a parent group. The name should be unique
(two groups cannot have the same name).
• Description (optional) — A description of the group. The group description can be
modified only if you have the “update children groups” right granted to a parent group.
• Pass on rights — Select Yes to automatically transmit rights to each child group
associated to the group you are modifying. If you select no, then rights will not be
automatically transmitted and will have to be changed manually for each child of the
edited group. This setting can be modified only if you have the “update children
groups” right for a parent group. All groups that have rights for the edited group
automatically inherit rights for its child groups.
• Creation date — The date on which the group was created (cannot be modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the group was last modified (updated
automatically).

Using the Edit Group Screen
From the Edit group screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New group to create a new group. For more information about creating a group,
see “Creating a New Back-Office Group” on page 43.
• If you have the appropriate rights, click Delete to remove the edited group. For more
information about deleting a group, see “Deleting Back-Office Groups” on page 49.
• Click Associated accounts to list accounts using a filter to display only accounts
attached to this group.
• Click List groups to return to the List groups screen. For more information about
viewing groups, see “Viewing Back-Office Groups” on page 41.
• Click Submit to apply any changes to the group.
• Click the Parent groups tab to manage associated parent groups. For more
information about parent groups, see “Using the Parent Groups Tab” on page 56.
• Click the Rights on group tab to grant rights to the edited group to other back-office
groups. For more information about granting rights, see “Using the Rights On Group
Tab” on page 47.
• Click the Navigation rights tab to display all navigation rights granted to this group.
For more information about navigation rights, see “Using the Navigation Rights Tab” on
page 48.

Using the Parent Groups Tab
The Parent groups tab on the Edit group screen allows you to add or remove parent
groups from the edited group.
Figure 4.5: Edit group Screen — Parent groups Tab
The Parent groups tab displays the following information:

• Available groups — A list of the authorized groups that are not already a parent of
the edited group.
• Parent groups — A list of the groups that are currently parents of the edited group.
Adding a Parent Group
To add a parent group:
1. From the Available groups list, select a group or set of groups to add. Press and hold
Ctrl to select multiple groups.
2. Click Add to selected groups > to add the selection to the Parent groups list.
Deleting a Parent Group
To remove a parent group:
1. From the Parent groups list, select a group or set of groups to remove. Press and hold

2. Click < Remove from selected groups to remove the selected group or groups from
the Parent groups list and add them to the Available groups list.
NOTE: If you de-select all groups from the list, you will no longer be able to see the edited
group unless you have all rights granted on all back-office groups.
Using the Rights On Group Tab
The Rights on group tab allows you to define rights granted to other back-office groups
associated with the edited group. For information about granting rights to all back-office
groups simultaneously, see “Group Rights” on page 12.
NOTE: You may only grant rights that you already have on the target group(s).
Figure 4.6: Edit group Screen — Rights on group Tab
Adding Rights to Groups
1. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a complete description of back-office group
rights, see “Group Rights” on page 12.
2. From the Groups list, select the groups to which to grant rights. Press and hold Ctrl to
select multiple groups.
3. Click Add right.

3 The rights granted to each group selected is displayed on the right side of the tab.

Revoking Group Rights
To remove rights, click the next to each right to revoke.
Using the Navigation Rights Tab
The Navigation rights tab on the Edit group screen allows you to define access to the Web
administration pages. You cannot use the Navigation rights tab to define rights directly to
managed objects.
For example, you may give access to a back-office group to the End-users menu, but you
will also need to grant rights for end-user services and groups to enable this back-office
group to completely manage end-users.
Granting Access to a Resource
To grant access to a resource:
1. From the Edit group screen, click the Navigation rights tab.
3 The Navigation rights tab displays.
Figure 4.7: Edit group Screen — Navigation rights Tab
2. From the Resources list, select the resources (navigation nodes on the back-office
interface). Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple resources. You can also select All
navigation nodes to grant rights on all menus. All menus are listed in the Resources
list, from the most generic level down to the most detailed level.

• For example, in the Administrators menu, you can grant rights on the whole
Administrators menu by selecting it, or select a more specific item to which to grant
rights, such as the List Groups function.
NOTE: These rights apply only to navigation resources (menus on the Web
administration interfaces). External systems using the platform APIs are not
affected by these rights.
3. Click Add right.

3 The right and resource display in the two-column list on the right.
Revoking Resource Access
To revoke access by a resource, click the next to each resource from which to remove
access.
Deleting Back-Office Groups
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to delete a group. For more
information about rights, see “Group Rights” on page 12.
To delete a back-office group:
1. From the List groups screen, check the box next to the groups to delete. Check the box
at the top of the column to quickly select all groups.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected groups?” displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void the deletion.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited group by clicking Delete on the Edit group screen.
Defining Back-Office Global Rights
The Global rights screen allows you to manage rights affecting all back-office groups and
accounts. For information about granting rights to a specific group, see “Using the Rights On
Group Tab” on page 47.
NOTE: You may manage only those rights already granted to you.

Granting Global Rights
To grant global rights:
1. From the List Groups screen, click Global rights.

3 The Global rights screen displays.
Figure 4.8: Global rights Screen
2. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a complete description of group rights, see
“Group Rights” on page 12.
3. From the Groups list, select the groups that will benefit from the rights. Press and hold
4. Click Add right.

3 The rights and their associated groups are displayed on the right side of the screen.
Revoking Global Rights
To remove global rights:
1. Click the next to each granted right to revoke.

Managing Back-Office Accounts
The Administrators menu also enables management of administrator accounts. An account

can be used by a physical user (an administrator) or a virtual user (an external system), and
can be attached to one or several parent groups from which it inherits rights.
Viewing Back-Office Accounts
The List accounts screen lists all authorized back-office accounts.
NOTE: Only accounts members of groups for which you have rights are listed. A default
filter is active to hide all “system” accounts and show only “user” accounts.
1. From the Administrators menu, select Accounts > List accounts.

3 The List accounts > Filters screen displays.

3 The List accounts screen displays a list of all back-office accounts. For information
about List accounts > Filters screen, see “Searching Back-Office Accounts” on
page 52.
Figure 4.9: List accounts Screen
The List accounts screen displays the following information:

• Name — The account login name. Click a name to edit the account. For more
information about editing an account, see “Editing a Back-Office Account” on page 54.
• Description — A short description of the account.
• Status — The account status: Active (can login) or Inactive (cannot login).
• Type — The account type: External system (an application or system accessing the
system using the API) or User (physical user accessing the Web interfaces).
• First name — The first name of the administrator.
• Last name — The last name of the administrator.

• Parent Groups — Parent group(s) associated with each account. Accounts

automatically inherit rights from all associated parent groups.
• Allowed IPs — IP limitations for the account.
Using the List Accounts Screen
The List accounts screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in
Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and Working
With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the List accounts screen, you can perform the
following tasks:
• Click an item in the Name column to edit an account. For more information about
editing accounts, see “Editing a Back-Office Account” on page 54.
• Click New account to create a new account. For more information about creating
accounts, see “Creating a New Back-Office Account” on page 53.
NOTE: New account is available only if the “create children accounts” right is
granted for a back-office group, or the “create account anywhere” right is
granted.
• Click Delete to remove selected account(s). You must have the right to “delete any
account”, or the right to “delete children accounts” by a parent group.
Searching Back-Office Accounts
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of groups specific to
that criteria.
To edit account filters:
1. From the List accounts screen, click Edit filters.

3 The List accounts > Filters screen displays (Figure 4.10 on page 53).

Figure 4.10: List accounts > Filters Screen
Creating a New Back-Office Account
NOTE: To create a new group associated with an existing group, you must have the
“create children groups” right for the existing group, or the “create groups
anywhere” right.
To create an account:
1. From the List accounts screen (Figure 4.9 on page 51), click New account.
3 The New account screen displays (Figure 4.11 on page 54).
NOTE: The New account function is also available when searching for or editing an
account. For more information, see “Searching Back-Office Accounts” on page 52
and “Editing a Back-Office Account” on page 54.

Figure 4.11: New account Screen
2. In the Login field, enter a login name for the account. The login name must be unique.
3. In the Password field, enter a login password for the account.
4. In the Password confirmation field, enter the login password a second time for
confirmation.
5. Select the status of the account: Active or Inactive. If Inactive is selected, the
administrator will not be able to access Content Manager.
6. From the Parent groups list, select one or several parent groups for the new account.
Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple parent groups.
NOTE: Only groups for which you have the “create children accounts” right are listed in the
Parent groups list.
7. Click Submit.
Editing a Back-Office Account
To edit an account, you must have at least one of the following rights for one of its parent
groups (or for all groups):
• “update children accounts” (or “update any account”) — to modify its properties
• “manage children accounts” (or “manage any account”) — to change its parent groups

To edit an account:
1. From the Name column on the List accounts screen, click an account to edit.
3 The Details tab on the Edit account screen displays.
Figure 4.12: Edit account Screen — Details Tab
From the Edit account screen, you can also perform the following tasks:
• Click New account to create a new account. For more information, see “Creating a
New Back-Office Account” on page 53.
• Click Delete to remove the edited account. This is available only if you have the
appropriate rights. For more information, see “Deleting Back-Office Accounts” on
page 59.
• Click List accounts to return to the List accounts screen. For more information, see
“Viewing Back-Office Accounts” on page 51.
• Click the Details tab to view and modify general information about the account. For
more information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 56.
• Click the Parent groups tab to access parent group information for the edited
account. Groups displayed are groups to which you have the “manage child groups”
right. For more information, see “Using the Parent Groups Tab” on page 56.

• Click the IP restrictions tab to access IP verification rules for the edited account. For
more information, see “Using the IP Restrictions Tab” on page 58.
Using the Details Tab
The Details tab on the Edit account screen displays the following account information:
• Login — The login name for the account. This name can be modified, but it must be
unique (two accounts cannot have the same login).
• New password — Type a new password for the account.
• Confirm new password — Type the new password for a second time for
confirmation.
• Description (optional) — Type a description of the account.
• Type — The type of account. Select User (a physical user accessing the web
interface), or External system (an application or system accessing the system using
the API).
• Status — Select Active to allow login to back-office accounts, or select Inactive to
disable the login.
• Last name — Last name of the administrator who will use the account.
• First name — First name of the administrator who will use the account.
• E-mail address — E-mail address of the administrator who will use the account.
• Phone number — Phone number of the administrator who will use the account.
• Creation date — Creation date of the account. Cannot be modified.
• Last modification date — Date of last modification; automatically updated.
Click Submit to save any changes.
The Parent groups tab on the Edit account screen allows you to add or remove parent
groups from the edited account.
NOTE: To associate an account to a parent group, you must have the “manage children
accounts” right for one of its current parent groups AND for the target groups (or
have the “manage any account” right for all groups).
To manage parent groups for the selected account, from the Edit account screen, click the
Parent groups tab.
3 The Parent groups tab displays (Figure 4.13 on page 57).

Figure 4.13: Edit account Screen — Parent groups Tab
Adding Parent Groups to an Account
To add parent groups:
1. From the Available groups list, select a group or set of groups to add. Press and hold
2. Click Add to selected groups > to add the selection to the Parent groups list.
Removing Parent Groups From an Account
To remove parent groups:
1. From the Parent groups list, select a group or set of groups to remove. Press and hold
2. Click < Remove from selected groups to remove the selected group or groups from
the Parent groups list and add them to the Available groups list.
NOTE: If you remove all groups from the list, you will no longer be able to see the edited
group unless you have all rights granted on all back-office groups.

Using the IP Restrictions Tab
When an administrator or external system tries to connect to Content Manager, the system
checks the coherence of its login, password, and IP address.
Adding Authorized IP Addresses
To add authorized IP addresses to the selected account:
1. From the Edit account screen, click the IP restrictions tab.

3 The IP restrictions tab displays.
Figure 4.14: Edit accounts Screen — IP restrictions Tab
2. Specify a range of IP addresses that are authorized to access Content Manager using the
edited account.
• IP range: Enter a minimum IP and a maximum IP, then click Add to add them one by
one to the list of Authorized IP addresses.
• IP subnet: Enter the IP address and NetMask to define the IP addresses authorized to
access Content Manager using the edited account. Click Add to add them one by one
to the list of Authorized IP addresses.
• IP address: Specify individual IP addresses that are authorized to access Content
Manager using the edited account. Enter one IP address at a time. Click Add to add
them one by one to the list of Authorized IP addresses.
3. Local VM — This option only applies to external systems that are executed in the same
java virtual machine as Content Manager and, consequently, are located on the same
server. Click Add to add the option.

Removing Authorized IP Addresses
To remove authorized IP addresses:
1. From the Authorized IP addresses list, select the addresses to remove. Press and hold
Ctrl to select multiple addresses.
2. Click Remove selected IPs.
Deleting Back-Office Accounts
NOTE: You must have the “delete any account” right in order to delete an account.
To delete an account:
1. From the List accounts screen (Figure 4.9 on page 51), check the box next to one or
several accounts to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all
accounts.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected accounts?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited account by clicking Delete on the Edit account
screen.

5 Front-Office Management
Managing Services................................................................................................... 61
Viewing Services ..................................................................................................... 61
Searching Services .................................................................................................. 62
Creating a New Service ............................................................................................ 62
Editing a Service ..................................................................................................... 64
Deleting a Service ................................................................................................... 69
Managing Global Service Rights ................................................................................. 69
Managing Front-Office Groups ................................................................................... 71
Viewing Front-Office Groups...................................................................................... 71
Searching Front-Office Groups................................................................................... 72
Creating a New Front-Office Group ............................................................................ 73
Editing a Front-Office Group...................................................................................... 74
Deleting a Front-Office Group.................................................................................... 80
Managing Front-Office Accounts ................................................................................ 81
Searching for a Front-Office Account .......................................................................... 81
Creating a New Front-Office Account .......................................................................... 83
Editing a Front-Office Account ................................................................................... 84
Deleting a Front-Office Account ................................................................................. 97
Searching Front-Office Account History Logs ............................................................... 98
Managing Mobile Devices.......................................................................................... 99
Searching for a Device by IMEI ................................................................................. 99
Searching for Devices by Unresolved IMEI ................................................................ 100
Searching Devices by Unresolved IMEIs.................................................................... 100
Uploading Accounts ............................................................................................... 101
Viewing Account Imports ........................................................................................ 101
Searching Bulk Account Imports .............................................................................. 102
Creating a Bulk Account Import File ......................................................................... 102

Front-Office Management
This chapter describes the functionality available from the End-users menu. The options in
the End-users menu are available for managing users without administration rights on
front-office applications. For more information about rights, see “Understanding Rights” on
page 11.
Managing Services
Services correspond to different branded sites that distribute content stored in Content
Manager. A service may be associated with several groups.
Viewing Services
NOTE: You must have the right to “read service” in order to view services.
To view a list of authorized services:
1. From the End-users menu, select Structure > List services.

3 The Services > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of services on the Services screen. For information about
the Filters screen, see “Searching Services” on page 62.
3 The Services screen displays a list of all available services.
Figure 5.1: Services Screen
Using the Services Screen
The Services screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content
Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Services screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a service name to edit. For more information, see
“Editing a Service” on page 64.

• Click New service to create a new service. For more information, see “Creating a New
Service” on page 62.
• Click Delete to remove all selected services. For more information, see “Deleting a
• Click Rights on all services to modify permissions on all services. For more
information, see “Managing Global Service Rights” on page 69.
Searching Services
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of services specific to
that criteria.
To manage service filters:
1. From the Services screen (Figure 5.1 on page 61), click Edit filters.
3 The Services > Filters screen displays.
Figure 5.2: Services > Filters Screen
Creating a New Service
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights granted in order to create a new service. For
more information about rights, see “Service Rights” on page 14.
To create a new service:
1. From the Services screen (Figure 5.1 on page 61), click New service.
NOTE: The New service function is also available when searching for or editing a service.
For more information, see “Searching Services” on page 62 and “Editing a Service”
on page 64.
3 The New service screen displays (Figure 5.3 on page 63).

Figure 5.3: New service Screen
2. From the Service type list, select a type for the new service.
3. In the Name field, type a name for the service. The service name must be unique (two
services cannot have the same name).
4. Check the Subscribe anonymous account box to automatically subscribe the

“anonymous_login” account to the service.
5. In the Description field, enter a short description of the service (optional).
6. From the Languages list, select the languages to use with the service. Press and hold
Ctrl to select multiple languages.
7. From the Countries & Operators list, select the available country and operator codes to
use with the service. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple codes.
8. Click Submit.
3 The Edit service screen displays allowing you to modify details about the service and
rights associated to it. For more information, see “Editing a Service” on page 64.

Editing a Service
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights granted in order to edit services. For more
information about rights, see “Service Rights” on page 14.
To modify a service:
1. From the Name column on the Services screen, click a service to edit.
NOTE: The Edit service screen also displays immediately after you create a new service.
3 The Details tab on the Edit service screen displays.
Figure 5.4: Edit service Screen — Details Tab
From the Edit services screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New service to create a new service. For more information, see “Creating a New
• Click Delete to delete the selected service. For more information, see “Deleting a
• Click Associated groups to access the front-office groups list using a filter to show
only those groups that are associated with this service.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify general information about the service. For
• Click the Languages tab to view or modify the languages used with the service. For
more information, see “Using the Languages Tab” on page 65.
• Click the Rights tab to view or modify rights affecting the edited service. For more
information, see “Using the Rights Tab” on page 66.

• Click the Countries & Operators tab to view or modify the country and operator
codes used with the service. For more information, see “Using the Countries &
Operators Tab” on page 67.
The Details tab on the Edit services screen (Figure 5.4 on page 64) displays the following
information about the service:
• Service type —the type of service defined during service setup; cannot be modified
• Name — the name of the service; can be modified
• Description — an optional description of the service; can be modified
• Creation date — the date on which the service was created; cannot be modified
• Last modification date — the date on which the service was last modified; updated
automatically
Using the Languages Tab
The Languages tab on the Edit service screen allows you to add or remove language
support from the service.
Figure 5.5: Edit service Screen — Languages Tab

Adding Language Support
To add language support to the service:
1. From the Available languages list, select the languages for which to add support. Press
and hold Ctrl to select multiple languages.
2. Click Add to selected languages >.

3 The selected languages display in the Languages list.
Removing Language Support
To remove language support from the service:
1. From the Languages list, select the languages from which to remove support. Press and
hold Ctrl to select multiple languages.
2. Click < Remove from selected languages.

3 The selected languages display in the Available languages list.
Using the Rights Tab
The Rights tab on the Edit service screen allows you to add or remove rights to groups
associated with the service.
Adding Service Rights
To grant service rights to associated groups:
1. From the Edit service screen, click the Rights tab.

3 The Rights tab displays (Figure 5.6 on page 67).
NOTE: Only back-office groups to which you have rights are listed. You can grant or revoke
only those rights you already have on services.

Figure 5.6: Edit service Screen — Rights Tab
2. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of each right available, see
“Service Rights” on page 14.
3. From the Groups list, select the back office groups to which to grant the selected rights.
Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups.
4. Click Add right.

3 The rights granted and their associated groups display on the right side of the tab.
Revoking Service Rights
To remove service rights from groups, click the next to each right to revoke.
Using the Countries & Operators Tab
The Countries & Operators tab on the Edit service screen allows you to select specific
country and operators to use with the service.
NOTE: Countries and operators must be added to the database before they can be used
with a service. For more information, see “Adding a Country” on page 461.

Figure 5.7: Edit service Screen > Countries & Operators Tab
Adding Country and Operator Support
To add country and operator support to the service:
1. From the Available countries & operators list, select the countries and operators for
which to add support. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple items.
2. Click Add to selected countries & operators >.

3 The selected countries and operators display in the Associated countries &
operators list.
Removing Country and Operator Support
To remove country and operator support from the service:
1. From the Associated countries & operators list, select the items from which to
remove support. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple items.
2. Click < Remove from selected countries & operators.

3 The selected languages display in the Available countries & operators list.

Deleting a Service
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights granted in order to delete services. For more
information about rights, see “Service Rights” on page 14.
To delete a service:
1. From the Services screen (Figure 5.1 on page 61), check the box next to the services to
delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all services.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected services?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited service by clicking Delete on the Edit service
screen.
Managing Global Service Rights
The Rights on services screen (Figure 5.8 on page 70) allows you to manage rights on
groups affecting all services. To manage rights on groups for a selected service, see “Using
the Rights Tab” on page 66.
NOTE: Only back-office children groups to which you have rights are listed. You can grant
or revoke only those rights already granted on services.
To view or modify rights granted to all services:
1. From the Services screen (Figure 5.1 on page 61), click Rights on services.
3 The Rights on services screen displays (Figure 5.8 on page 70).

Figure 5.8: Rights on services Screen
Granting Service Rights
To add service rights:
1. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of each service right
available, see “Service Rights” on page 14.
NOTE: You may only grant rights that you already have on services, and you must
have the “Read service” right granted in order to list accounts on which you
have rights.
NOTE: The “create children accounts” right can be granted from the Rights on
services screen only. In order to enable an administrator group to create
new accounts for only a certain service, you must grant the right “subscribe
service” to that specific service.
2. From the Groups list, select the groups to which to grant the selected rights. Press and
hold Ctrl to select multiple groups.
3. Click Add right.

3 The rights granted and their associated groups display on the right side of the screen.

Revoking Service Rights
To delete a service right, click the next to each right you to revoke.
Managing Front-Office Groups
Front-office groups are sets of consumer accounts within a specific service. The Groups
option found under the End-users menu lists all authorized front-office groups.
Viewing Front-Office Groups
To view a list of front-office groups:
1. From the End-users menu, select Structure > Groups.

3 The Groups > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to display the list of front-office groups. For information about the
Filters screen, see “Searching Front-Office Groups” on page 72.
NOTE: Only groups associated with services to which you have rights are listed.
Figure 5.9: Groups Screen
The Groups screen displays the following information:

• Name — group name
• Description — group description (if available)
• User association — indicates whether end-users are associated to the group
automatically or manually
• Service — name of the parent service for each group
NOTE: Each group is associated to one service to which rights are granted.

Using the Groups Screen
The Groups screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content
Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Groups screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a group to edit. For more information, see “Editing a
Front-Office Group” on page 74.
• Click New Group to create a new group. For more information, see “Creating a New
• Click Delete to remove all selected groups. For more information, see “Deleting a
Searching Front-Office Groups
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of front-office groups
specific to that criteria.
To edit filters, from the List groups screen (Figure 5.9 on page 71), click Edit filters.
3 The Groups > Filters screen displays.
Figure 5.10: Groups > Filters Screen

Creating a New Front-Office Group
NOTE: You must have the “create children groups” right granted to the parent service in
order to create a group.
To create a new group:
1. From the Groups screen (Figure 5.9 on page 71), click New group.
NOTE: The New group function is also available when searching for or editing a group.
For more information, see “Searching Front-Office Groups” on page 72 and “Editing
a Front-Office Group” on page 74.
2. From the Service list, select a parent service for the new group.
NOTE: Only those services to which you have rights are available.
3. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the group. No two groups can have the same
name.
4. In the Description field, enter a short description of the group (optional).
5. Select the type of user association for the group. Choose Automatic to associate end-
users to the group automatically, or Manual to associate end-users manually.
NOTE: You must associate at least one active rule in order to use automatic association.
For information about group rules, see “Adding and Editing Rules” on page 79.
6. Click Submit.

Editing a Front-Office Group
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights granted in order to edit a front-office group.
For information about rights, see “Group Rights” on page 12.
To access the Edit Group screen:
1. From the Groups screen (Figure 5.9 on page 71), select a group by clicking the group
Name in the list.
3 Depending on the User association setting of the selected group, one of two screens
displays:
• If the group selected is set with a Manual user association, the Edit group screen
displays two tabs: Details and Rights.
Figure 5.12: Edit group Screen, (Manual user association) — Details Tab
• If the group selected is set with an Automatic user association, the Edit group
screen displays four tabs: Details, Rights, Active rules, and Draft rules tabs
(Figure 5.13 on page 75).

Figure 5.13: Edit group Screen, (Automatic user association) — Details Tab
Using the Edit Group Screen
From the Edit group screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New group to create a new group. For more information about creating a group,
see “Creating a New Front-Office Group” on page 73.
• Click Delete to delete the edited group. For more information about deleting a group,
see “Deleting a Front-Office Group” on page 80.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify group details. For more information, see “Using
the Details Tab” on page 76.
• Click the Rights tab to grant rights to the selected group. For more information about
granting rights, see “Using the Rights Tab” on page 76.
The following tasks are available only if the selected group uses Automatic user association:
• Click the Active rules tab to view rules currently used to associate users to the group.
For more information, see “Using the Active Rules Tab” on page 78.
• Click the Draft rules tab to define new association rules used to automatically
associate or disassociate users with the group. For more information, see “Using the
Draft Rules Tab” on page 78.

The Details tab on the Edit group screen is available to groups with either Automatic or
Manual user associations.
The Details tab (Figure 5.13 on page 75) displays the following information about the
selected group:
• Name — The name of the group. The group name can be modified only if you have the
“update children groups” right granted to a parent group. The name should be unique
(two groups cannot have the same name).
• Description — A description of the group. The group description can be modified only
if you have the “update children groups” right granted to a parent group (optional).
• User association — Indicates how end-users are associated with the group.
Automatic associates end-users to the group automatically, while Manual associates
end-users manually.
• Parent service — The name of the parent service associated with the group (cannot
be modified).
• Creation date — Creation date of the group (cannot be modified).
• Last modification date — Date of last modification (automatically updated).
The Rights tab on the Edit group screen (Figure 5.14 on page 77) allows you to manage
the edited group’s rights to manage accounts associated with select parent groups.
NOTE: Only those parent groups to which you have rights are listed. You may only assign
rights to parent groups that are already granted to you.

Figure 5.14: Edit group Screen — Rights Tab
EXAMPLE: Figure 5.14 shows that the edited group, Group 41, has been granted all rights
to children accounts of both the Super administrators and System accounts
groups.
Granting Rights
To grant group account rights:
1. Check the box each right to grant. For a description of each front-office group rights
available, see “Group Rights” on page 12.
2. From the Groups list, select the groups to which to grant the selected rights. Press and
3. Click Add right.

3 The rights granted to each group display in the list on the right side of the tab.
Revoking Rights
To remove group account rights:
Click the next to each granted right to revoke.

Using the Active Rules Tab
NOTE: The Active rules tab is available only when editing a group using automatic user
association. The information displayed is view-only.
To add or edit rules, click the Draft rules tab. For more information, see “Using the Draft
Rules Tab” on page 78.
NOTE: The User association status at the top of the screen displays whether a current
association process is running.
Using the Draft Rules Tab
The Draft rules tab allows you to define new association rules to be used to automatically
associate users to the selected group.
NOTE: The Draft rules tab is available only when editing a group using Automatic user
association.
If rules are currently active for the group, the Draft rules tab displays information regarding
each rule. Click Edit to modify the corresponding rule, or click Remove to delete the
corresponding rule.
In addition to viewing, editing, and removing currently active rules from the Draft rules tab,
you can also perform the following tasks:
• Click New group to create a new group. For more information, see “Creating a New
• Click Delete to delete the selected group. You must have the proper rights to perform
this task. For more information, see “Deleting a Front-Office Group” on page 80.
• Click Add new rule to define a rule for the association process. For more information,
see “Adding and Editing Rules” on page 79.
• Click Set as “All Users group” to remove all rules and automatically associate ALL
users to the group. You must then click Activate draft rules to perform this
operation.
• Click Activate draft rules to activate all rules. This function is available only after a
rule or set of rules has been defined for the group. A background process is launched
to check all existing accounts to see if they can be associated with the group or not. It
make take some time for large user bases. You can follow the progress of the process
through the Dynamic group process counter.
• Click Reset draft rules to delete all draft rules. This function is available only if draft
rules are active. Only rules already active are displayed.

Adding and Editing Rules
Rules apply to all information stored in the user account: account details, associated devices,
and addresses.
To add or modify rules:
1. From the Draft rules tab, click Add new rule.

3 The Edit rule > Filters screen displays.
Figure 5.15: Edit rule > Filters Screen
2. Enter the filter criteria as necessary, then click the corresponding to add the rule. For
more information about applying filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
NOTE: Check the not box to reverse the operator. For example, “contains” becomes “does
not contain”.
The following filter criteria is available:

• Last modification date — date account was last modified
• Status — active/inactive
• Billing type — prepaid/postpaid
• Device address — MSISDN number

• Address type — mobile, email, fax, or phone

• Address index — a range of addresses associated with the account
• IMSI — SIM card ID
• Device type — mobile, email, or phone
• Unresolved device model — true/false
• Device brand — brand of the device
• Device model — model of the device
• Device software version — software version used by the device
• Accounts in group — the group associated with the accounts to include in the
rule
3 Defined rules are then displayed in the Current filters portion of the screen. Filter
criteria includes the following:
• Account id — original name of the account
• Account alias — replacement name of the account
• Creation date — date account was created
3. Click Submit when finished to validate the defined rules, or click Cancel to return to the
Draft rules tab.
4. Before your rules can be applied, you must activate them. Click Activate draft rules to
start the activation process.
3 A confirmation message “Are you are sure you want to activate all draft rules?”
displays.
5. Click Ok to continue, or Cancel to void the activation.
Deleting a Front-Office Group
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights granted to parent services in order to delete
an associated group. For more information about rights, see “Group Rights” on
page 12.
NOTE: Deleting a group will not delete its associated accounts.
To delete a front-office group:
1. From the Groups screen (Figure 5.9 on page 71), check the box next to each group to
delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all groups.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected groups?” displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited group by clicking Delete on the Edit group screen.

Managing Front-Office Accounts
The End-users menu enables management of end-user accounts. An account can be used
by a physical user (an administrator) or a virtual user (an external system), and can be
attached to one or several services.
Searching for a Front-Office Account
You can search for an end-user account based on its address (MSISDN, email, or fixed-line
phone) or alias.
To search for an account:
1. From the End-users menu, select Users > Search account.

3 The Search by address tab on the Search account screen displays.
NOTE: Only accounts associated with services on which you have the “view children
groups” and “view children accounts” rights are available on the Search
account screen.
Figure 5.16: Search account Screen — Search by address Tab
The Search account screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Edit anonymous account to directly edit the “anonymous” account.
• Click the Search by address tab to search by address. For more information, see
“Performing a Search by Address” on page 82.
• Click the Search by alias tab to search by account alias. For more information, see
“Performing a Search by Alias” on page 82.

Performing a Search by Address
To perform a search by address:
1. Click the Search by address tab on the Search account screen.

3 The Search by address tab displays (Figure 5.16 on page 81).
2. In the Address field on the Search account screen, enter a mobile phone number or
email address associated with the desired accounts.
3. Click List accounts by address to perform the search.

3 If at least one account is found with a matching address, corresponding account
details are listed on the right side of the screen.
4. To edit a listed account, click Edit account next to the account to edit.
3 The Edit account screen displays (Figure 5.19 on page 85). For information about
editing an account, see “Editing a Front-Office Account” on page 84.
Performing a Search by Alias
To search for accounts based on an alias name:
1. From the Search account screen, click the Search by alias tab.
3 The Search by alias tab displays.
Figure 5.17: Search account Screen — Search by alias Tab
2. In the Alias field, enter an alias name by which to search accounts.
3. Click List accounts by alias to perform the search.

3 If at least one account is found with a matching alias, corresponding account details
are listed on the right side of the screen.
4. To edit a listed account, click Edit account next to the account to edit.
3 The Edit account screen displays (Figure 5.19 on page 85). For information about
editing an account, see “Editing a Front-Office Account” on page 84.

Creating a New Front-Office Account
NOTE: You must have the “create children accounts” right on all services in order to create
an end-user account. In order to subscribe the account to a service, you must have
the “subscribe services” right on the desired service. For more information about
rights, see “Understanding Rights” on page 11.
To create a new end-user account:
1. From the End-users menu, select Users > New account.

3 The New account screen displays.
Figure 5.18: New account Screen
2. From the Available services list, select one or several parent services for the account.
Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple services.
3. In the Alias field, enter an alias name for the account.
NOTE: The alias does not have to be unique. You can group accounts into search groups by
using the same alias for multiple accounts.
4. In the Password field, enter a password for the account. The account will not be created
without a password.
5. In the Password confirmation field, enter your password again to confirm. The
password entered here match the password entered in the Password field.
6. In the First name field, enter the first name of the end-user of this account.

7. In the Last name field, enter the last name of the end-user of this account.
8. Select whether the account status is Active or Inactive. If the account status is
Inactive, the end-user on this account cannot access the front-office interface.
9. Click Submit.
3 The Edit account screen displays (Figure 5.20 on page 87) allowing you to modify
the account further. For information about editing an account, see “Editing a Front-
Office Account”.
Editing a Front-Office Account
NOTE: The Edit account screen is available only after a new end-user account is created,
or after an existing account has been found through a search. For information
about creating an account, see “Creating a New Front-Office Account” on page 83.
For information about searching for an account, see “Searching for a Front-Office
Account” on page 81.
To edit an end-user account:
NOTE: The parent service or group on this account must have the “update children
accounts” right granted in order to modify end-user account properties. The parent
service or group must also have the “manage children accounts” right granted in
order to change the account’s parent groups. For more information about rights,
see “Understanding Rights” on page 11
1. From the Edit account screen, select a group by clicking the account Name in the list.
3 The Edit account screen displays (Figure 5.19 on page 85).

Figure 5.19: Edit account Screen — Details Tab
2. Modify as necessary the account attributes on each of the following tabs:

• Details (see “Using the Details Tab” on page 86)
• Services (see “Using the Services Tab” on page 87)
• Parent groups (see “Using the Parent Groups Tab” on page 87)
• Devices (see “Using the Devices Tab” on page 89)
• Addresses (see “Using the Addresses Tab” on page 91)
• Sim cards (see “Using the SIM Cards Tab” on page 93)
• Manage timeslots (see “Using the Manage Timeslots Tab” on page 94)
• Credit information (see “Using the Credit Information Tab” on page 95)
• History (see “Using the History Tab” on page 96)

In addition to modifying account information, you can also perform the following tasks from
the Edit account screen:
• Click New account to create a new account. For more information, see “Creating a
New Front-Office Account” on page 83.
• Click Delete account to remove the edited account. This is available only if you have
the appropriate rights granted. For more information, see “Deleting a Front-Office
Account” on page 97.
The Details tab on the Edit account screen (Figure 5.19 on page 85) displays the following
following account information:
• Alias — The alias name for the account (can be modified).
NOTE: The alias does not have to be unique. You can group accounts into
searchable groups by using the same alias for multiple accounts.
• New password — Enter a new password for the account.
• Confirm password — Enter the password again to confirm. The password entered
here match the password entered in the Password field.
• Status — Select whether the account is Active or Inactive. If the account status is
Inactive, the end-user on this account cannot access the front-office interface.
• Billing type — Select whether the account is Prepaid or Postpaid.
• Devices — If any devices are associated with this account, a list is displayed here.
Click the Devices tab to manage devices associated with this account. For more
information, see “Using the Devices Tab” on page 89.
• Addresses — If any mobile phone numbers (MSISDNs) or email addresses are
associated with this account a list is displayed here. Click Addresses to manage
addresses associated with this account. For more information, see “Using the
Addresses Tab” on page 91.
• First name (optional) — Type the first name of the end-user of this account.
• Last name (optional) — Type the last name of the end-user of this account.
• Address (optional) — Type the end-user’s residential street address.
• City (optional) — Type the end-user’s city of residence.
• Country (optional) — Type the end-user’s country of residence.
• Language (optional) — Using one of the following 2-character combinations, type the
primary language for the end-user account:
• “en” = English “fr” = French
• “ar” = Arabic “es” = Spanish

Using the Services Tab
The Services tab on the Edit account screen allows you to manage the services to which
the edited account is subscribed.
Figure 5.20: Edit account Screen — Services Tab
Subscribing to a Service
To subscribe to a service:
NOTE: You must have the “subscribe services” right on the target service in order to
associate an account with a service.
1. From the Service list, select the service to which to subscribe to the account.
2. Click Subscribe to service.

3 The new service subscription is listed on the right side of the Services tab.
Removing a Service Subscription
To remove a service subscription:
1. Click Unsubscribe next to the service subscription to remove from the account.
The Parent groups tab on the Edit account screen allows you to manage parent groups
associated to the account.
NOTE: To associate an account to a parent group, you must have the “manage children
accounts” right granted to a parent service or group associated with the account.

Figure 5.21: Edit account Screen — Parent groups Tab
From the Service drop-down list, select the service from which to view Available groups
and Parent groups.
NOTE: Only those services to which the end-user is subscribed and on which you have
rights are listed.
Adding Parent Groups
To add a parent group:
1. From the Available groups list, select the groups to add. Press and hold Ctrl to select
multiple groups.
2. Click Add groups > to add the selection to the Parent groups list.
Removing Parent Groups
To remove a parent group:
1. From the Parent groups list, select the groups to remove. Press and hold Ctrl to select
multiple groups.
2. Click < Remove groups to remove the selection from the Parent groups list.
3 The groups redisplay in the Available groups list.

Using the Devices Tab
The Devices tab on the Edit account screen allows you to manage the devices associated
with the selected account.
Figure 5.22: Edit account Screen — Devices Tab
Adding a Device
To add a new device:
1. From the Device type list, select the type of device (Mobile, email, or phone) for this
account.
2. In the Name field, enter a personal name for the device (optional).
3. Select the method by which the device is created: IMEI or Terminal.

3 If you select IMEI, the Devices tab refreshes. Enter the IMEI number in the new
IMEI field. Content Manager will attempt to identify the device model based on the
IMEI. If Content Manager cannot identify the device model, the device will be added
as “unknown”.
3 If you select Terminal, the Device tab refreshes. Select the brand of device from the
Brand list, then select a device model from the Terminal list.
4. Click Create new device.

3 The newly created device details are listed on the right side of the tab.
Deleting a Device
To remove a device from the account, click Remove next to each active device to remove.

Editing Device Details
To edit a device’s details:
1. From the Device column in the list of added devices, click a device to view or modify
device details.
3 The Details tab on the Edit device details screen displays.
Figure 5.23: Edit device details Screen — Details Tab
2. Modify the necessary device details. Details include the following:

• Type — the device type (mobile phone, email, or fixed-line phone); cannot be
modified
• Brand — the device brand
• Terminal — the device model
• IMEI — the International Mobile Equipment Identity (if available)
NOTE: If you modify the IMEI, the device brand and model may be updated.
• Name — the personal name assigned to the device
3. Click Submit to save any changes.
Viewing or Removing Referencing Devices
To view or remove an existing device already associated to the account:
1. From the Edit device details screen, click the referencing device tab.
3 The referencing device tab displays.

The referencing device tab displays the following information:

• Type — the type of device: Mobile, Email, or Phone
• Name — the personal name of the device
• Device — the device brand and model
Click Remove next to the device to remove from the account.
Using the Addresses Tab
The Addresses tab on the Edit account screen allows you to manage the addresses and
associated devices defined for the selected account. An address can be a mobile phone
number (MSISDN), an email address, or a fixed-line phone number.
Figure 5.24: Edit account Screen — Addresses Tab
1. From the Address type list, select a type of address (Mobile, Email, or Phone).
3 Depending on the address type selected, the Addresses tab refreshes and displays
one of the following fields just below the Name field:
• MSISDN — type the MSISDN address for the Mobile address type
• Email — type the email address for the Email address type
• Land phone — type the fixed-line phone number for the Phone address type
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the address (optional).
3. From the Device list, select an currently associated device.
4. From the Mcc list, select a Mobile Country Code (if available).
5. From the Mnc list, select a Mobile Network Code (if available).

6. Click Create new address to add the address to the account.

3 The newly created address displays in detail on the right side of the Addresses tab.
• To delete an address from the account, click Remove next to the address to delete
from the list.
• To modify a device in the list, click an item under the Device column to modify.
3The Edit device details screen displays (Figure 5.23 on page 90).
• To modify an address in the list, click an item under the Address column to
modify.
3The Edit address details screen displays.
Figure 5.25: Edit address details Screen
Editing Address Details
To edit address details:
1. Make changes as necessary on the Edit address details screen. The following
information is provided:
• Type —the type of device: Mobile, Email, or Phone (cannot be modified)
• MSISDN, Email, or Phone — the address for a Mobile type, the email address for an
Email type, or fixed-line phone number for a Phone type (cannot be modified)
• Name (optional) — the name for the address
• Device — the type of device
2. From the Mcc list, select a Mobile Country Code (if available).

3. From the Mnc list, select a Mobile Network Code (if available).
Using the SIM Cards Tab
The SIM Cards tab on the Edit account screen allows you to modify the SIM cards
associated to the account. CM uses the IMSI number to identify SIM cards used by mobile
subscribers. An IMSI can be attached to only one end-user. However, several IMSI can be
active at the same time if the end-user has several SIM cards active at the same time.
Figure 5.26: Edit account Screen — SIM cards Tab
Adding SIM Cards to an Account
To add a SIM card:
1. In the IMSI field, enter the IMSI number located on the back of the SIM card to add to
the account.
2. From the Associated address list, select the address of the device.
3. Click Create.
3 The newly added SIM card information displays on the right side of the SIM cards
tab.
Deleting SIM Cards From an Account
To delete a SIM card, click Remove next to the active SIM card to remove from the account.
NOTE: SIM cards associated with an address cannot be removed.

Editing a SIM Card
To edit a SIM card:
1. From the list of associated SIM cards, click Edit next to the SIM card to edit.
• To edit an address: from the list of associated SIM cards, click the address to edit.
3The Edit address details screen displays. For more information about editing
an address, see the “Edit address details Screen” on page 92.
• To edit a device: from the list of associated SIM cards, click the device to edit.
3The Edit device details screen displays. For more information about editing a
device, see the “Editing Device Details” on page 90.
Using the Manage Timeslots Tab
The Manage timeslots tab on the Edit account screen allows you to define the time frame
in which message reception for the account is authorized.
NOTE: If no timeslots are defined, reception on the device is always active. If one or
several timeslots are defined, then reception is active only during those timeslots.
Figure 5.27: Edit account Screen — Manage timeslots Tab

Adding a Timeslot
To add a timeslot:
1. Check the box next to each day of the week the account is authorized for reception.
2. Select the time of day at which to start reception authorization. The format is hh:mm in
one 24 hour period, and a “00” hour = 12:00 AM.
3. Select the time of day at which to end reception authorization. The format is hh:mm in
one 24 hour period, and a “00” hour = 12:00 AM.
4. From the On drop-down list, select the device on which the timeslot will apply.
5. Click Add time slot.

3 All applied timeslots display on the right side of the Manage timeslots tab, and are
noted on the graph at the bottom of the tab. Green cells on the graph represent active
reception during those hours, while blue cells represent inactive reception.
Removing a Timeslot
To remove a timeslot, click Remove next to the timeslot to remove.
Using the Credit Information Tab
Users that use their accounts to make purchases sometimes receive discount “points” from
the storefronts from which they buy. Points are awarded for loyalty purchases, for example:
recurring purchases or purchases over a designated cost. Points can then be deducted from
an account to offset purchase prices.
The Credit information tab on the Edit account screen keeps track of the number of points
available to the account. Points displayed may be updated automatically by Content Manager,
or updated manually by an administrator.
To manage credit information:
1. Click the Credit information tab on the Edit account screen.

3 The Credit information tab displays (Figure 5.28 on page 96).

Figure 5.28: Edit account Screen — Credit information Tab
2. In the Credit field, enter a credit value on the account.
3. Click Submit.
Using the History Tab
The History tab on the Edit account screen allows you to view a list of any and all
operations performed by a Content Manager end-user.
To view a list of user operations:
1. From the Edit account screen, click the History tab.

3 The History tab displays.
Figure 5.29: Edit account Screen — History Tab
2. From the Search past days list, select the past number of days to search.

3. Select one of the following types of operations to display:

• Content — displays only configuration downloads completed by this user
• Device modifications — displays only device creations, activations, and deletions
performed by this user
• All operations — displays all operations related to this user
4. Click Search.
3 A list of operations performed by this user displays in the table at the bottom of the
History tab. The following table describes the information provided:
NOTE: The information displayed on the History tab is view-only.
Information Description
Mobile The model of device used for the operation.
Operation The type of operation. Operation types include the following:
• configuration
• creation (device)
• activation (device; associated with an address)
• deactivation (device; disassociated with an address)
Address The mobile phone number (MSISDN) associated with the operation.
Date created The date on which the operation began.
Date finished The date on which the operation ended.
Status The operation status. Status types include the following:
• Pending — operation has not yet started (it is not yet “time to
live”)
• Processing — operation is currently processing
• Processing wait — operation is currently processing but waiting
for another operation
• Sleep — operation has been paused and will restart at the “time
next continue” date
• Done — main operation is finished
• Processing child session — main operation is finished, and a
related operation is currently processing
• Error — an error has occurred
Offer The parent offer of the downloaded content.
Content The downloaded content.
Description The type of downloaded content or source of the operation.
Deleting a Front-Office Account
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights granted in order to delete an account. For
information about rights, see “Group Rights” on page 12.
To delete an account:
1. Click Delete from anywhere within the Edit account screen.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to this current account?” displays.

Searching Front-Office Account History Logs
To view a list of end-user history logs:
1. From the End-users menu, select Users > History.

3 The History screen displays.
Figure 5.30: History Screen
2. In the Address field, enter the address (MSISDN, email address, or fixed-line phone
number) for the logs to view.
3. From the Search past days list, select the past number of days to search.
4. Click Search.
3 The following table describes the information provided about each history log found:
Information Description
Session The ID number of the associated configuration session.
Date created The date on which the operation began.
Date finished The date on which the operation ended.
Status The operation status. Status types include the following:
• Pending — operation has not yet started (it is not yet “time to
live”)
• Processing — operation is currently processing
• Processing wait — operation is currently processing but waiting
for another operation
• Sleep — operation has been paused and will restart at the “time
next continue” date
• Done — main operation is finished
• Processing child session — main operation is finished, and a
related operation is currently processing
• Error — an error has occurred
Mobile The device model used for the operation.
Offer The parent offer of the downloaded content.
Content The downloaded content.
Description The type of downloaded content or source of the operation.

Managing Mobile Devices
The Device inventory portion of the End-users menu allows you to search for a device by
an International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) or by an unresolved IMEI. You can then
view account information based on the device.
Searching for a Device by IMEI
To search for a device based on its IMEI:
1. From the End-users menu, select Device inventory > Search a device.
3 The Search a device screen displays.
Figure 5.31: Search a device Screen
2. In the IMEI field, enter the IMEI associated with the accounts to locate.
3. Click List accounts by IMEI.

3 If at least one account is found related to this IMEI, the following account details
display on the right side of the screen:
• IMEI — the IMEI used in the search
• Alias — the alias name belonging to the account
• Status — indicates whether the account status is Active or Inactive
• First name — the first name of the end-user
• Last name — the last name of the end-user
• Addresses — addresses associated with the account (mobile phone (MSISDN),
email, or fixed-line phone)
4. To edit an end-user account, click the Edit account next to the account to modify.
3 The Edit account screen displays, allowing you to make changes to the account. For
more information about editing an account, see “Editing a Front-Office Account” on
page 84.

Searching for Devices by Unresolved IMEI
An unresolved IMEI is an IMEI detected by or created by end-users that could not be

associated to any device.
NOTE: Only IMEI-associated accounts on which you have rights are listed. To resolve an
IMEI manually, see “Creating an IMEI Range” on page 185.
To locate devices with an unresolved IMEI:
1. From the End-users menu, select Device inventory > Unresolved IMEIs.
3 The Unresolved IMEIs > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of all unresolved IMEIs. For information about the Filters
screen, see “Searching Devices by Unresolved IMEIs” on page 100.
Using the Unresolved IMEIs Screen
The Unresolved IMEIs screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in
With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Unresolved IMEIs screen, you can perform the
following tasks:
• From the IMEI column, click a device to edit. For more information, see “Edit address
details Screen” on page 92.
• Click Download file to download or open the unresolvedIMEIs.csv file.
Searching Devices by Unresolved IMEIs
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of unresolved IMEIs
To manage service filters:
1. From the Unresolved IMEIs screen, click Edit filters.

3 The Unresolved IMEIs > Filters screen displays (Figure 5.32 on page 101).

Figure 5.32: Unresolved IMEIs > Filters Screen
Uploading Accounts
A bulk account import operation is a process in which multiple account content is uploaded at
the same time. The Bulk operations portion of the End-users menu allows you to manage
all account upload operations.
Viewing Account Imports
To view a complete list of account imports:
1. From the End-users menu, select Bulk operations > List imports.
3 The List imports > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of all account imports. For information about the Filters
screen, see “Searching Bulk Account Imports” on page 102.
3 The List imports screen displays.
Figure 5.33: List imports Screen

Using the List Imports Screen
The List imports screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in
With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the List imports screen, you can perform the
following tasks:
• Click Current import to automatically create a report for the current import file. The
report displays as shown in Figure 5.36 on page 104.
Searching Bulk Account Imports
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of import files specific
to that criteria.
To manage import filters:
1. From the List imports screen (Figure 5.33 on page 101), click Edit filters.
3 The List imports > Filters screen displays.
Figure 5.34: List imports > Filters Screen
Creating a Bulk Account Import File
NOTE: Files to be used for the import operation must be imported to the directory on the
platform defined during implementation.
1. From the Filters screen, click Create import.


Figure 5.35: Import accounts Screen
2. Select the file to import.
3. Select Create to create a new account for the imported file, or select Skip if you choose
not to create a new account.
4. Select Update to update existing accounts using one or more of the following options:
NOTE: If you choose not to update existing accounts, select Skip.
• Account details — the alias and passwords will be replaced

• Billing — the billing type will be modified
• Device — the device information will be modified
• Activate last device — the device imported in the bulk file will be activated
• Services — the service information will be modified
5. Click Next.

Figure 5.36: Import accounts (Step 2/2) Screen
6. Review the options you selected, and click Start to start the bulk operation.
7. To refresh your view of the operation status until the Progression (fourth from the
bottom) has reached 100%, repeatedly click Refresh.
NOTE: To ensure that accounts were successfully imported, search for one of the MSISDNs
you imported to ensure that it is attached to the created service. For more
information about searching by MSISDN, see “Performing a Search by Address” on
page 82.
8. To stop the operation, click Stop.

Import File Formats
Imported files should be in .csv file format. The file should be formatted to be one line per
end-user account separated by a semicolon (;), and should include the information described
in the following table:
Elements Type Description Required?

Login String AccountFO login (the key of the object) No
Example: 00000103446BB74F-00002
Alias String AccountFO alias No
Password String AccountFO password Yes
Language String Language code No
Examples: en = English; fr = French
Billing type Integer 0 = postpaid Yes
1 = prepaid
Address String MSISDN in international format (without +) Yes
Device flag Integer A device flag should always be followed by a No
Device data field. A line can contain multiple
pairs [Device flag; Device data]
0 = create a device of an unknown type

1 = create a device from IMEI
2 = create a device from ModelID
Device data String Device flag 0 = empty No
Device flag 1 = IMEI
Device flag 2 = ModelID
For example:
DO;;
D1;35014412345678
D2;150001
Service flag Integer A service flag should always be followed by a No
Service data field. A line can contain multiple
pairs [Service flag;Service data]
0 = Subscribe to service
1 = Unsubscribe from service
Service name String The service name is required in order to No
subscribe a user.

6 Content Management
Managing Content Providers.................................................................................... 107

Viewing Content Providers ...................................................................................... 107
Searching Content Providers ................................................................................... 108
Creating a New Content Provider ............................................................................. 109
Editing a Content Provider ...................................................................................... 110
Deleting a Content Provider .................................................................................... 113
Defining Global Content Provider Rights.................................................................... 113
Managing Content Categories.................................................................................. 114
Viewing Categories ................................................................................................ 115
Searching Categories ............................................................................................. 116
Creating a New Category........................................................................................ 116
Editing a Category ................................................................................................. 117
Deleting a Category ............................................................................................... 121
Managing Global Category Rights ............................................................................ 121
Using Content Templates ........................................................................................ 123
Managing Content ................................................................................................. 137
Viewing Content .................................................................................................... 137
Searching Content ................................................................................................. 138
Creating New Content ............................................................................................ 139
Editing Content ..................................................................................................... 140
Cloning Content .................................................................................................... 157
Deleting Content ................................................................................................... 157
Importing Bulk Contents ........................................................................................ 158
Searching Import Processes .................................................................................... 159
Starting a Bulk Import Process ................................................................................ 160
Creating a Process................................................................................................. 160
Accessing a Bulk Process ........................................................................................ 164
Deleting a Bulk Process .......................................................................................... 164
Using Zip Files ...................................................................................................... 164
Algorithms of Zip File Processing ............................................................................. 164
Zip File Structure and XML Files............................................................................... 165

Content Management
This chapter describes the functionality available from the Content menu. The options in the
Content menu allow you to manage components of the content database.
NOTE: The Content menu is available only if you are a member of an authorized group.
Managing Content Providers
Content providers are entities with rights to publish contents. Each content provider is
associated with one or more back-office groups. Members of these groups can publish or
view contents on behalf of content providers.
Viewing Content Providers
To view a list of content providers:
1. From the Content menu, select Structure > Providers.

3 The Providers > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view all existing providers. For information about the Filters screen,
see “Searching Content Providers” on page 108.
3 The Providers screen displays a list of all available content providers.
Figure 6.1: Providers Screen

Content Management
Using the Providers Screen
The Providers screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content
Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Providers screen, you can perform the following
tasks:
• From the Name column, click a provider name to edit. For more information, see
“Editing a Content Provider” on page 110.
• Click New provider to create a new content provider. For more information, see
• Click Delete to remove all selected providers. For more information, see “Deleting a
Content Provider” on page 113.
• Click Rights to manage rights for all content providers. For more information, see
“Defining Global Content Provider Rights” on page 113.
Searching Content Providers
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of content providers
To edit content provider filters:
1. From the Providers screen (Figure 6.1 on page 107), click Edit filters.
3 The Providers > Filters screen displays.
Figure 6.2: Providers > Filters Screen

Content Management
Creating a New Content Provider
To create a new content provider:
1. From the Providers screen (Figure 6.1 on page 107), click New provider.
NOTE: The New provider function is also available when searching for or editing a provider.
For more information, see “Searching Content Providers” on page 108 and “Editing
a Content Provider” on page 110.
3 The New provider screen displays.
Figure 6.3: New provider Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the new provider. Two content providers
cannot have the same name.
3. From the Templates list, select one or more templates that can be used by the content
provider to create contents. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple templates. For a list of
available templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123.
4. In the Description field, enter a short description of the provider (optional).
5. Click Submit.
3 The Edit provider screen displays, allowing you to modify details about the provider,
as well as the templates and rights associated with it. For more information, see
“Editing a Content Provider” on page 110.

Content Management
Editing a Content Provider
NOTE: Only back-office children groups of groups to which you have rights are listed. You
can only grant rights you already have on content providers. For more information
about these rights, see “Content Provider Rights” on page 15.
To make changes to a content provider:
1. From the Providers screen (Figure 6.1 on page 107), click the name of the provider to
modify.
NOTE: The Edit provider screen also displays immediately after you create a new
provider.
3 The Details tab on the Edit provider screen displays.
Figure 6.4: Edit provider Screen — Details Tab
The Edit provider screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New provider to create a new content provider. For more information, see
• Click Delete to delete the edited provider. For more information, see “Deleting a
Content Provider” on page 113.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify provider details. For more information, see
“Using the Details Tab” on page 111.
• Click the Templates tab to view or modify content templates associated with the
provider. For more information, see “Using the Templates Tab” on page 111.
• Click the Rights tabs to manage rights on the selected content provider. For more
information, see “Using the Rights Tab” on page 112.

Content Management
The Details tab on the Edit provider screen (Figure 6.4 on page 110) allows you to modify
the following details of the selected provider:
• Name: The unique name for the provider. Two providers cannot have the same name.
• Description: A short description of the provider.
Using the Templates Tab
The Templates tab on the Edit providers screen allows you to add or remove authorized
templates for the selected content provider.
Figure 6.5: Edit providers Screen — Templates Tab
Adding Templates to a Provider
To authorize templates for use by the selected provider:
1. Select one or more templates from the Available templates list. Press and hold Ctrl to
select multiple providers.
2. Click Add.
3 The selected providers display in the Associated templates list.

Content Management
Removing Templates From a Provider
To remove templates for use by the selected provider:
1. Select one or more templates from the Associated templates list. Press and hold Ctrl
to select multiple providers.
2. Click Remove.
3 The selected templates redisplay in the Available templates list.
The Rights tab on the Edit provider screen allows you to define back-office group rights for
the selected provider. For information about granting rights to groups affecting all content
providers simultaneously, see “Defining Global Content Provider Rights” on page 113.
NOTE: Only the back-office children groups of groups for which you have rights are
available. You can only grant rights that you already have on providers.
Figure 6.6: Edit provider Screen — Rights Tab
Adding Content Provider Rights to Groups
To add rights to groups for this content provider:
1. Select one or more rights from the Rights list in which to grant. For a description of each
right available, see “Content Provider Rights” on page 15.
2. Select one or several groups from the Groups list to which to grant the selected rights.

Content Management
3. Click Add right.

3 The rights and associated groups are listed on the right side of the Rights tab.
Revoking Content Provider Rights From Groups
To remove rights from groups for this content provider, click the next to each granted
right to remove.
Deleting a Content Provider
To delete a provider:
1. From the Providers screen (Figure 6.1 on page 107), check the box next each provider
to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all providers.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected providers?”
displays.
3. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited provider by clicking Delete on the Edit provider
screen.
Defining Global Content Provider Rights
The Rights on providers screen (Figure 6.7) allows you to grant rights to groups affecting
all categories. To grant rights to groups for a single category, see “Editing a Content
Provider” on page 110.
available. You can only grant rights that you already have on content providers.
Granting Provider Rights
To rights to groups affecting all categories:
1. From the Providers screen (Figure 6.1 on page 107), click Rights.
3 The Rights on providers screen displays (Figure 6.7 on page 114).

Content Management
Figure 6.7: Rights on providers Screen
2. Check the box next to one or more rights in which to grant. For a description of each right
available, see “Content Provider Rights” on page 15.
3. From the Groups list, select one or more groups to which to grant the selected rights.
4. Click Add right.

3 The rights and associated groups are listed on the right side of the Rights on
categories screen.
Revoking Provider Rights
To remove content provider rights from groups, click the next to each right to remove.
Managing Content Categories
The Categories selection on the Content menu allows you to categorize all contents
entered into Content Manager.
NOTE: This menu selection is available only if you have rights associated to categories. For
more information, see “Content Category Rights” on page 16.

Content Management
Viewing Categories
To view a list of categories:
1. From the Content menu, select Structure > Categories.

3 The Categories > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view all existing categories. For information about the Filters
screen, see “Searching Categories” on page 116.
3 The Categories screen displays a list of existing categories.
Figure 6.8: Categories Screen
Using the Categories Screen
The Categories screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content
Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Categories screen, you can perform the following
tasks:
• From the Name column, click a category name to edit. For more information, see
“Editing a Category” on page 117.
• Click New category to create a new category. For more information, see “Creating a
New Category” on page 116.
• Click Delete to remove all selected categories. For more information, see “Deleting a
Category” on page 121.
• Click Rights to manage all category rights for groups. For more information, see
“Managing Global Category Rights” on page 121.

Content Management
Searching Categories
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of categories specific to
that criteria.
To edit filters:
1. From the Categories screen (Figure 6.8 on page 115), click Edit filters.
Figure 6.9: Categories > Filters Screen
Creating a New Category
To create a new category and attach it to existing content providers:
1. From the Contents screen (Figure 6.19 on page 137), click New category.
NOTE: The New category function is also available when searching for or editing a
category. For more information, see “Searching Categories” on page 116 and
3 The New category screen displays (Figure 6.10 on page 117).

Content Management
Figure 6.10: New category Screen
2. From the Parent category list, select a category.
3. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the new category. Two categories may have
the same name only if they have different parent categories.
4. From the Content providers list, select the content providers able to add contents to
this category. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple providers.
5. In the Description field, enter a short description of the category (optional).
6. Click Submit.
3 The Edit category screen displays, allowing you to modify details about the category,
as well as the content providers and rights associated with it. For more information,
see “Editing a Category” on page 117.
Editing a Category
To modify a category:
1. From the Name column on the Categories screen (Figure 6.8 on page 115), click a
category to edit.
3 The Details tab on the Edit category screen displays (Figure 6.11 on page 118).
NOTE: The Edit category screen also displays immediately after a new category is
created.

Content Management
Figure 6.11: Edit category Screen — Details Tab
The Edit category screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Delete to delete the edited category. For more information, see “Deleting a
• Click Associated content to view a list of contents published only in the edited
category.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify category details. For more information, see
• Click the Content providers tab to view or modify content providers associated with
the category. For more information, see “Using the Content Providers Tab” on
page 119.
• Click the Rights tab to manage rights for the edited category. For more information,
see “Using the Rights Tab” on page 120.

Content Management
The Details tab on the Edit category screen (Figure 6.11) allows you to modify the
following details of the selected category:
• From the Parent category list, select a new parent category from the list of existing
categories.
• In the Name field, change the unique name for the new category. Two categories may
have the same name only if they have different parent categories.
• In the Description field, change the category description (optional).
• For the Pass on rights option: Choose Yes to automatically transmit rights
associated with this category to its child categories. Choose No to associate rights to
child categories manually.
Using the Content Providers Tab
The Content providers tab on the Edit category screen allows you to assign or add or
remove authorized content providers in the edited category.
Figure 6.12: Edit category Screen — Content providers Tab
Adding Providers to a Category
To add providers to the category:
1. From the Available providers list, select one or more content providers to add. Press
and hold Ctrl to select multiple providers.
2. Click Add.
3 The selected providers redisplay in the Associated providers list.

Content Management
Removing Providers From a Category
To remove providers from the category:
1. From the Associated providers list, select one or more content providers to remove.
Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple providers.
2. Click Remove.
3 The selected providers redisplay in the Available providers list.
The Rights tab on the Edit category screen allows you to define back-office group rights for
the edited category.
available.
Figure 6.13: Edit category Screen — Rights Tab

Content Management
Adding Group Rights
From the Rights tab, you can grant or revoke rights to groups for the selected category. For
information about managing rights for all categories, see “Managing Global Category Rights”
on page 121.
To add rights to groups for this category:
1. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of these rights, see “Content
Category Rights” on page 16.
2. From the Groups list, select one or several groups affected by the selected rights. Press
and hold Ctrl to select multiple groups.
3. Click Add right.

3 The rights and associated groups are listed on the right side of the Rights tab.
Revoking Group Rights
To remove rights from groups for this category, click the next to the rights to remove.
Deleting a Category
To delete a category:
1. From the Categories screen (Figure 6.8 on page 115), check the box next to one or
more categories to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all
categories.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected categories?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited category by clicking Delete on the Edit category
screen.
Managing Global Category Rights
The Rights on categories screen (Figure 6.14) allows you to grant rights to groups
affecting ALL categories. To grant rights to groups for a selected category, see “Editing a
available. You can only grant rights you already have on categories.

Content Management
To manage rights to groups on all categories:
1. From the Categories screen (Figure 6.8 on page 115), click Rights.
3 The Rights on categories screen displays.
Figure 6.14: Rights on categories Screen
Adding Global Category Rights
To add global content category rights to groups:
Category Rights” on page 16.
2. From the Groups list, select the groups to which to grant the selected category rights.
3. Click Add right.

3 The rights and associated groups are listed on the right side of the Rights on
categories screen.

Content Management
Revoking Global Category Rights
To remove global category rights from groups:
1. Click the next to each right to remove.
Using Content Templates
Content templates define the type of content managed by Content Manager. Each template
includes content version templates which define the different parts of content that can be
added. Each version template is associated to handlers that define actions to be applied
when content is entered.
NOTE: Depending on your software license, you may or may not have access to all of the
templates defined in this section.
Viewing Content Templates
To view a list of available templates:
1. From the Content menu, select Structure > Content templates.

3 The Content templates screen displays content templates available.
Figure 6.15: Content templates Screen

Content Management
The Content templates screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in
With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Content template screen, you can perform the
following task:
• From the Name column, click a content template name to edit. For more information,
see “Editing Content Templates”.
Editing Content Templates
To view details about and make changes to a template:
1. From the Content templates screen, click the name of a template to view.
3 The Edit Content template screen displays.
Figure 6.16: Edit content template Screen
Editing a Content Template Version
To view details about and make changes to a content version template:
1. From the Edit content template screen, click the name of a content version template.
3 The Edit content version template screen displays (Figure 6.17 on page 125).

Content Management
Figure 6.17: Edit content version template Screen
The Edit content version template screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click the name of a content handler to view. The Edit content handler screen
displays details about the content handler. The details displayed here are view-only.
• Click the name of a content validator to edit. The Edit content validator screen
displays.
Figure 6.18: Edit content validator Screen

Content Management
NOTE: Constraints provided are different according to the content template and the
content handler. For example, for a content validator of the FILE_SIZE type, the
constraints represent the maximum size of the file (in bytes) that can be imported
by the content provider. This can be modified.
The following list describes each content type and their associated templates and version
templates.
MMS_MESSAGE Content template:

• MMS_MESSAGE: A multimedia message
delivered without formatting (as is).
Content version templates:

• PREVIEW
• MMS_POSTCARD
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• TEXT_DESCRIPTION
• CONTENT ID
MMS_POSTCARD Content template:
• MMS_POSTCARD: A multimedia message
downloaded by MMS.

• PREVIEW
• MMS_POSTCARD
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID
SMS Content template:
• Text (SMS): A short text (160 characters)
sent using SMS.

• SHORT_TEXT
• TEXT_DESCRIPTION (metadata)
• CONTENT ID

Content Management
SMS_ANIMATION Content template:

• SMS_ANIMATION: An animated logo
downloaded by SMS.

• PREVIEW
• SMS_ANIMATION_8_8
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID
SMS_BINARY Content template:
• SMS_BINARY: a binary SMS message
delivered without formatting (as is).

• PREVIEW
• SMS_BINARY
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID
SMS_LOGO_GROUP Content template:
• SMS_LOGO_GROUP: A black and white
logo downloaded by SMS that can be
associated to a contact of the address book.

• PREVIEW
• SMS_LOGO_GROUP_72_14
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID

Content Management
SMS_LOGO_MESSAGE Content template:

• SMS_LOGO_MESSAGE: A black and white
logo downloaded by SMS that can be
forwarded between users.

• PREVIEW
• SMS_LOGO_MESSAGE_16_16
• SMS_LOGO_MESSAGE_OTHER
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID
SMS_LOGO_OPERATOR Content template:
• SMS_LOGO_OPERATOR: A black and
white logo downloaded by SMS that can be
used as the default screen background.

• PREVIEW
• SMS_LOGO_OPERATOR_16_16
• SMS_LOGO_OPERATOR_OTHER
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID

Content Management
SMS_LOGO_SCREENSAVER Content template:

• SMS_LOGO_SCREENSAVER: a black and
white logo downloaded by SMS that can be
used as the phone screensaver.
Content versions templates:

• PREVIEW
• SMS_LOGO_SCREENSAVER_16_16
• SMS_LOGO_SCREENSAVER_OTHER
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID
SMS Message System Content template:
• Text (SMS): A short text (160 characters)
that can be sent using SMS.

• SHORT_TEXT: A short text message
• TEXT_DESCRIPTION: A short description
(metadata)
• CONTENT ID
SMS_RINGTONE_MONOPHONIC Content template:
• SMS_RINGTONE_MONOPHONIC: a
monophonic ringtone downloaded by SMS.

• PREVIEW
• SMS_RINGTONE_MONOPHONIC
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID

Content Management
SMS_VCALENDAR Content template:

• SMS_VCALENDAR: A calendar item
formatted on the fly according to recipient
device capabilities before being delivered by
SMS. It can be stored in the device agenda.

• PREVIEW
• SMS_VCALENDAR
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID
SMS_VCARD Content template:
• SMS_VCARD: A contact item formatted on
the fly according to recipient device
capabilities before being delivered by SMS.
It can be stored in the device address book.

• PREVIEW
• SMS_VCARD
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID

Content Management
WAP_ANIMATION Content template:

• WAP_ANIMATION: An animated picture
downloaded by WAP.

• PREVIEW
• WAP_ANIMATION_101_080
• WAP_ANIMATION_OTHER
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID
WAP_APPLICATION Content template:
• WAP_APPLICATION: A smartphone
application downloaded through WAP.

• PREVIEW
• WAP_APPLICATION_SIS
• WAP_APPLICATION_CAB
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID

Content Management
WAP_BOOKMARK Content template:

• WAP_BOOKMARK: A URL formatted on the
fly according to recipient device capabilities
before being delivered by SMS. It can be
stored in the device WAP favorites list.

• PREVIEW
• WAP_BOOKMARK
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID
WAP_FILE Content template:
• WAP_FILE: A file downloaded through
WAP, associated to the WAP Push feature.

• PREVIEW
• WAP_FILE
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID
WAP_JAVA Content template:
• WAP_JAVA: A java application downloaded
through WAP.

• PREVIEW
• WAP_JAVA_JAR
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID

Content Management
WAP_PICTURE Content template:

• WAP_PICTURE: a full color picture
downloaded by WAP.

• PREVIEW
• WAP_PICTURE_101_080
• WAP_PICTURE_OTHER
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID
WAP_PUSH Content template:
• WAP_PUSH: A URL formatted on the fly
according to the recipient device capabilities
before being delivered by SMS. Upon
reception, the user is invited to connect
directly to the WAP site.

• PREVIEW
• WAP_PUSH
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID

Content Management
WAP_REALTONE Content template:

• WAP_REALTONE: A sound extract
downloaded through WAP.

• PREVIEW
• WAP_REALTONE_AMR
• WAP_REALTONE_AMR-WB
• WAP_REALTONE_WAV
• WAP_REALTONE_RMF
• WAP_REALTONE_MP3
• WAP_REALTONE_AAC
• WAP_REALTONE_MPEG
• WAP_REALTONE_SMAF
• WAP_REALTONE_SP-MIDI
• WAP_REALTONE_MIDI
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID
WAP_RINGTONE_POLYPHONIC Content template:
• WAP_RINGTONE_POLYPHONIC: A
polyphonic ringtone downloaded by WAP.

• PREVIEW
• WAP_RINGTONE_POLYPHONIC_OTHER
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID

Content Management
WAP_RINGTONE_PREFORMATTED Content template:

• WAP_RINGTONE_POLYPHONIC: a
polyphonic ringtone delivered without
formatting (“as is”) by WAP Download.

• PREVIEW
• WAP_REALTONE_RMF
• WAP_REALTONE_SMAF
• WAP_REALTONE_SP-MIDI
• WAP_REALTONE_MIDI
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID

Content Management
WAP_VIDEO Content template:

• WAP_VIDEO: A video extract downloaded
through WAP.

• PREVIEW
• WAP_VIDEO_ MPEG
• WAP_ VIDEO_ QUICKTIME
• WAP_ VIDEO_ REALMEDIA
• WAP_ VIDEO_ AVI
• WAP_ VIDEO_ 3GPP
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID
Rich Text Content template:
• Rich Text: Multimedia elements that can be
sent by SMS or MMS.
Content versions templates

• PREVIEW
• MMS_POSTCARD
• AUTHOR
• COPYRIGHT
• CONTENT ID

Content Management
Managing Content
Contents are downloadable files that can be delivered to handsets. Several versions are
available within each content file to match different handset compatibilities. Contents may
also have several templates, depending on the type of content. For a complete list of
available templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123.
Viewing Content
Only contents meeting one of the following criteria are listed:

• contents were published in at least one parent category on which you have rights
• contents were published by a content provider on which you have rights
NOTE: A default filter is activated to hide all Deprecated contents.
To view a list of content files:
1. From the Contents menu, select Data > Contents.

3 The Contents > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of all contents. For information about the Filters screen,
see “Searching Content” on page 138.
Figure 6.19: Contents Screen

Content Management
Using the Contents Screen
The Contents screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content
Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Contents screen, you can perform the following
tasks:
• From the Name column, click a content name to edit. For more information, see
“Editing Content” on page 140.
• Click New content to create a new content file. For more information, see “Creating
New Content” on page 139.
• Click Delete content to remove all selected content files. This is available only if you
have the “Delete” right on the parent category for selected content files. For more
information, see “Deleting Content” on page 157.
• Click Clone content to make a copy of the selected content file. For more information,
see “Cloning Content” on page 157.
Searching Content
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of content specific to
that criteria.
To manage content filters:
1. From the Contents screen (Figure 6.19 on page 137), click Edit filters.
3 The Contents > Filters screen displays.
Figure 6.20: Contents > Filters Screen

Content Management
Creating New Content
NOTE: You must have the “publish contents” right on a content provider, and the “add
contents” right on at least one of the categories associated with the content
provider.
To create new content:
1. From the Content menu, select Data > New content, or click New content from anywhere
on the Contents screen (Figure 6.19 on page 137).
3 The New content screen displays.
Figure 6.21: New content Screen
2. From the Content provider list, select a content provider. Only those providers on which
you have rights are available. For more information, see “Content Provider Rights” on
page 15.
3. From the Template list, select a template for the content. Only those templates
authorized for the selected provider are available.
4. From the Content categories list, select one or more categories. Press and hold Ctrl to
select multiple categories. Only categories associated with the content provider are
available.
NOTE: You must have the “add contents” right on those categories you want to select.
5. In the Name field, enter a name for the content.

Content Management
6. In the Validity start field, enter the date on which to start content validity. By default,
the date is equal to the current day’s date. The date format required is YYYY-MM-DD HH-
MM-SS. For example, 2006-1-31 23:59:59 equals January 31, 2006, 11:59:59 PM.
7. In the Validity end field, enter the date to end content validity. The date format required
is YYYY-MM-DD HH-MM-SS. For example, 2006-1-31 23:59:59 equals January 31, 2006,
11:59:59 PM.
8. Select one of the following options from the Status drop-down list:
• Draft — content not ready
• Validation pending — content ready, requires validation
9. Enter a short description for the content. This is optional, and is stored as metadata.
10. Click Submit.

3 The Edit content screen displays, allowing you to modify the new content. For more
information, see “Editing Content”.
Editing Content
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to view or modify content. For more
information about these rights, see “Content Category Rights” on page 16.
To edit content:
1. From the Name column on the List contents screen (Figure 6.19 on page 137), click a
content file to edit.
3 The Details tab on the Edit content screen displays (Figure 6.22 on page 141).

Content Management
Figure 6.22: Edit content Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Content Screen
From the Edit content screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New content to create a new content file. For more information about creating a
content file, see “Creating New Content” on page 139.
• Click Delete to remove the edited content. For more information about deleting
content, see “Deleting Content” on page 157.
• Click Clone content to duplicate a content file. For more information about cloning
content, see “Cloning Content” on page 157.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify content details. For more information, see
• Click the Versions tab to list all versions registered for the content. For more
information about viewing versions, see “Using the Versions Tab” on page 143.
• Click the MetaDatas tab to list all metadata registered for the content. For more
information about viewing metadata, see “Using the MetaDatas Tab” on page 150.

Content Management
• Click the Compatibilities tab to list all devices compatible with and authorized to use
the content. For more information about viewing compatible devices, see “Using the
Compatibilities Tab” on page 153.
• Click the Versions coverages tab to view all version compatibilities associated with
the content. For more information about viewing version compatibilities, see “Using
the Versions Coverages Tab” on page 156.
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights to modify content. For more information, see
“Content Category Rights” on page 16.
The Details tab on the Edit content screen displays the following details of an existing
content file:
• Template — The content template information (cannot be modified). For a complete
list of available templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123.
• Content provider — The content provider information (cannot be modified).
• Content categories — Select one or more parent categories associated with the
content provider.
NOTE: You can only select from categories on which you have the “update content”
and “add content” rights.
• Name — The content name (can be modified).
• Validity start — The beginning date for content validity (can be modified).
NOTE: You cannot modify content validity if the content status is “Published”.
• Validity end (optional) — The end date for content validity (can be modified).
NOTE: You cannot modify content validity if the content status is “Published”.
• Status — The content status. Status options include:

• Draft — Content is currently being edited; cannot be downloaded
• Validation pending — Content is ready for validation; at least one content
version is attached and listed as “validated”
• Published — Content and its validation versions can be downloaded
NOTE: You can select this status only if you have the “validate contents” right on all
of the content’s parent categories and if at least one content version is
published for the content.
• Deprecated — Content was cancelled and cannot be modified
NOTE: You can select this status only if you have the “delete contents” right on all
selected categories.

Content Management
3 The changes are validated. You may validate contents only if you have the “validate
content” right on all content parent categories and if at least one content version is
published.
Using the Versions Tab
The Versions tab displays all content version associated to the edited content. Content
versions are variations of the same content optimized for different devices. As such, there
can be only one published version of the same content per device.
Figure 6.23: Edit contents Screen — Versions Tab
The Versions tab displays the following information:

• Name — the name of the content version. Click the name to edit the selected version.
For more information about editing content versions, see “Editing a Content Version”
on page 147.
• Content version template — the name of the content version template. For a
complete list of content templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123.
• Preview — a preview of the content (if available).
• Language — the language of the content version.
• Status — the status of the content version. Possible values include the following:
• Draft — content version is currently being edited
• Not validated — content version is ready for validation
• Published — content version is validated
NOTE: This is selected automatically whenever the content is to be downloaded on
one of the compatible devices listed. These devices cannot be selected for
another version.
• Deprecated — content version was cancelled
• Creation date — the date on which the content version was created.
• Last modification — the date on which the content version was last modified.
• Author — the name of the back-office account that created this content version.

Content Management
In addition to the functions available on the Edit content screen, the Versions tab allows
you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New content version to create a new version of the content. For more
information, see “Adding Content Versions” on page 144.
• Click Delete content version to remove selected content version. For more
information, see “Deleting Content Versions” on page 149.
Adding Content Versions
NOTE: You must have the “add content version” right granted to at least one of the
content’s parent categories in order to add a new content version.
To add a new content version:
1. From the Versions tab on the Edit content screen (Figure 6.23 on page 143), click
New content version.
3 The Add content version screen displays.
Figure 6.24: Add content version Screen
2. From the Content version template list, select a content version template to use for
the content version. For a complete list of templates, see “Using Content Templates” on
page 123.
3. In the Name field, enter a name for the content version.

Content Management
4. From the Status list, select a status for the content version. Status options include the
following:
• Draft — metadata is currently being edited
• Not validated — metadata is ready for validation
• Published — metadata is validated
• Deprecated — metadata was cancelled
5. From the Language list, select a language for the content version.
6. For the External content option, if the binary data is stored on an external system,
select Yes. Select No to upload the data and store it on the Content Manager server.
The following information is required for external content:

• External content data system — the content system used to store the content.
• Fetch mode — the method by which content is retrieved. If On create is selected,
the content is retrieved from the remote service and stored in Content Manager. If On
delivery is selected, the content is retrieved only when it needs to be delivered.
• URL — the URL to the location of the content.
If you are uploading a file, select the Mime type (format of the file) that you are
uploading.
NOTE: Content Manager verifies that the file extension matches the selected Mime type
before uploading the content. Content Manager then associates the uploaded file to
the selected Mime type and transmits it to the receiving device. For a list of
available Mime types and associated file extensions, see “Using Content Templates”
on page 123.
For short SMS, Rich Text, and SMS Message System templates, enter some short or long
text.
NOTE: For short text, make sure the text to be sent is not more than 160 characters long
(70 characters in Arabic language).
The following table describes variables can be used in short and long text messages and
will be replaced by information retrieved from the user account:
User Information Variable Description

First Name $firstName User’s first name
Last Name $lastName User’s last name
Language $language User’s preferred language
Address $address User’s address
Alias $alias User’s alias
City $city User’s home city
Country $country User’s home country
State $countryState User’s home state
Password $password User’s password
Zip Code $zipCode User’s zip code

Content Management
User Information Variable Description

Billing Type $billingType User’s billing type: prepaid/postpaid
Device Brand $deviceBrand Brand of device associated with the user’s address
Device Model $deviceModel Model of device associated with the user’s address
Subscribed service $subservice Service the user tries to subscribe to or unsubscribe from
(SMS Message System template only)
7. Click Submit when finished.
NOTE: When defining your content version, you can also enter a script to generate the
message content. The script is compliant with the Velocity language. For more
information, see http://jakarta.apache.org/velocity/user-guide.html.
Script Sample #1. This example can be included in the short content form to personalize
the content using the user’s first and last name.
##If the user first and last name are available

#if($firstName && $lastName)
Welcome $firstName $lastName.
#end
Script Sample #2. This example uses a rule to personalize the content according to the
preferred language of the user.
##If the user’s preferred language is French

#if(language==”fr”)
##If the user first and last name is available
Bienvenue $firstName $lastName.
#end
##Otherwise, if the user’s preferred language is not French
#else
##If the user’s first and last name is available
Welcome $firstName $lastName.
#end
#end
Script Sample #3. This example uses a rule to add device information to the content.
##If the user’s device information is available

#if($deviceBrand && $deviceModel)
Your mobile: $deviceBrand $deviceModel.
##Otherwise, if the user device is not known
#else
Your mobile is unknown
#end

Content Management
Editing a Content Version
To edit a content version:
1. From the Versions tab on the Edit content screen (Figure 6.23 on page 143), click a
content version name from the Name column.
3 The Edit content version screen displays.
Figure 6.25: Edit content version Screen — Details Tab
2. Modify the following content version information as needed:
NOTE: The information displayed on the Edit content version screen may vary
depending on the content version template used.
• Content version template — The template used for the content version (cannot be
modified). For a complete list of content version templates, see “Using Content
Templates” on page 123.
• Content name — The name of the content version.
• Status — The status of the content version. Status options include the following:
• Draft — content version is currently being edited
• Not validated — content version is ready for validation
• Published — content version is validated
• Deprecated — content version was cancelled

Content Management
• Language — The content version language (cannot be modified if a device is

associated).
• External content — Indicates whether the content binary data is stored on an
external system (Yes) or already uploaded to Content Manager (No). This cannot be
modified). If the content is stored externally, the following information is displayed:
• External content data system — the content system used to store the content.
• Fetch mode — the method by which content is retrieved. If On create is selected,
the content is retrieved from the remote service and stored in Content Manager. If
On delivery is selected, the content is retrieved only when it needs to be
delivered.
• URL — the URL to the location of the content.
• Mime type — The Mime type (format of the file).
NOTE: Content Manager verifies that the file extension matches the selected Mime
type before uploading the content. Content Manager then associates the
uploaded file to the selected Mime type and transmits it to the receiving
device. For a list of available Mime types and associated file extensions, see
“Using Content Templates” on page 123.
Managing Compatible Devices for a Content Version
In previous versions of Content Manager, compatibility was managed at the device level.
Content Manager 2.1 allows you to associate content versions with device profiles, enabling
you to associate the same device with several different versions corresponding to different
profiles.
To manage devices compatible with the content version:
1. From the Edit content version screen (Figure 6.25 on page 147), click the
Compatibilities tab.
3 The Compatibilities tab displays.
Figure 6.26: Edit content version Screen — Compatibilities Tab

Content Management
2. Define the devices to list by selecting from the criteria described below. A list of device
profiles matching the criteria selected displays on the right side of the tab. Device profiles
are ranked by brand/manufacturer.
• Selected features — Select the device feature compatible with the content version
template. You can associate each device to the content version for SMS features, MMS
features, or both.
NOTE: Currently, the RICH template is the only template compatible with multiple
features.
• Selected brands — Select one or more brands to include in the device list. Only those
devices attached to selected brands that are compatible with selected features are
listed.
• Inherited device profiles — Specify whether or not to associate and select device
profiles from which the content version inherits information.
• Hide unavailable device profiles — If selected, only those devices not associated to
any content version are listed.
• Click Show device profiles to view and select profiles available for the edited content
version.
NOTE: From the list of device profiles, Checked profiles are listed as compatible and
authorized with the content version by the provider. Unchecked profiles are
compatible with the content version, but are not listed as “authorized” and cannot
receive the content version. Device profiles marked with a are already listed as
compatible with another validated version for the same content, and cannot be
selected as authorized with the current version. Click the icon to edit the content
version already associated with the device profile.
• Set version as default for selected device feature — If checked, all new device
profiles compatible with the content version template will be associated to this version.
Deleting Content Versions
NOTE: You must have the “delete content version” right in order to delete a content
version. If the version status is “published”, all associated devices can then be
associated to other content versions and the status will be set as “deprecated”. If
the version was not validated, it is directly deleted. The content version cannot be
deleted if it is the last published version available for the parent content.
To delete a content version:
1. From the Versions tab on the Edit contents screen, check the box next to the each
version to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all versions.
2. Click Delete content version.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected content
versions?” displays.

Content Management
NOTE: You can also delete edited content versions by clicking Delete on the Edit content
version screen.
Using the MetaDatas Tab
The MetaDatas tab allows you to view all metadata associated with the content. Metadata
represents information that can be added to the content, but will not be used for download.
To view metadata related to the selected content:
1. From the Edit content screen, click the MetaDatas tab.

3 The MetaDatas tab displays.
Figure 6.27: Edit content Screen — MetaDatas Tab
The MetaDatas tab on the Edit content screen displays the following information:
• Name — The name of the metadata. Click a name to edit the metadata. For more
information, see “Editing Metadata” on page 152.
• Preview — A preview of the metadata (if available).
• Content version template — The name of the content version template. For a
complete list of templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123.
• Language — The language of the metadata.
• Status — The status of the metadata. Possible values include the following:
• Creation date — The date on which the metadata was created.
• Last modification date— The date on which the metadata was last modified.
• Author — The name of the back-office account that created this metadata.

Content Management
In addition to the functions available on the Edit content screen, the MetaDatas tab allows
• Click New meta data to create new metadata for the content. For more information,
see “Adding Metadata” on page 151.
• Click Delete meta data to remove the selected metadata. For more information, see
“Deleting Metadata” on page 153.
Adding Metadata
To add metadata to content:
1. From the MetaDatas tab on the Edit content screen, click New meta data.
3 The Add Meta data screen displays.
Figure 6.28: Add meta data Screen
2. From the Content version template list, select a template for the content version. For a
complete list of templates, see “Using Content Templates” on page 123.
3. In the Name field, enter a name for the metadata.
4. From the Status list, select one of the following status options:
5. From the Language list, select a language for the metadata.
6. In the Description field, enter a short description of the metadata (optional).

Content Management
NOTE: Other details available depend upon the type of content metadata created.
7. Click Submit.
3 The Edit meta data screen displays. For more information about editing meta data,
see “Editing Metadata” on page 152.
Editing Metadata
To edit existing metadata:
1. From the MetaDatas tab on the Edit contents screen, click the name of the metadata
to modify.
3 The Edit meta data screen displays.
Figure 6.29: Edit meta data Screen
2. Make changes to the following as necessary:

• Content version template — cannot be modified
• Content name — the name of the metadata
• Status — the status of the metadata; status options include the following:
• Language — the language of the metadata

Content Management
• Description — a short description of the metadata

NOTE: If a preview file was uploaded, you can browse, locate, and upload a new preview
file for the metadata.
Deleting Metadata
To delete metadata:
1. From the MetaDatas tab on the Edit contents screen, select the metadata to remove
and click Delete meta data.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected meta datas?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also delete edited metadata by clicking Delete on the Edit meta data
screen.
Using the Compatibilities Tab
The Compatibilities tab allows you to view all devices compatible with the edited content.
Both devices that are associated to a version and those that are not associated to a version
are listed here.
Figure 6.30: Edit content Screen — Compatibilities Tab
1. Select the criteria by which to display devices. Criteria available includes the following:
• Language — Select the language assigned to the device profile.

Content Management
• Device feature — Select the feature compatible with the content template. Only
those devices compatible with the template and this feature are displayed.
• Selected brands — Select one or more device brands. Press and hold Ctrl to select
multiple brands. Only those devices that are attached to these brands and are
compatible with the selected feature are displayed.
2. Select the method of display. Methods include the following:

• Show all device profiles (compatible or not): Show all devices available in the
device repository
• Show all compatible device profiles: Show only devices compatible with the
content template and selected feature
• Show only assigned device profiles: Show only the devices currently associated to
a content version
• Show only unassigned compatible device profiles: Show only devices compatible
with the content template and selected feature. and not associated to a content
version
• Show not compatible device profiles: Show only devices not compatible with the
content template and selected feature
3. Click Show device profiles when finished.

3 A list of device profiles organized by brand/model displays at the bottom of the
Compatibilities tab.

Content Management
Figure 6.31: Edit content Screen — Compatibilities Tab (With Results)
NOTE: Devices marked with an arrow are already listed as compatible with a content
version for this content.
Devices marked with a checkbox are compatible with the content template and
selected feature, but are not associated to any content version.
Devices in grey are not compatible with the content template and selected feature.
If a default version is available, click the default version to edit. For more information about
editing versions, see “Editing a Content Version” on page 147.

Content Management
Using the Versions Coverages Tab
The Versions coverages tab on the Edit content screen allows you to list all versions and
their compatible devices.
Figure 6.32: Edit content Screen — Versions coverages Tab
1. From the Versions coverages tab, define the following criteria for your version coverage
search:
• Device brand
• Device model
• Device profile (inherited or not)
• The method by which to display search results. Options include:
• Show all versions coverage — show all missing content versions, associated
content versions, and incompatible content versions
• Show missing coverages — show only missing content versions for the
device
• Show existing coverages — show only content versions associated with the
device
• Show incompatible features — show only features that are not available for
the device
2. Click Show versions.

3 A list of related versions displays at the bottom of the Versions coverages tab

Content Management
Figure 6.33: Edit content Screen — Versions coverages Tab (With Results)
Cloning Content
To duplicate a content file or group of files:
1. From the Content screen (Figure 6.19 on page 137), check the box next to each content
file to duplicate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all content files.
2. Click Clone content.

3 The newly copied content files are listed in the list of content files.
NOTE: You can also clone an edited content file by clicking Clone content on the Edit
content screen. For more information about editing content, see “Editing Content”
on page 140.
Deleting Content
To delete content:
NOTE: You must have the “delete content” right in order to delete content. If the version
status is “published”, the content status is set as “deprecated”. If the content was
not validated, it is directly deleted.
1. From the Contents screen (Figure 6.19 on page 137), check the box next to each
content file to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all content
files.
2. Click Delete content.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete this content?” displays.

Content Management
NOTE: You can also delete edited content by clicking Delete on the Edit content screen.
Importing Bulk Contents
A bulk import operation is a process in which several content bundles are imported at one
time.
To view a list of all bulk import processes on the content database:
1. From the Content menu, select Import contents > Bulk process.
3 The Bulk process screen displays listing all previously established bulk import
processes.
Figure 6.34: Bulk process Screen
If there are existing processes on the system, the Bulk process screen displays the
following information:
• ID — The identifier of the bulk operation.
• Sequence type — The sequence type associated with the process.
• Status — The status of the process: pending (not yet started), processing,
processing wait, done, or paused.

Content Management
• Time created — The time at which the process was started.

• Time finished — The time at which the process was completed.
Using the Bulk Process Screen
The Bulk process screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in
With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Bulk process screen, you can perform the
following tasks:
• From the Id column, click a process to access. For more information, see “Accessing a
Bulk Process” on page 164.
• Click Create process to create a new process. For more information, see “Creating a
Process” on page 160.
• Click Purge bulk processes to remove ALL past bulk process reports. For more
information, see “Deleting a Bulk Process” on page 164.
Searching Import Processes
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of import processes
To edit filters:
1. From the Bulk process screen, click Edit filters.

3 The Bulk process > Filters screen displays.
Figure 6.35: Bulk process > Filters Screen

Content Management
Starting a Bulk Import Process
Before you can start a new process, you must first upload the content. Content files used for
bulk import processes must be imported on the platform in the directory defined during
system setup.
Understanding Content.csv Files
The report.csv file is a report that is generated after a process is run. The file is formatted as
follows: one line per imported file using a column structure separated by semicolons (;).
Criteria Type Description Example Required?

Filename String Exact name of the file to be imported. This file Logo1_12.gif Yes
must be in the same directory as the CSV file.
Mimetype String The Mime type of the imported file, for WAP and image/gif No
MMS content. If empty, Content Manager uses
the default Mime type associated with the
imported file.
Content Name String Name of the content and content version. If Logo No
empty, the filename (without the extension) is
used.
Content Provider String Name of the content provider. If the content pro- cp Yes
Name vider does not exist, a name is automatically cre-
ated.
Categories String Categories to which the content should be asso- Favorites|New Yes
ciated, separated by “|”. If categories do not
exist, they are created automatically.
Content bundle String Content template WAP_PICTURE Yes
type
Content type String Content version template. If empty, the template WAP Picture No
is deduced from the content template. 101x80px
Status String OK — File was imported. KO N/A
KO — An error occurred.
Reason String A description of the error that occurred if the Invalid file type N/A
process status is KO.
Creating a Process
NOTE: You must have rights over bulk processes in order to create a bulk import process.
For more information, see “Tracking Rights” on page 19.
To create a new process:
1. Click Create process from the Bulk process screen.

3 The Bulk operation tab on the Create bulk process screen displays (Figure 6.36 on
page 161).

Content Management
Figure 6.36: Create bulk process Screen — Bulk operation Tab
2. From the Action type list, select the action to be performed during the process.
3. Check the Publish content box to indicate whether to automatically set the status of the
imported content to “published”.
4. Check the Publish content version box to indicate whether you want the status of the
imported content versions automatically set to “published”.
5. Select one or more of the following options to apply to existing content:

• Skip — existing content will not be modified
• Update — existing content will be updated in whole or part, depending on the
following options:
• Binary file — content binary files will be updated
• Compatible devices — the list of compatible devices will be updated
6. From the Content provider list, select the content provider to automatically associate to
the new content.
7. Click Next.
3 The Targets tab displays (Figure 6.37 on page 162).

Content Management
Figure 6.37: The Create bulk process Screen — Targets Tab
8. From the Target type list, select the method by which targets should be selected:
• Select ZIP on server folder — uploads content stored in a ZIP file on the Content
Manager server. The file must be stored on the import directory defined during
implementation.
NOTE: If you select this option, you will have the option to select a ZIP file from a
list of files stored in the Content Manager database.
• Upload ZIP — uploads a ZIP file stored locally using the web browser.
NOTE: If you select this option, you must enter the full file path to the file to
upload. Click Browse to locate the file on a local drive.
9. Click Next.
3 The Bulk flow control strategy tab displays.
Figure 6.38: The Create bulk process Screen — Bulk flow control strategy Tab
10. From the Workflow strategy type list, select the type of workflow strategy for the new
process. When the process is launched, a large number of operations are initiated
simultaneously. To limit the load on the system, the different operations are processed
according to the workflow strategy defined here.
11. Click Next.

3 The Timeslots tab displays (Figure 6.39 on page 163).

Content Management
Figure 6.39: The Create bulk process Screen — Timeslots Tab
12. The Timeslots tab allows you to define the time frame (or hours authorized) in which the
new process should be launched. Options include:
• Day of the week — check the box that follows one or more days of the week on
which to run the process.
• Authorized start time — select the time of day at which to start the process. The
format is hh:mm in one 24 hour period, and a “00” hour = 12:00 AM.
• Authorized end time — select the time of day at which to end the process. The
13. Click Add timeslot.

3 A list of timeslots displays on the right side of the screen.
NOTE: Timeslots can be added as necessary. To delete a timeslot, click the next
to each timeslot to remove.
14. Click Next.

3 The Confirmation tab displays.
15. Review the information displayed. Click Submit at the bottom of the screen to create the
process. If you need to make changes before the process is created, click the tab on
which to make changes. When you are finished making changes, return to the
Confirmation tab, review again, then click Submit.
3 When the process is complete, all imported contents are moved to a new folder
containing a file called “report.csv”. This file is generated containing a list of all
contents that were imported successfully. For information regarding .csv file formats,
see “Understanding Content.csv Files” on page 160.

Content Management
Accessing a Bulk Process
To view, start, or stop a process:
1. From the Id column on the Bulk process screen (Figure 6.34 on page 158), click the
process ID to access.
3 The Details tab on the Edit bulk process screen displays.
NOTE: The information displayed both the Details and Timeslots tabs on the Edit
bulk process screen is view-only.
2. To start, pause, or stop the selected process, click Start process, Pause process, or
Stop process at the top of the Edit bulk process screen.
Deleting a Bulk Process
To delete a bulk process:
1. From the Bulk process screen (Figure 6.34 on page 158), check the box next to one or
several processes to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all
processes.
2. Click Purge bulk processes.

3 A confirmation message “Please confirm you want to launch the bulk processes
purge.” displays.
3. Click Ok to begin, or Cancel to void the purge.
Using Zip Files
This section provides information regarding the use of .zip files and .xml files with Content
Manager.
Algorithms of Zip File Processing
There are two cases in which Content Manager manages ZIP file processing:
• Selecting a .zip file on the server: the .zip file is hosted by the server, and the bulk
process retrieves and processes it to import the file’s content to Content Manager.
• Uploading a .zip file on the server using a web browser from a client computer: the
.zip file is uploaded to the server, and the bulk process retrieves and processes it to
import the file’s content to Content Manager.

Content Management
Selecting a Zip File
The .zip file must be transferred by an external system, using FTP for example, and stored in
the following directory:
..\web\WEB-INF\scc\domains\bulkcontentcreation\contentProviderBaseDirectory\{content provider name}\
Uploading a Zip File
Content Manager can manage transfer and storage of .zip files. The selected .zip file is
uploaded to the directory corresponding to the selected content provider, and stored with the
current date in the file name.
Zip File Structure and XML Files
A .zip file contains one .xml file for each content bundle. If content data is not included, and
the external content system is not defined in the .xml file, the archive can contain data files
as well.
NOTE: You can find sample .zip files in the Content Manager pack in the
..\sample\bulkcreation\ directory.
Understanding XML Files
There are several ways XML files are used in .zip files containing content:
• XML files with included content data
• XML files with external file content
• XML files using an external content system
XML Files Containing Content Data
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>
Each .xml file corresponds to a content bundle. The .xml file defines the name, author, start
date of validity, and type of content bundle (the content bundle’s type ID is defined within the
content). For example:
<CONTENTBUNDLE>
<name>Content_Bundle_1</name>
<type>WAP_PICTURE</type>
<validitystart>2006-04-19 11:55:49.775 CEST</validitystart>
<author>admin</author>

Content Management
A content bundle corresponds to at least one category. The full name of the associated
category is listed. For example:
<categories>
<string>Fun</string>
</categories>
If the content bundle is to be referenced by keywords, the keywords must be listed. For
example:
<keywords>
<string>Moto</string>
<string>Sport</string>
</keywords>
The file must define all content versions associated to the content bundle. For example:
<contents>
<CONTENT>
Each content version is defined by a name, a content type (the content type ID is defined
within the content), and a status (Draft, Published, or Deprecated).
<name>Content_1</name>
<type>WAP_PICTURE_101_080</type>
<status>DRAFT</status>
A content version can also be a content bundle metadata. For example:
<metadata>false</metadata>
The data can be defined directly in an .xml file, with a file included in a .zip file, or using an
URL with external content. In this example, a content data is defined in an .xml file using 64-
bit encoding. A content data is defined by the corresponding java class.
NOTE: These java class names are defined in a separate .xml file:
..\web\WEB-INF\scc\domains\bulkcontentcreation\conf\XSTREAM_ClassToName.xml
The contentData is defined by a PictureContentData class which contains a MimeData class. A

MimeData class is defined by a file name, a mimetype and data.
<contentdata class="PICTURECONTENTDATA">
<mimedata class="MIMEDATA">
<filename>WAP_PICTURE_101_080.gif</filename>
<mimetype>image/gif</mimetype>
<data>R0lGODlhZQBQAPcAAAAAAAAACAAIAAAICAgAAAgACAgAEAgIAAgICBAAAB
AEBBgAABAAEAgMEBgAEBAKEBgIABgQACEAABwFDCsCACcGEDkCADsDE0wEDFgIDE4NHloNIG
UHDWMMIWANKWsIIXQEEH4C</data>
</mimedata>
</contentdata>
Because there is not any external content, the externalmode value is NONE.
<externalmode>NONE</externalmode>

Content Management
Each content is compatible with device models which are defined by an ID defined in the
Device Knowledge Base (DKB) archive.
<devicecompatibilities>
<associateddevicemodels>
<DEVICEMODEL>
<handsetid>320002</handsetid>
</DEVICEMODEL>
<DEVICEMODEL>
</DEVICEMODEL>
</associateddevicemodels>
</devicecompatibilities>
</CONTENT>
</contents>
</CONTENTBUNDLE>
XML Files and External File Content

<CONTENTBUNDLE>
<categories>
</categories>
<keywords/>
<contents>
<CONTENT>
<name>Content_1</name>
In this example, the data is not included in .xml file, but the data is created by a data file
contained in the same .zip file. The file name of this data file is present in the .xml file.
<contentdata class="PICTURECONTENTDATA">
<filename>WAP_PICTURE_101_080.gif</filename>
<mimetype>image/gif</mimetype>
<data/>
</mimedata>
</contentdata>

Content Management
Because the data is stored on the server, the externalmode value is NONE.
<externalmode>NONE</externalmode>
<devicecompatibilities>
<associateddevicemodels>
<DEVICEMODEL>
</DEVICEMODEL>
<DEVICEMODEL>
</DEVICEMODEL>
</associateddevicemodels>
</devicecompatibilities>
</CONTENT>
</contents>
</CONTENTBUNDLE>
XML Files and an External Content System

<CONTENTBUNDLE>
<categories>
</categories>
<keywords/>
<contents>
<CONTENT>
<name>dfhdfhdh</name>
<contentdata class="BINARYCONTENTDATA">
<filename/>
<mimetype/>
<data/>
</mimedata>
</contentdata>
Because external content data is used, the external mode is now set to either CREATE or
DELIVERY. The CREATE mode uploads data files when the content is created, while the
DELIVERY mode uploads data files when the content is sent.
<externalmode>CREATE</externalmode>
The external content system manages the upload mode according to specific parameters.
There is one external content system plug-in which uses a URL to upload data. In this
example, the type of external content system is URL.
<externalsystemtype>URL</externalsystemtype>

Content Management
Parameters used by this external content system are referenced in the

URLExternalContentDataSystemParam class file which contains a URL.
<externalsystemparam class="URLEXTERNALCONTENTDATASYSTEMPARAM">
<url>http://www.mobile365.com/images/CM-haut.jpg</url>
</externalsystemparam>
</CONTENT>
</contents>
</CONTENTBUNDLE>

7 Device Management
Managing Devices by Brand .................................................................................... 172

Searching Devices by Brand.................................................................................... 173
Creating a Brand ................................................................................................... 174
Editing a Brand ..................................................................................................... 174
Deleting a Brand ................................................................................................... 177
Activating a Brand ................................................................................................. 177
Deactivating a Brand.............................................................................................. 177
Managing Devices by Model .................................................................................... 178
Searching Devices by Model.................................................................................... 179
Creating a Device .................................................................................................. 180
Editing a Device .................................................................................................... 180
Deleting a Device .................................................................................................. 194
Activating Devices ................................................................................................. 194
Deactivating Devices.............................................................................................. 194
Managing Features ................................................................................................ 195
Searching Features ................................................................................................ 196
Creating a Feature................................................................................................. 197
Editing a Feature ................................................................................................... 197
Deleting a Feature ................................................................................................. 200
Activating Features ................................................................................................ 200
Deactivating Features ............................................................................................ 200
Managing Capability Groups.................................................................................... 201
Viewing Capability Groups ...................................................................................... 201
Searching Capability Groups ................................................................................... 202
Editing a Capability Group ...................................................................................... 203
Creating a Capability Group .................................................................................... 204
Deleting a Capability Group .................................................................................... 205
Managing Capability Group Handlers ........................................................................ 206
Viewing Capability Group Handlers........................................................................... 206
Searching Capability Group Handlers........................................................................ 207
Creating a Capability Group Handler ........................................................................ 207
Editing a Capability Group Handler........................................................................... 208
Deleting a Capability Group Handler......................................................................... 211
Managing Formatting Tokens................................................................................... 212
Viewing Formatting Tokens ..................................................................................... 212
Searching Formatting Tokens .................................................................................. 213
Editing a Formatting Token ..................................................................................... 213
Creating a Formatting Token ................................................................................... 216
Deleting a Formatting Token ................................................................................... 218
Managing Device Detection Rules ............................................................................ 218
Viewing Detection Rules ......................................................................................... 218
Searching Detection Rules ...................................................................................... 219
Editing a Detection Rule ......................................................................................... 220
Creating a Detection Rule ....................................................................................... 222
Deleting a Detection Rule ....................................................................................... 223
Managing Device Detection Sets .............................................................................. 224

Device Management
Viewing Detection Sets........................................................................................... 224

Using the Detection Tool......................................................................................... 225
Managing Device Application Types .......................................................................... 226
Viewing Device Application Types............................................................................. 226
Searching Device Application Types.......................................................................... 228
Editing a Device Application Type............................................................................. 228
Creating a Device Application Type .......................................................................... 230
Deleting a Device Application Type........................................................................... 231
Activating Device Application Types.......................................................................... 231
Deactivating Device Application Types ...................................................................... 231
Managing Device Applications ................................................................................. 232
Viewing Device Applications .................................................................................... 232
Searching Device Applications ................................................................................. 233
Editing a Device Application .................................................................................... 233
Creating a Device Application .................................................................................. 236
Deleting a Device Application .................................................................................. 237
Activating Device Applications ................................................................................. 238
Deactivating Device Applications.............................................................................. 238
Managing Device Application Versions ...................................................................... 238
Viewing Device Application Versions ......................................................................... 238
Searching Device Application Versions ...................................................................... 240
Editing a Device Application Version ......................................................................... 240
Creating a Device Application Version....................................................................... 243
Deleting a Device Application Version ....................................................................... 244
Activating Device Application Versions ...................................................................... 244
Deactivating Device Application Versions .................................................................. 244
Managing Formatting Systems ................................................................................ 245
Viewing Formatting Systems ................................................................................... 245
Searching Formatting Systems ................................................................................ 245

Device Management
The Device menu allows you to manage devices and features, as well as information stored
in the Device Knowledge Base (DKB). This chapter describes the device management
portions of the Device menu. For information about using the Device menu to manage
device repository and DKB information, see Chapter 8, “DKB Management” on page 247.
NOTE: The menu is available only if you are a member of an authorized group.
Managing Devices by Brand
To manage devices by brand:
1. From the Device menu, select Models > Brands.

3 The Brands > Filters screen displays.

3 The Brands screen displays a list of all device brands. For information about the
Filters screen, see “Searching Devices by Brand” on page 173.
Figure 7.1: Brands Screen

Device Management
The Brands screen displays the following information:

• Name — Click on a brand name to modify the selected brand. For more information,
see “Editing a Brand” on page 174.
• Brand Id — The brand’s identification number.
• Status — The brand status: Active, Inactive, or Deprecated.
• Creation Date — The date on which the brand was added to the database.
• Added by — The first DKB version to include the device brand.
• Associated Devices — The number of devices associated with the brand.
Using the Brands Screen
The Brands screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content
Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the brands screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a brand to edit. For more information, see “Editing a
Brand” on page 174.
• Click New Brand to create a new brand. For more information, see “Creating a Brand”
on page 174.
• Click Delete to delete selected brands. For more information, see “Deleting a Brand”
on page 177.
• Click Activate to activate selected inactive brands. For more information, see
“Activating a Brand” on page 177.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate selected active brands. For more information, see
“Deactivating a Brand” on page 177.
Searching Devices by Brand
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of devices specific to
that criteria.
To manage device filters:
1. From the Brands screen (Figure 7.1 on page 172), click Edit filters.
3 The Brands > Filters screen displays (Figure 7.2 on page 174).

Device Management
Figure 7.2: Brands > Filters Screen
Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the filter
Creating a Brand
NOTE: The New brand function is reserved for use by Mobile 365. To create a brand, you
must have the appropriate rights, and a master trust source must be available on
the platform. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device
Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
Editing a Brand
NOTE: To modify brand information, you must have the appropriate rights. For more
information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on
page 17.
To edit a brand:
1. From the Brands screen, click the brand name of a device to modify.
3 The Details tab on the Edit brand screen displays (Figure 7.3 on page 175).

Device Management
Figure 7.3: Edit brand Screen — Details Tab
From the Edit device screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New Brand to create a new brand. For more information, see “Creating a Brand”
on page 174.
• Click Delete to delete the edited brand. For more information, see “Deleting a Brand”
on page 177.
• Click Activate to activate the edited brand. For more information, see “Activating a
Brand” on page 177.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited brand. For more information, see
“Deactivating a Brand” on page 177.
• Click Associated devices to view a list of devices associated to the edited brand only.
Fore more information, see “Using the Devices Screen” on page 179.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify brand details. For more information, see “Using
• Click the Aliases tab to add or remove aliases associated with the brand. For more
information about managing aliases, see “Using the Aliases Tab” on page 182.
The Details tab on the Edit brand screen (Figure 7.3 on page 175) allows you to view or
modify the following details of an existing brand:
• Status — The status of the brand: Active (contracted) or Inactive (not contracted).
This cannot be modified.
• Brand Id — The brand’s identification number.

Device Management
• Name — The name of the brand. This is used on both front and back-office interfaces.
• Picture — This picture is used to help both front-office and back-office users identify
their device. Click Browse to locate a different picture file to represent the device. To
restore the default picture, click Restore default picture.
• DKB version — An identifier that helps identify when the brand was added to the
database.
• Creation date — The date on which the brand was added to the database (cannot be
modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the brand was last modified (updated
automatically).
Using the Aliases Tab
The Aliases tab on the Edit brand screen allows you to add or remove aliases associated
with the edited brand.
NOTE: By default, a one-letter alias is automatically generated by Content Manager. DO

NOT REMOVE THE DEFAULT ALIAS.
Figure 7.4: Edit brand Screen — Aliases Tab
Adding an Alias to a Device
To add an alias:
1. In the Alias field, enter a new unique alias (a name or short description). No two device
brands can have the same alias.
2. Click Add.
3 The newly added alias displays in a list of aliases on the Aliases tab.
Removing an Alias from a Device
To remove an alias, click Remove next to the alias to remove.

Device Management
Deleting a Brand
NOTE: If a selected brand comes from a trust source archive, it is not deleted, but rather
passed in a deprecated state.
To delete a brand:
1. From the Brands screen (Figure 7.1 on page 172), check the box next to each brand to
delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all brands.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited brand by clicking Delete on the Edit brand screen.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected brands?” displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion.
Activating a Brand
To activate a brand:
activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all brands. Only those
brands that are currently inactive are modified.
NOTE: The Activate function is also available for edited brands on the Edit brand screen.
2. Click Activate.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected brands?”
displays.
3. Click Ok to activate, or Cancel to void activation.
Deactivating a Brand
To deactivate a brand:
deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all brands. Only those
brands that are currently active are modified.
NOTE: The Deactivate function is also available for edited brands on the Edit brand
screen.

Device Management
2. Click Deactivate.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected brands?”
displays.
3. Click Ok to deactivate, or Cancel to void deactivation.
Managing Devices by Model
To view a list of available devices by model:
1. From the Device menu, select Models > Devices.

3 The Devices > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of devices. For information about the Filters screen, see
“Searching Devices by Model” on page 179.
3 The Devices screen displays.
Figure 7.5: Devices Screen

Device Management
Using the Devices Screen
The Devices screen displays the following information:

• Model — The model name of the device. Click on a model name to edit. For more
information, see “Editing a Device” on page 180.
• Brand — The brand name of the device.
• Terminal Id — The terminal ID associated with the device.
• Status — The status of the device: Active, Inactive, or Deprecated.
• Added By — The first DKB version to include the device.
The Devices screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content
Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Devices screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Model column, click a device to edit. For more information, see “Editing a
Device” on page 180.
• Click New device to create a new device. For more information, see “Creating a
Device” on page 180.
• Click Delete to delete selected devices. For more information, see “Deleting a Device”
on page 194.
• Click Activate to activate selected devices. For more information, see “Activating
Devices” on page 194. Only those devices not currently active are modified.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate all selected devices. For more information, see
“Deactivating Devices” on page 194. Only those devices currently active are modified.
• Click Rights to manage rights associated with the device. For more information, see
“Managing Device and DKB Rights” on page 297.
Searching Devices by Model
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of devices specific to
that criteria.
To manage device filters:
1. From the Devices screen (Figure 7.5 on page 178), click Edit filters.
3 The Devices > Filters screen displays (Figure 7.6 on page 180).

Device Management
Figure 7.6: Devices > Filters Screen
Creating a Device
NOTE: The New device function is reserved for use by Mobile 365. To create a device, you
must have the appropriate rights, and a master trust source must be available on
the platform. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device
Editing a Device
NOTE: To modify device information, you must have the appropriate rights. For more
page 17.
To edit a device:
1. From the Devices screen (Figure 7.5 on page 178), click the model name of a device to
modify.
3 The Details tab on the Edit device screen displays (Figure 7.7 on page 181).

Device Management
Figure 7.7: Edit device Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Device Screen
From the Edit device screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click the Details tab to view or modify device details. For more information, see
• Click the Aliases tab to add or remove aliases associated with the device. For more
information about managing aliases, see “Using the Aliases Tab” on page 182.
• Click the IMEI Ranges tab to define IMEI ranges for the device. For more information
about defining IMEI ranges, see “Using the IMEI Ranges Tab” on page 183.
• Click the User Agents tab to view all user agent profiles associated to the device. For
more information about viewing user agents, see “Using the User Agents Tab” on
page 187.
• Click the Device profiles tab to view all device profiles associated to the device. For
more information, see “Using the Device Profiles Tab” on page 191.

Device Management
The Details tab on the Edit device screen (Figure 7.7 on page 181) allows you to view or
modify the following details of an existing content file:
• Status — The status of the device: Active, Inactive, or Deprecated (deleted and
waiting to be purged). This cannot be modified.
• Terminal ID — A unique number assigned by a system administrator that identifies
the handset device for administrative purposes (for example, adding, editing, or
deleting handsets). This cannot be modified.
• Name — The device name used for both front-office and back-office users. This field
can be modified. To restore the default name, click Restore default name.
• Brand — The brand of device. To edit the brand, click the brand name. For more
information, see “Editing a Brand” on page 174.
• Picture — This picture is used to help both front-office and back-office users identify
their device. Click Browse to locate a different picture file to represent the device. To
restore the default picture, click Restore default picture.
• DKB version — An identifier that helps identify when the device was added to Content
Manager. If the device was added manually, the identifier reads Manually added.
• Comment — A short comment regarding the device (optional).
• Created Date — The date on which the device was added to Content Manager.
• Last modification date — The date on which the device was last modified.
Using the Aliases Tab
In addition to the functionality on the Edit device screen, the Aliases tab on the Edit
device screen allows you to manage the aliases associated to the edited device. These
aliases help users identify their device.
Figure 7.8: Edit device Screen — Aliases Tab

Device Management
Adding an Alias to a Device
To add an alias:
1. In the Alias field, enter a new unique alias (a name or short description). No two devices
can have the same alias.
2. Click Add.
3 The newly added alias displays in a list of aliases on the Aliases tab.
Removing an Alias From a Device
To remove an alias, click Remove next to the alias to remove.
Using the IMEI Ranges Tab
The IMEI Ranges tab on the Edit device screen allows you to define IMEI ranges for the
edited device.
The IMEI Ranges tab displays the following information:

• TAC — The Type Approval Code. This consists of the first 6 or 8 digits of the IMEI that
identifies the device. Click a TAC to edit the associated IMEI range. For more
information, see “Editing an IMEI Range” on page 184.
• Serial Begin — The beginning of the serial number range associated with the IMEI.
• Serial End — The end of the serial number range associated with the IMEI.
• Status — The IMEI range status: Active, Inactive, or Deprecated.
• Added by — The first DKB version to include the IMEI range.
In addition to the functionality on the Edit device screen, the IMEI ranges tab allows you
to perform the following tasks:
• Click New IMEI range to create an IMEI range for the device. For more information,
see “Creating an IMEI Range” on page 185.
• Click Delete IMEI range to delete selected ranges. For more information, see
“Deleting an IMEI Range” on page 186.
• Click Activate IMEI range to activate selected ranges. For more information, see
“Activating an IMEI Range” on page 186.
• Click Deactivate IMEI range to deactivate selected ranges. For more information,
see “Deactivating an IMEI Range” on page 186.

Device Management
Editing an IMEI Range
To edit an IMEI range:
1. Click an item from the TAC column to edit.

3 The Edit device > Edit IMEI Range screen displays.
Figure 7.9: Edit device > Edit IMEI Range Screen
2. Make changes to the following information as necessary:

• Tac — Type Approval Code. The TAC consists of the first 6 or 8 digits of the IMEI
number and is used to identify the device.
• Serial Begin — The beginning number of the serial number range.
• Serial End — The end number of the serial number range.
• Brand — The brand name of the device.
• Model — The model name of the device.
• DKB version — The first DKB version to include the IMEI range (cannot be modified).
• Creation date — The date on which the IMEI range was created.
• Last modification date — The date on which the IMEI range was last modified
(updated automatically).

3 The IMEI ranges screen displays, allowing you to view a complete list or set up a
filter to search for existing IMEI ranges. For more information about viewing IMEI
ranges, see “Managing Devices By IMEI Range” on page 249.

Device Management
Creating an IMEI Range
To create a new IMEI range for the edited device:
1. From the IMEI Ranges screen, click New IMEI range.

3 The New IMEI range screen displays.
Figure 7.10: New IMEI range Screen
2. From the Brand list, select the device brand for the IMEI range.
3. From the Model list, select the device model for the IMEI range.
4. In the Tac field, enter the Type Approval Code. The TAC consists of the first 6 or 8 digits
of the IMEI number and is used to identify the device.
5. In the Serial Begin field, enter the beginning number of the serial number range.
6. In the Serial End field, enter the end number of the serial number range.
7. Select whether to keep the existing TAC (if detected) or replace it with the new TAC.
8. From the Trust source list, select the certified source of the IMEI range.
9. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the IMEI range.
10. Click Submit.

3 The IMEI ranges screen displays, allowing you to view a complete list or set up a
filter to search for existing IMEI ranges. For more information about viewing IMEI
ranges, see “Managing Devices By IMEI Range” on page 249.

Device Management
Deleting an IMEI Range
To delete an IMEI range:
1. From the IMEI ranges tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each IMEI
range to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all ranges.
2. Click Delete IMEI range.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected IMEI ranges?”
displays.
Activating an IMEI Range
To activate an IMEI range:
1. From the IMEI range tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each inactive
IMEI range to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all
inactive ranges.
2. Click Activate IMEI range.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected IMEI ranges?”
displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void activation.
Deactivating an IMEI Range
To deactivate an IMEI range:
1. From the IMEI range tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each active
IMEI range to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all
active ranges.
2. Click Deactivate IMEI range.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected IMEI ranges?”
displays.
3. Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deactivation.

Device Management
Using the User Agents Tab
The User agents tab on the Edit device screen allows you to manage user agents
associated with the selected device.
Figure 7.11: Edit device Screen — User agents Tab
In addition to the functionality on the Edit device screen, the User agents tab allows you to
perform the following tasks:
• Click an agent from the User agent column to view or modify. For more information,
see “Editing a User Agent” on page 187.
• Click New User Agent to create a new user agent. For more information, see
“Creating a New User Agent” on page 189.
• Click Delete User Agent to delete selected agents. For more information, see
“Deleting a User Agent” on page 190.
• Click Activate User Agent to activate selected user agents. For more information,
see “Activating a User Agent” on page 190.
• Click Deactivate User Agent to deactivate selected user agents. For more
information, see “Deactivating a User Agent” on page 190.
Editing a User Agent
To view or modify an existing user agent on a device:
1. From the User agents tab on the Edit device screen (Figure 7.11 on page 187), click on
the name of a user agent from the User agent column to edit.
3 The Edit user agent screen displays (Figure 7.12 on page 188).
NOTE: The Edit user agent screen also displays after searching for and editing a user
agent. For more information, see “Managing Devices by User Agent” on page 253.

Device Management
Figure 7.12: Edit user agent Screen
The Edit user agent screen allows you to view or modify the following information:
• Status — The user agent status (cannot be modified).
• User agent — The name of the user agent.
• Brand — The device brand with which the agent is associated.
• Model — The device model with which the agent is associated.
• Device profile — The device profile with which the agent is associated.
• Resolved — Indicates whether the user agent is resolved.
• Defined as default — Indicates whether the selected user agent is the default.
• Application — The device application for the user agent.
• Application version — The device application version for the user agent.
• DKB version — The first DKB version to include the user agent (cannot be modified).
• Creation date — The date on which the user agent was created (cannot be modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the user agent was last modified

Device Management
The Edit user agent screen also allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Delete User Agent to delete the edited user agent. For more information, see
“Deleting a User Agent” on page 190.
• Click Activate User Agent to activate the edited user agent. For more information,
see “Activating a User Agent” on page 190.
• Click Deactivate User Agent to deactivate the edited user agent. For more
information, see “Deactivating a User Agent” on page 190.
• Click Edit associated model to return to the User agents tab on the Edit device
screen (Figure 7.11 on page 187).
Creating a New User Agent
To create a new user agent for a device:
1. From the User agents tab on the Edit device screen (Figure 7.11 on page 187), click
New user agent.
3 The New user agent screen displays.
Figure 7.13: New user agent Screen
2. In the User agent field, enter a name for the user agent.
3. From the Device profile list, select the device profile for the user agent.
4. From the Application version list, select the device application version for the user
agent.
5. From the Trust source list, select the certified source for the user agent.

Device Management
6. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the user agent.
7. Specify whether the user agent is Resolved (Yes/No).
8. Specify whether the user agent is Defined as default (Yes/No).
9. Click Submit.
3 The user agent is created, and the User agent tab on the Edit device screen
displays (Figure 7.11 on page 187).
Deleting a User Agent
To delete a user agent:
1. From the User agents tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each user
agent to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all agents.
2. Click Delete User Agent.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected user agents?”
displays.
Activating a User Agent
To activate a user agent:
1. From the User agents tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each
inactive user agent to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select
all inactive agents.
2. Click Activate User Agent.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected user agents?”
displays.
Deactivating a User Agent
To deactivate a user agent:
1. From the User agents tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each active
user agent to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all
active agents.

Device Management
2. Click Deactivate User Agent.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected user agents?”
displays.
Using the Device Profiles Tab
The Device profiles tab on the Edit device screen allows you to manage device profiles
associated with the device.
Figure 7.14: Edit device Screen — Device profiles Tab
In addition to the functionality on the Edit device screen, the Device profiles tab allows
• Click a profile from the Name column to view or modify. The process for editing a
device profile for a selected device is the same as editing a profile after a search. For
more information, see “Editing a Device Profile” on page 258.
• Click New device profile to create a new device profile. For more information, see
“Creating a New Device Profile” on page 191.
• Click Import device profile to import an existing device profile for the edited device.
For more information, see “Importing a Device Profile” on page 192.
• Click Delete device profile to delete selected profiles. For more information, see
“Deleting a Device Profile” on page 193.
Creating a New Device Profile
To create a new device profile for a device:
1. From the Device profiles tab on the Edit device screen (Figure 7.14 on page 191), click
New device profile.
3 The New device profile screen displays (Figure 7.15 on page 192).

Device Management
Figure 7.15: New device profile Screen
2. In the Url field, enter the URL address for the profile.
3. From the Inherit list, select the device profile from which the new profile will inherit
properties.
4. From the Trust source list, select the certified source for the profile.
5. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the profile.
6. Click Submit.
3 The device profile is created, and the Device profiles tab on the Edit device screen
Importing a Device Profile
To import an existing device profile for use with the edited device:
1. From the Device profiles tab on the Edit device screen, click Import device profile.
3 The Import device profile screen displays (Figure 7.16 on page 193).

Device Management
Figure 7.16: Import device profile Screen
2. In the Url field, type the URL address for the device profile to import (required).
3. From the Inherit list, select the profile from which the imported profile inherits
properties.
4. In the UAProf field, enter the full path and filename to the User Agent Profile for the
device profile. Click Browse to search (required).
5. From the Trust source list, select the certified source for the device profile.
6. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the device profile.
7. Click Submit.
3 The device profile is imported, and the Device profiles tab on the Edit device
screen displays (Figure 7.14 on page 191).
Deleting a Device Profile
To delete a device profile:
1. From the Device profiles tab on the Edit device screen, check the box next to each
profile to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all profiles.
2. Click Delete device profile.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device profiles?”
displays.

Device Management
Deleting a Device
To delete a device:
1. From the Devices screen (Figure 7.5 on page 178), check the box next to each device to
remove. Check the box at the top of the screen to quickly select all devices.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected models?” displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited device by clicking Delete from any tab on the Edit
device screen.
Activating Devices
To activate devices:
1. From any tab on the Devices screen (Figure 7.5 on page 178), check the box next to
each inactive device to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select
all inactive devices.
2. Click Activate.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected models?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also activate an edited device by clicking Activate from any tab on the
Edit device screen.
Deactivating Devices
To deactivate devices:
1. From the Devices screen (Figure 7.5 on page 178), check the box next to each active
device to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active
devices.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected models?”
displays.

NOTE: You can also deactivate an edited device by clicking Deactivate from any tab on
the Edit device screen.

Device Management
Managing Features
The Features portion of the Device menu allows you to manage features available for all
device models known to Content Manager, based on imported DKB archives.
To view a list of features available:
1. From the Device menu, select Features > Features.

3 The Features > Filters screen displays.

3 The Features screen displays a list of features. For information about the Filters
screen, see “Searching Features” on page 196.
Figure 7.17: Features Screen
The Features screen displays the following information:

• Name — The name of the feature. Click a feature to edit. For more information about
editing a feature, see “Editing a Feature” on page 197.
• Feature Id — The feature’s identification number.
• Status — Indicates whether the feature is Active, Inactive, Supported (but not
contracted), or Not used.
• Added by — The first DKB version to include the feature.

Device Management
Using the Features Screen
The Features screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content
Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Features screen, you can perform the following
tasks:
• From the Name column, click a feature to edit. For more information, see “Editing a
Feature” on page 197.
• Click New feature to create a new feature. For more information, see “Creating a
• Click Delete to delete selected features. For more information, see “Deleting a
• Click Activate to activate all selected features for all devices. For more information,
see “Activating Features” on page 200.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate all selected features for all devices. For more
information, see “Deactivating Features” on page 200.
Searching Features
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of features specific to
that criteria.
To manage feature filters:
1. From the Features screen (Figure 7.17 on page 195), click Edit filters.
3 The Features > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.18: Features > Filters Screen

Device Management
Creating a Feature
NOTE: The New feature function is reserved for use by Mobile 365. To create a feature,
you must have the appropriate rights, and a master trusted source must be
available on the platform. For more information about device rights, see “Device
and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
Editing a Feature
NOTE: To modify a feature, you must have the appropriate rights. For more information
about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
To modify a feature:
1. From the Features screen (Figure 7.17 on page 195), click the name of a feature to
modify.
3 The Details tab on the Edit feature screen displays.
Figure 7.19: Edit feature Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Feature Screen
From the Edit feature screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click the Details tab to view or modify feature details. For more information, see
• Click the Compatible device profiles tab to add or remove aliases associated with
the device. For more information about managing aliases, see “Using the Aliases Tab”
on page 182.

Device Management
• Click the IMEI Ranges tab to define IMEI ranges for the device. For more information
about defining IMEI ranges, see “Using the IMEI Ranges Tab” on page 183.
• Click the User Agents tab to view all user agent profiles associated to the device. For
more information about viewing user agents, see “Using the User Agents Tab” on
page 187.
• Click the Device profile tab to view all device profiles associated to the device. For
more information, see “Using the Device Profiles Tab” on page 191.
The Details tab on the Edit feature screen (Figure 7.19 on page 197) allows you to view or
modify the following details of an existing feature:
• Status — The status of the device: Active, Deactivated, Not contracted, or Not
Supported (cannot be modified).
• Feature id — The feature’s identification number (cannot be modified).
• Name — The name of the feature.
• DKB version — The first DKB version to include the feature (cannot be modified).
• Comment (optional) — A short comment regarding the feature.
• Created Date — The date on which the feature was added to the database.
• Last modification date — The date on which the feature was last modified.
Using the Compatible Device Profiles Tab
In addition to the functionality on the Edit feature screen, the Compatible device profiles
tab on the Edit feature screen (Figure 7.20 on page 199) allows you to manage the device
profiles compatible with the selected feature.

Device Management
Figure 7.20: Edit feature Screen — Compatible device profiles Tab
To view a list of compatible device profiles:
1. From the Show brands list, select the brand names to view. Press and hold Ctrl to select
multiple brands.
2. Select whether to view brands with or without inherited profiles.
3. Click Show device profiles.

3 Device profiles matching the selected criteria display by brand on the Compatible
device profiles tab.
From the list of device profiles, checked profiles are listed as associated with the current
feature, unchecked profiles are not associated but available for association, and profiles
marked with a are already listed as associated with another feature. Click the icon to edit
the device profile.
To associate specific profiles with the feature, check the box next to any candidate profiles.
To quickly select all candidate profiles to associate, click Select all. Click Submit when
finished.
To disassociate specific profiles from the feature, check the box next to any associated
profiles. To quickly select all associated profiles to disassociate, click Select all. Click
Submit when finished.

Device Management
Deleting a Feature
To delete a feature:
1. From the Features screen (Figure 7.17 on page 195), check the box next to each feature
to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all features.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected features?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited feature by clicking Delete on the Edit feature
screen.
Activating Features
To activate features:
1. From the Features screen (Figure 7.17 on page 195), check the box next to each
inactive feature to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all
inactive features. Only those features that are currently inactive are modified.
2. Click Activate.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected features?”
displays.
Deactivating Features
To deactivate features:
1. From the Features screen (Figure 7.17 on page 195), check the box next to each active
feature to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all active
features. Only those features that are currently active are modified.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected features?”
displays.

Device Management
Managing Capability Groups
Capability groups are associated to features and are defined automatically by Content
Manager. You can, however, manually add or remove devices in a capability group.
Viewing Capability Groups
To view a list of capability groups:
1. From the Devices menu, select Features > Capability groups.

3 The Capability groups >Filters screen displays.

3 The Capability groups screen displays a list of all capability groups. For information
about the Filters screen, see “Searching Capability Groups” on page 202.
Figure 7.21: Capability groups Screen
The Capability group screen displays the following information:

• Name —The name of the capability group. Click a group name to modify. For
information about editing a capability group, see “Editing a Capability Group” on
page 203.

Device Management
• Handled feature — The feature associated with the group.

• Handler — The type of handler that manages the group. For more information, see
“Managing Capability Group Handlers” on page 206.
Using the Capability Groups Screen
The Capability groups screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in
With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Capability groups screen, you can perform the
following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a group to edit. For more information, see “Editing a
Capability Group” on page 203.
• Click New capability group to create a new group. For more information, see
“Creating a Capability Group” on page 204.
• Click Delete to delete selected capability groups. For more information, see “Deleting
a Capability Group” on page 205.
Searching Capability Groups
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of capability groups
To manage capability group filters:
1. From the Capability groups screen (Figure 7.21 on page 201), click Edit filters.
3 The Capability groups > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.22: Capability groups > Filters Screen

Device Management
Editing a Capability Group
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights to modify a capability group. For more
page 17.
To edit a capability group:
1. From the Capability groups screen (Figure 7.21 on page 201), click a group from the
Name column to modify.
3 The Associated devices tab on the Edit capability group screen displays.
Figure 7.23: Edit capability group Screen — Associated devices Tab

Device Management
Using the Edit Capability Group Screen
From the Edit Capability group screen, you can manage the device profiles associated with
the capability group.
To manage device profiles:
1. Define the devices to list by selecting device brands from the Show brands list. Press
and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands.
2. Click Show device profiles to list device profiles by selected brands.
From the list of device profiles, checked profiles are listed as associated with the current
capability group, unchecked profiles are not associated but available for association, and
profiles marked with a are already listed as associated with another capability group.
Click the icon to edit the device profile.
To associate specific profiles with the group, check the box next to any candidate profiles. To
quickly select all candidate profiles to associate, click Select all. Click Submit when finished.
To disassociate specific profiles from the group, check the box next to any associated
profiles. To quickly select all associated profiles to disassociate, click Select all. Click
Submit when finished.
Resetting a Capability Group
You can reassociate all disassociated device profiles with the edited capability group
simultaneously.
NOTE: You must have the “manage capability groups” right in order to reset groups.
To reassociate all device profiles with the edited capability group, click Reset capability
group on the Edit capability group screen (Figure 7.23 on page 203).
Creating a Capability Group
To create a new capability group:
1. From the Capability groups screen (Figure 7.21 on page 201), click New capability
group.
3 The New capability group screen displays (Figure 7.24 on page 205).

Device Management
Figure 7.24: New capability group Screen
2. From the Type list, select the type of capability group to create.
3. In the Name field, enter a name for the capability group.
4. From the Feature list, select a feature for the capability group.
5. In the Description field, type a short description of the capability group (optional).
6. Click Submit.
3 The Edit capability group screen displays, allowing you to define device profiles for
the capability group. For more information, see “Editing a Capability Group” on
page 203.
Deleting a Capability Group
To delete a capability group:
1. From the Capability groups screen (Figure 7.21 on page 201), check the box next to
each group to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly delete all groups.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected capability groups?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also delete edited capability groups by clicking Delete on the Edit
capability group screen.

Device Management
Managing Capability Group Handlers
Capability group handlers are used to automatically define capability groups.
Viewing Capability Group Handlers
To view a list of current capability group handlers:
1. From the Device menu, select Features > Capability group handlers.
3 The Capability group handlers > Filters screen displays.

3 The Capability group handlers screen displays.
Figure 7.25: Capability group handlers Screen
The Capability group handlers screen displays the following information:

• Type — The type of group handler. Click the name of a handler to edit. For more
information, see “Editing a Capability Group Handler” on page 208.
• Feature — The feature associated with the handler.

Device Management
Using the Capability Group Handlers Screen
The Capability group handlers screen provides the same basic functionality as other list
screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing
and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Capability group handlers
screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Type column, click a handler to edit. For more information, see “Editing a
Capability Group Handler” on page 208.
• Click Create capability groups handler to create a new handler. For more
information, see “Creating a Capability Group Handler” on page 207.
• Click Delete to delete selected capability group handlers. For more information, see
“Deleting a Capability Group Handler” on page 211.
Searching Capability Group Handlers
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of capability group
handlers specific to that criteria.
To manage capability group handler filters:
1. From the Capability group handlers screen (Figure 7.25 on page 206), click Edit
filters.
3 The Capability group handlers > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.26: Capability group handlers > Filters Screen
Creating a Capability Group Handler
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights to create a capability group handler. For more
page 17.

Device Management
To create a capability group handler:
1. From the Capability group handler screen (Figure 7.25 on page 206), click Create
capability group handler.
3 The Create capability group handler screen displays.
NOTE: The Create capability group handler function is also available when viewing,
searching, or editing a capability group handler.
Figure 7.27: Create capability group handler Screen
2. From the Type list, select the type of capability group created by the handler.
3. From the Feature list, select the feature managed by the capability group created by the
handler.
4. In the Description field, type a short description of the handler (optional).
5. Click Submit.
3 The capability group handler is created, and the BLAH screen displays.
Editing a Capability Group Handler
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights to modify a capability group handler. For
more information about device rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base
Rights” on page 17.
To edit a capability group handler:
1. From the Capability group handlers screen (Figure 7.25 on page 206), click a handler
from the Type column to modify.
3 The Details tab on the Edit capability group handler screen displays (Figure 7.28
on page 209).

Device Management
Figure 7.28: Edit capability group handler Screen — Details Tab
The Edit capability group handler screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Reset to initialize the handler.
• Click Create capability groups handler to create a new capability group handler. For
more information, see “Creating a Capability Group Handler” on page 207.
• Click Delete capability groups handler to deleted the edited capability group
handler. For more information, see “Deleting a Capability Group Handler” on page 211.
• Click the Details tab to view the following information about the capability group
handler:
• Id — the capability group handler identifier
• Type — the type of group created by the capability group handler
• Feature — the feature managed by the groups created by the capability group
handler
• Description — a short description of the capability group handler
• Click the Capability Groups tab to view groups created by the edited capability group
handler. For more information, see “Using the Capability Groups Tab” on page 209.
Using the Capability Groups Tab
The Capability Groups tab on the Edit capability groups handler screen (Figure 7.29 on
page 210) lists the capability groups created by the edited capability groups handler.
NOTE: Capability groups created by capability group handlers are listed when editing a
specific handler. For more information, see “Editing a Capability Group Handler” on
page 208.

Device Management
Figure 7.29: Edit capability groups handler Screen — Capability Groups Tab
The Capability Groups tab on the Edit capability groups handler screen provides the
same basic functionality as other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic
functions available, see “Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6.
In addition, the Capability Groups tab on the Edit capability groups handler screen
allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Search for capability groups by applying a set of search filters. For more information,
see “Applying Search Filters” on page 210.
• Edit a listed capability group by clicking a capability group name from the Name
column. For more information about editing a capability group, see “Editing a
Capability Group” on page 203.
Applying Search Filters
The Capability Groups tab on the Edit capability groups handler screen allows you filter
through the list of capability groups by applying a set of search criteria (Figure 7.30 on
page 211). Several filters can be created and applied simultaneously as a set.
NOTE: Only those capability group records that meet all applied filter criteria will display.

Device Management
Figure 7.30: Edit capability groups handler Screen — Capability Groups Tab > Filters Screen
Resetting Filters. To remove all existing filters for the search, click Reset filters.
Viewing Applied Filters. To apply the filters and view a list of groups meeting the search
criteria, click Show table.
3 The Capability Groups tab displays an updated list of capability groups.
Adding and Removing Filters. To modify the set of filters currently applied to the search,
click Edit filters.
3 The Capability Groups tab displays a list of applied filters.
To add a new filter to the set, use the Filters fields to create the filter, then click the to
add the new filter to the set.
To remove a filter from the set, click the next to the applied filter to remove.
Deleting a Capability Group Handler
To delete a capability group handler:
1. From the Capability group handlers screen (Figure 7.25 on page 206), check the box
next to the handlers to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly delete all
handlers.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected capability group
handlers?” displays.
NOTE: You can also delete edited capability group handlers by clicking Delete capability
groups handler on the Edit capability group handler screen.

Device Management
Managing Formatting Tokens
Formatting tokens are used to balance the load between two formatting applications sending
content to any given handset. For example, say you have Application 1 and Application 2,
each using its own DKB and formatting data for adapting content to a device. You can use
formatting tokens to specify that Application 1 sends Content A to Handset A, but Application
2 sends Content A to Handset B.
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify formatting token
information. For more information about device rights, see “Device and Device
Viewing Formatting Tokens
To view a list of formatting tokens:
1. From the Devices menu, select Features > Formatting tokens.

3 The Formatting tokens >Filters screen displays.

3 The Formatting tokens screen displays a list of all formatting tokens. For
information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Formatting Tokens” on
page 213.
The Formatting tokens screen displays the following information:

• Description — The description of the formatting token. Click a token description to
modify the token. For information about editing a formatting token, see “Editing a
Formatting Token” on page 213.
• Feature — The feature associated with the formatting token.
• Type — The formatter type.
• Added by — The first DKB version to include the formatting token.
Using the Formatting Tokens Screen
The Formatting tokens screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in
With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Formatting tokens screen, you can perform the
following tasks:
• From the Description column, click a formatting token to edit. For more information,
see “Editing a Formatting Token” on page 213.
• Click New formatting token to create a new formatting token. For more information,
see “Creating a Formatting Token” on page 216.

Device Management
• Click Delete to delete selected formatting tokens. For more information, see “Deleting
a Formatting Token” on page 218.
Searching Formatting Tokens
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of formatting tokens
To manage formatting token filters:
1. From the Formatting tokens screen, click Edit filters.

3 The Formatting tokens > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.31: Formatting tokens > Filters Screen
Editing a Formatting Token
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify a formatting token. For
To edit a formatting token:
1. From the Formatting tokens screen, click a token from the Description column to
modify.
3 The Details tab on the Edit formatting token screen displays (Figure 7.32 on
page 214).

Device Management
Figure 7.32: Edit formatting token Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Formatting Token Screen
The Edit formatting token screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New formatting token to create a new formatting token. For more information,
see “Creating a Formatting Token” on page 216.
• Click Delete to delete the edited formatting token. For more information, see
“Deleting a Formatting Token” on page 218.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify token details. For more information, see “Using
• Click the Device profile capabilities tab to view or modify device profiles associated
with the token. For more information, see “Using the Device Profiles Capabilities Tab”
on page 215.
The Details tab on the Edit formatting token screen (Figure 7.32) allows you to modify
the following details of the selected token:
• Feature — The feature associated with the token.
• Description — A short description of the token (optional).
• DKB version — The first DKB version to include the formatting token (cannot be
modified).

Device Management
• Type — The formatter type (cannot be modified).

• Brand — The brand name of the device. If the formatter type is HM formatter, the
brand name is used to locate the correct formatting algorithm.
• Model — The model name of the device. If the formatter type is HM formatter, the
model name is used to locate the correct formatting algorithm.
• Creation date — The date on which the token was created (cannot be modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the token was last modified (updated
automatically).
Using the Device Profiles Capabilities Tab
The Device profiles capabilities tab allows you to manage device profiles associated with
the selected token.
Figure 7.33: Edit formatting token Screen — Device profiles capabilities Tab

Device Management
Define the device profiles to list by selecting from the criteria described below. A list of device
profiles matching the criteria selected displays on the right side of the tab. Device profiles are
ranked by brand/manufacturer.
• Show brands — Select the brands to include in the device list. Press and hold Ctrl to
select multiple brands.
• Inherited device profiles — Specify whether or not to view inherited device profiles.
• Click Show device profiles to view and select profiles available for the edited token.
From the list of device profiles, checked profiles are listed as associated with the formatting
token, unchecked profiles are not associated but available for association, and profiles
marked with a are already listed as associated with another formatting token with the
same feature. Click the icon to edit the token already associated with the device profile.
To select specific profiles, check the box next to any candidate profile. To quickly select all
candidate profiles, click Select all. Click Submit when finished.
To disassociate specific profiles, uncheck the box next to any associated profile. To quickly
select all associated profiles, click Unselect all. Click Submit when finished.
Creating a Formatting Token
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to create a formatting token. For
To create a formatting token:
1. From the Formatting tokens screen, click New formatting token.

3 The New formatting token screen displays (Figure 7.34 on page 217).
NOTE: The New formatting token function is also available when searching for or editing
a formatting token. For more information, see “Searching Formatting Tokens” on
page 213 and “Editing a Formatting Token” on page 213.

Device Management
Figure 7.34: New formatting token Screen
2. In the Description field, type a description for the formatting token.
3. From the Feature list, select a feature type for the token.
4. From the Trust source list, select the certified source for the token.
5. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the token. This helps to
identify when the token was added to Content Manager.
6. From the Formatting system list, select the formatting type for the token.
7. From the Brand list, select a brand name for the device. If the formatting type is HM
formatter, the brand name is used to locate the right formatting algorithm.
8. From the Model list, select a model name for the device. If the formatting type is HM
formatter, the model name is used to locate the right formatting algorithm.
9. Click Submit.
3 The Details tab on the Edit formatting token screen displays. For more information
about editing a formatting token, see “Editing a Formatting Token” on page 213.

Device Management
Deleting a Formatting Token
To delete a formatting token:
1. From the Formatting tokens screen, check the box next to each token to delete. Check
the box at the top of the column to quickly select all tokens.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected formatting
tokens?” displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited formatting token by clicking Delete on the Edit
formatting token screen.
Managing Device Detection Rules
Detection rules are used to automatically send content to a handset once it is detected on the
network.
Viewing Detection Rules
To view a list of detection rules:
1. From the Devices menu, select Device detection > Detection rules.
3 The Detection rules > Filters screen displays.

3 The Detection rules screen displays a list of all existing detection rules. For
information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Detection Rules” on page 219.
Figure 7.35: Detection rules Screen

Device Management
The Detection rules screen displays the following information:

• Detection regular expression — The regular expression used to identify the rule.
• Brand — The device brand associated with the rule.
• Model — The device model associated with the rule.
• Added by — The first DKB version to include the detection rule.
Using the Detection Rules Screen
The Detection rules screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in
With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Detection rules screen, you can perform the
following tasks:
• Click Edit to edit an existing detection rule. For more information, see “Editing a
Detection Rule” on page 220.
• Click New detection rule to create a new detection rule. For more information, see
“Creating a Detection Rule” on page 222.
• Click Delete to delete selected detection rules. For more information, see “Deleting a
Searching Detection Rules
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of detection rules
To manage detection rule filters:
1. From the Detection rules screen (Figure 7.35 on page 218), click Edit filters.
3 The Detection rules > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.36: Detection rules > Filters Screen

Device Management
Editing a Detection Rule
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify a detection rule. For more
page 17.
To edit a detection rule:
1. From the Detection rules screen (Figure 7.35 on page 218), click Edit next to a
detection rule to modify.
3 The Details tab on the Edit detection rule screen displays.
Figure 7.37: Edit detection rule Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Detection Rule Screen
The Edit detection rule screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New detection rule to create a new detection rule. For more information, see
“Creating a Detection Rule” on page 222.
• Click Delete to delete the edited detection rule. For more information, see “Deleting a

Device Management
The Details tab on the Edit detection rule screen (Figure 7.37 on page 220) allows you to
modify the following details of the selected detection rule:
• Detection set — The handler used to extract corresponding headers and attempts to
detect a device.
• DKB version — The first DKB package to include the rule (cannot be modified).
• Detection regular expression — The regular expression, with its match groups,
used by the selected handler to resolve rule headers.
• Match group model — The index of a match group within the regular expression that
corresponds to either a model name or its alias.
• Match group device profile — The index of a match group within the regular
expression that corresponds to the URL of a device profile.
• Match group application — The index of a match group within the regular
expression that corresponds to the name of a device application.
• Match group application version — The index of a match group within the regular
expression that corresponds to the name of a device application version.
• Brand — The device brand of the devices to be detected (can be either a device profile
or a user agent).
• Model — The device model on which detected items are associated. If None is
selected, the model information is extracted from the http header.
NOTE: The following fields are relevant only when editing a user agent detection set.
• Device profile — The device profile on which detected user agents are associated.
If None is selected, the device profile information is extracted from the http
header. If the device profile cannot be extracted, the device profile is defined by
default using the corresponding model.
• Device application — The device application on which detected user agents are
associated. If None is selected, the device application is extracted from the http
header.
• Device application version — The device application version on which detected
user agents are associated. If None is selected, the device application version is
extracted from the http header.
• Creation date — The date on which the detection rule was created (cannot be
modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the detection rule was last modified

Device Management
Creating a Detection Rule
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to create a detection rule. For more
page 17.
To create a detection rule:
1. From the Detection rules screen (Figure 7.35 on page 218), click New detection rule.
3 The New detection rule screen displays.
NOTE: The New detection rule function is also available when searching for or editing a
detection rule. For more information, see “Searching Detection Rules” on page 219
and “Editing a Detection Rule” on page 220.
Figure 7.38: New detection rule Screen
2. From the Detection set list, select the handler used to extract corresponding headers
and attempts to detect a device. This is required.
3. In the Detection regular expression field, enter the regular expression, with its match
groups, used by the selected handler to resolve rule headers. This is required.
4. In the Match group model field, enter the index of a match group within the regular
expression that corresponds to either a model name or its alias.
5. In the Match group device profile field, enter the index of a match group within the
regular expression that corresponds to the URL of a device profile.

Device Management
6. In the Match group application field, enter the index of a match group within the
regular expression that corresponds to the name of a device application.
7. In the Match group application version field, enter the index of a match group within
the regular expression that corresponds to the name of a device application version.
8. From the Brand list, select the device brand of the devices to be detected (can be either
a device profile or a user agent). This is required.
9. From the Model list, select the device model on which detected items are associated. If
None is selected, the model information is extracted from the http header. This is
required.
NOTE: Steps 10-12 are relevant only when creating a user agent detection set. If you are
not creating a user agent detection set, go to step 13.
10. From the Device profile list, select a device profile on which detected user agents are
associated. If None is selected, the device profile information is extracted from the http
header. If the device profile cannot be extracted, a profile is defined by default using the
corresponding model.
11. From the Device application list, select the device application on which detected user
agents are associated. If None is selected, the device application is extracted from the
http header.
12. From the Device application version list, select the device application version on which
detected user agents are associated. If None is selected, the device application version is
extracted from the http header.
13. From the Trust source list, select the certified source for the new detection rule.
14. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB package to include the rule. This helps to
identify when the rule was added to Content Manager.
15. Click Submit.

3 The Details tab on the Edit detection rule screen displays. For more information
about editing a detection rule, see “Editing a Detection Rule” on page 220.
Deleting a Detection Rule
To delete a detection rule:
1. From the Detection rules screen (Figure 7.35 on page 218), check the box next to each
rule to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all rules.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected detection rules?”
displays.

Device Management
NOTE: You can also delete edited detection rules by clicking Delete on the Edit detection
rule screen.
Managing Device Detection Sets
Detection sets are available handset identifiers that help to detect handsets.
Viewing Detection Sets
To view a list of detection sets:
1. From the Devices menu, select Device detection > Detection set.
3 The Detection set screen displays.
Figure 7.39: Detection set Screen
The Detection set screen displays the following information:

• Order — The detection set location in the cycle order, where 0 = first.
• Type — The handler than enables you to extract desired headers.
Using the Detection Set Screen
The Detection set screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in
With Lists” on page 6.

Device Management
Using the Detection Tool
The Detection tool allows you to verify the behavior of a detection rule. For more
information about detection rules, see “Managing Device Detection Rules” on page 218.
To check the behavior of a detection rule:
1. From the Devices menu, select Device detection > Detection tool.
3 The Detection tool screen displays.
Figure 7.40: Detection tool Screen
1. In the Header field, type the http header on which the regular expression applies. This is
required.
2. In the Detection regular expression field, type the regular expression, with its match
groups, that extracts information from the handler. This is required.
3. In the Match group model field, type the index of a match group within the regular
expression that corresponds to either a model name or its alias.
4. In the Match group device profile field, type the index of a match group within the
regular expression that corresponds to the URL of a device profile.
5. In the Match group application field, type the index of a match group within the
regular expression that corresponds to the name of a device application.
6. In the Match group application version field, type the index of a match group within
the regular expression that corresponds the name of a device application version.

Device Management

3 The regular expression is verified. Once the verification process is done, one of two
results is possible:
• Regular expression does not match header and must be redefined — In this
case, return to steps 1 and 2 to redefine the expression.
OR
• The following information is extracted from the header:

• Model — The name or alias of a device model.
• Device profile — The URL of a device profile.
• Device application — The name of a device application.
• Device application version — The name of a device application version.
Managing Device Application Types
The Structure portion of the Device menu allows you to define types of applications (for
example: Firmware, Games, and MMS agents), names of applications (for example: Nokia
MMS agent and Tetris), and versions of applications (for example: Tetris v1.0.0 and Tetris
v1.0.23).
Viewing Device Application Types
NOTE: Content Manager provides the Firmware application type.
To view a list of device application types:
1. From the Device menu, select Structure > Device application types.
3 The Device application types > Filters screen displays.

3 The Device application types screen displays a list of device application types
(Figure 7.41 on page 227). For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching
Device Application Types” on page 228.

Device Management
Figure 7.41: Device application types Screen
The Device application types screen displays the following information:

• Name — The name of the device application type. Click a name to edit. For more
information, see “Editing a Device Application Type” on page 228.
• Type — The type of device application.
• Status — The status of the device application type: Active or Inactive.
• Added by — The first DKB version to include the application type.
Using the Device Application Types Screen
The Device application types screen provides the same basic functionality as other list
and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Device application rules screen,
you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a name to edit an existing device application type. For
more information, see “Editing a Device Application Type” on page 228.
• Click New device application type to create a new device application type. For more
information, see “Creating a Device Application Type” on page 230.
• Click Delete to delete selected device application types. For more information, see
“Deleting a Device Application Type” on page 231.
• Click Activate to activate selected device application types. For more information, see
“Activating Device Application Types” on page 231.
• Click Deactivate to activate selected device application rules. For more information,
see “Deactivating Device Application Types” on page 231.

Device Management
Searching Device Application Types
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of device application
types specific to that criteria.
To manage device application type filters:
1. From the Device application types screen (Figure 7.41 on page 227), click Edit filters.
3 The Device application types > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.42: Device application types > Filters Screen
Editing a Device Application Type
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify device application type
To edit a device application type:
1. From the Device application types screen (Figure 7.41 on page 227), click the name of
a device application type to modify.
3 The Details tab on the Edit device application type screen displays (Figure 7.43 on
page 229).

Device Management
Figure 7.43: Edit device application type Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Device Application Type Screen
The Edit device application type screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New device application type to create a new device application type. For more
information, see “Creating a Device Application Type” on page 230.
• Click Delete to delete the edited device application type. For more information, see
“Deleting a Device Application Type” on page 231.
• Click Activate to activate the edited device application type. For more information,
see “Activating Device Application Types” on page 231.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited device application type. For more
information, see “Deactivating Device Application Types” on page 231.
The Edit device application type screen allows you to modify the name and the type of the
device application type. Click Submit to save any changes.

Device Management
Creating a Device Application Type
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify device application type
To create a device application type:
1. From the Device application types screen (Figure 7.41 on page 227), click New
device application type.
3 The New device application type screen displays.
NOTE: The New device application type function is also available when searching for or
editing a device application type. For more information, see “Searching Device
Application Types” on page 228 and “Editing a Device Application Type” on
page 228.
Figure 7.44: New device application type Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the device application type.
3. In the Type field, enter the device application type.
4. From the Trust source list, select the certified trust source for the device application
type.
5. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the device application
type. This helps to identify when the device application type was added to Content
Manager.
6. Click Submit.
3 The Details tab on the Edit device application type screen displays. For more
information about editing a device application type, see “Editing a Device Application
Type” on page 228.

Device Management
Deleting a Device Application Type
To delete a device application type:
1. From the Device application types screen (Figure 7.41 on page 227), check the box
next to each application type to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly
select all application types.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device application
types?” displays.
NOTE: You can also delete edited device application types by clicking Delete on the Edit
device application type screen.
Activating Device Application Types
To activate device application types:
next to each inactive device application type to activate. Check the box at the top of the
column to quickly select all device application types.
2. Click Activate.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected device
application types?” displays.
NOTE: You can also activate edited device application types by clicking Activate on the
Edit device application type screen.
Deactivating Device Application Types
To deactivate device application types:
next to each active device application type to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the
column to quickly select all active device application types.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected device
application types?” displays.
NOTE: You can also deactivate edited device application types by clicking Deactivate on
the Edit device application type screen.

Device Management
Managing Device Applications
NOTE: Content Manager provides the Default firmware application.
Viewing Device Applications
To view a list of device applications:
1. From the Device menu, select Structure > Device applications.

3 The Device applications > Filters screen displays.

3 The Device applications screen displays a list of device applications. For information
about the Filters screen, see “Searching Device Applications” on page 233.
Figure 7.45: Device applications Screen
The Device applications screen displays the following information:

• Name — The name of the device application. Click a name to edit. For more
information, see “Editing a Device Application” on page 233.
• Type — The type of device application type.
• Status — The status of the device application type: Active or Inactive.
• Added by — The first DKB version to include the device application.
Using the Device Applications Screen
The Device applications screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens
in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see “Viewing and
Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Device applications screen, you can
• From the Name column, click a name to edit an existing device application. For more
information, see “Editing a Device Application” on page 233.

Device Management
• Click New device application to create a new device application. For more
information, see “Creating a Device Application” on page 236.
• Click Delete to delete selected device applications. For more information, see
“Deleting a Device Application” on page 237.
• Click Activate to activate selected device applications. For more information, see
“Activating Device Applications” on page 238.
• Click Deactivate to activate selected device applications. For more information, see
“Deactivating Device Applications” on page 238.
Searching Device Applications
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of device applications
To manage device application type filters:
1. From the Device applications screen (Figure 7.45 on page 232), click Edit filters.
3 The Devie applications > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.46: Device applications > Filters Screen
Editing a Device Application
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify device application

Device Management
To edit a device application:
1. From the Device applications screen (Figure 7.45 on page 232), click the name of a
device application to modify.
3 The Details tab on the Edit device application screen displays.
Figure 7.47: Edit device application Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Device Application Screen
The Edit device application screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New device application to create a new device application. For more
information, see “Creating a Device Application” on page 236.
• Click Delete to delete the edited device application. For more information, see
“Deleting a Device Application” on page 237.
• Click Activate to activate the edited device application. For more information, see
“Activating Device Applications” on page 238.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited device application type. For more
information, see “Deactivating Device Applications” on page 238.
• Click the Details tab to modify general device application information. For more
information, see “Using the Details Tab” on page 235.
• Click the User agents tab to modify the user agents associated with the device
application. For more information, see “Using the User Agents Tab” on page 235.

Device Management
The Details tab on the Edit device application screen (Figure 7.47 on page 234) allows
you to view or modify the following information:
• Status — The status of the device application: Active or Inactive (cannot be
modified).
• Name — The name of the device application.
• Type — The device application type.
• Description — A short description of the device application (optional).
• DKB version — The first DKB version to include the device application (cannot be
modified).
• Creation date — The date on which the device application was created (cannot be
modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the device application was last modified
Using the Application Versions Tab
The Application versions tab allows you to manage application versions associated with
the device application.
Figure 7.48: Edit device application Screen — Application versions Tab
Click an application version name from the Name column to view or modify the application
version. For more information, see “Editing a Device Application Version” on page 240.
The User agents tab on the Edit device application screen (Figure 7.49 on page 236)
allows you to view a list of user agents associated with the device application.

Device Management
Figure 7.49: Edit device application Screen — User agents Tab
From the User agent column, click a user agent name to edit. For more information, see
“Editing a User Agent” on page 187.
Creating a Device Application
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify device application
To create a device application:
1. From the Device applications screen (Figure 7.45 on page 232), click New device
application.
3 The New device application screen displays (Figure 7.50 on page 237).
NOTE: The New device application function is also available when searching for or
editing a device application. For more information, see “Searching Device
Applications” on page 233 and “Editing a Device Application” on page 233.

Device Management
Figure 7.50: New device application Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the device application.
3. In the Type field, enter the device application.
4. From the Trust source list, select the certified trust source for the device application.
5. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the device application.
This helps to identify when the device application was added to Content Manager.
6. Click Submit.
3 The Details tab on the Edit device application screen displays. For more
information about editing a device application, see “Editing a Device Application” on
page 233.
Deleting a Device Application
To delete a device application:
1. From the Device applications screen (Figure 7.45 on page 232), check the box next to
each application type to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select
all application types.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device
applications?” displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited device application by clicking Delete on the Edit
device application screen.

Device Management
Activating Device Applications
To activate device applications:
each inactive device application to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to
quickly select all device applications.
2. Click Activate.
NOTE: You can also activate edited device applications by clicking Activate on the Edit
device application screen.
Deactivating Device Applications
To deactivate device applications:
each active device application to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to
quickly select all active device applications.
NOTE: You can also deactivate edited device applications by clicking Deactivate on the
Edit device application screen.
Managing Device Application Versions
NOTE: Content Manager provides the Default application version.
Viewing Device Application Versions
To view a list of device application versions:
1. From the Device menu, select Structure > Device application versions.
3 The Device application versions > Filters screen displays.

Device Management

3 The Device application versions screen displays a list of device application
versions. For information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Device Application
Versions” on page 240.
Figure 7.51: Device application versions Screen
The Device application versions screen displays the following information:

• Name — The name of the device application version. Click a name to edit. For more
information, see “Editing a Device Application Version” on page 240.
• Application — The device application used in the application version.
• Status — The status of the device application version: Active or Inactive.
• Added by — The first DKB version to include the device application version.
Using the Device Application Versions Screen
The Device application versions screen provides the same basic functionality as other list
and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Device application versions
• From the Name column, click a name to edit an existing device application version.
For more information, see “Editing a Device Application Version” on page 240.
• Click New device application to create a new device application version. For more
information, see “Creating a Device Application Version” on page 243.
• Click Delete to delete selected device application versions. For more information, see
“Deleting a Device Application Version” on page 244.
• Click Activate to activate selected device application versions. For more information,
see “Activating Device Application Versions” on page 244.
• Click Deactivate to activate selected device application versions. For more
information, see “Deactivating Device Application Versions” on page 244.

Device Management
Searching Device Application Versions
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of device application
versions specific to that criteria.
To manage device application version filters:
1. From the Device application versions screen (Figure 7.51 on page 239), click Edit
filters.
3 The Device application versions > Filters screen displays.
Figure 7.52: Device application versions > Filters Screen
Editing a Device Application Version
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify device application version
To edit a device application version:
1. From the Device application versions screen (Figure 7.51 on page 239), click the
name of a device application version to modify.
3 The Details tab on the Edit device application version screen displays

Device Management
Figure 7.53: Edit device application version Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Device Application Version Screen
The Edit device application version screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New device application version to create a new device application version. For
more information, see “Creating a Device Application Version” on page 243.
• Click Delete to delete the edited device application version. For more information, see
“Deleting a Device Application Version” on page 244.
• Click Activate to activate the edited device application version. For more information,
see “Activating Device Application Versions” on page 244.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited device application version. For more
information, see “Deactivating Device Application Versions” on page 244.
• Click the Details tab to modify general device application version information. For
• Click the User agents tab to modify the user agents associated with the device
application. For more information, see “Using the User Agents Tab” on page 242.
The Details tab on the Edit device application version screen (Figure 7.53) allows you to
view or modify the following information:
• Status — The status of the device application version: Active or Inactive (cannot be
modified).
• Name — The name of the device application version.

Device Management
• Application — The device application used in the version.

• Description — A short description of the device application version (optional).
• DKB version — The first DKB version to include the device application version (cannot
be modified).
• Creation date — The date on which the device application version was created
(cannot be modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the device application version was last
modified (updated automatically).
The User agents tab on the Edit device application version screen allows you to view a
list of user agents associated with the device application.
Figure 7.54: Edit device application version Screen — User agents Tab
From the User agent column, click a user agent name to edit. The process for editing a user
agent for a selected device application version is the same as editing a user agent for a
selected device. For more information, see “Editing a User Agent” on page 187.

Device Management
Creating a Device Application Version
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify device application version
To create a device application version:
1. From the Device application versions screen (Figure 7.51 on page 239), click New
device application version.
3 The New device application version screen displays.
NOTE: The New device application version function is also available when searching for
or editing a device application version. For more information, see “Searching
Device Application Versions” on page 240 and “Editing a Device Application
Version” on page 240.
Figure 7.55: New device application version Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the device application version.
3. From the Application list, select the device application version.
4. From the Trust source list, select the certified trust source for the device application
version.
5. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the device application
version. This helps to identify when the device application version was added to Content
Manager.
6. Click Submit.
3 The Details tab on the Edit device application version screen displays. For more
information about editing a device application version, see “Editing a Device
Application Version” on page 240.

Device Management
Deleting a Device Application Version
To delete a device application version:
1. From the Device application versions screen (Figure 7.51 on page 239), check the box
next to each application version to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to
quickly select all application versions.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device application
versions?” displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited device application version by clicking Delete on the
Edit device application version screen.
Activating Device Application Versions
To activate device application versions:
next to each inactive device application version to activate. Check the box at the top of
the column to quickly select all device application versions.
2. Click Activate.
application versions?” displays.
NOTE: You can also activate edited device application versions by clicking Activate on the
Edit device application version screen.
Deactivating Device Application Versions
To deactivate device application versions:
next to each active device application version to deactivate. Check the box at the top of
the column to quickly select all active device application versions.
application versions?” displays.
NOTE: You can also deactivate edited device application versions by clicking Deactivate
on the Edit device application version screen.

Device Management
Managing Formatting Systems
Formatting systems are the applications that encode contents in order to adapt them to any
given handset.
Viewing Formatting Systems
To view a list of formatting systems:
1. From the Device menu, select Structure > Formatting systems.

3 The Formatting systems > Filters screen displays.

3 The Formatting systems screen displays a list of formatting systems. For
information about the Filters screen, see “Searching Formatting Systems” on
page 245.
Figure 7.56: Formatting systems Screen
The Formatting systems screen displays the following information and is view-only:
• Name — The name of the formatting system.
• Type — The type of formatting system.
• Description — A description of the formatting system.
Searching Formatting Systems
To manage formatting system filters:
1. From the Formatting systems screen (Figure 7.56 on page 245), click Edit filters.
3 The Formatting systems > Filters screen displays (Figure 7.57 on page 246).

Device Management
Figure 7.57: Formatting systems > Filters Screen

8 DKB Management
Managing Devices Through a Search ........................................................................ 248

Searching Devices Using Quick Search ..................................................................... 248
Searching Devices by IMEI Range ............................................................................ 249
Managing Devices By IMEI Range ............................................................................ 249
Searching Devices by User Agent............................................................................. 252
Managing Devices by User Agent ............................................................................. 253
Searching Device Profiles........................................................................................ 255
Managing Device Profiles ........................................................................................ 256
Editing a Device Profile........................................................................................... 258
Searching Device Profile Capabilities ........................................................................ 277
Managing Device Profile Capabilities......................................................................... 278
Managing Trust Sources ......................................................................................... 282
Viewing Trust Sources ............................................................................................ 282
Editing a Trust Source ............................................................................................ 283
Creating a Trust Source .......................................................................................... 286
Deleting a Trust Source .......................................................................................... 287
Managing DKB Versions.......................................................................................... 287
Viewing DKB Versions ............................................................................................ 287
Searching DKB Versions ......................................................................................... 288
Editing a DKB Version ............................................................................................ 289
Deleting a Version ................................................................................................. 290
Managing DKB Archives.......................................................................................... 290
Managing DKB Synchronizations .............................................................................. 291
Viewing Synchronization Processes .......................................................................... 292
Searching Synchronization Processes ....................................................................... 293
Monitoring a Synchronization Process....................................................................... 293
Creating a Synchronization Process.......................................................................... 296
Managing Device and DKB Rights ............................................................................ 297
Granting Device and DKB Rights.............................................................................. 297
Revoking Device and DKB Rights ............................................................................. 298

DKB Management
The Device Knowledge Base (DKB) stores all device information (based on the license that
defines available device brands and features) when working with Content Manager. Updates
to the device repository are made by uploading files containing device information from the
DKB. This chapter describes device repository and DKB management using the Device
menu. For information about managing devices and features, see Chapter 7, “Device
Management” on page 170.
Managing Devices Through a Search
The Searches portion of the Devices menu allows you to conduct searches for devices by
Quick Search, IMEI ranges, user agents, device profile, or device profile capabilities.
Searching Devices Using Quick Search
Quick search allows you to search devices using several types of criteria.
To search using Quick search:
1. From the Devices menu, select Searches > Quick Search.

3 The Quick search screen displays.
Figure 8.1: Quick search Screen
2. Enter the criteria on which to base your search.
3. Click OK to search.
3 The Quick search screen displays a list of devices matching the search criteria.
4. From the list of displayed devices, click a device to modify.

3 The Edit device screen displays, allowing you to modify the device. For more

DKB Management
Searching Devices by IMEI Range
An International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) is a unique identification number typically

found on the back of cellular phone batteries. An IMEI range allows you to manage devices
within a defined range of serial numbers. You can directly manage IMEI ranges associated
with devices through the Device menu.
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of ranges specific to
that criteria.
To manage IMEI range filters:
1. From the Device menu, select Searches > IMEI Ranges screen.
3 The IMEI Ranges > Filters screen displays.
Figure 8.2: IMEI Ranges > Filters Screen
Managing Devices By IMEI Range
To manage devices by IMEI range:
1. From the IMEI Ranges > Filters screen, click Show table.
3 The IMEI Ranges screen displays (Figure 8.3 on page 250).

DKB Management
Figure 8.3: IMEI Ranges Screen
The IMEI Ranges screen displays the following information:

• TAC — The Type Approval Code. Consists of the first 6-8 digits of the IMEI number and
is used to identify a device.
• Brand — The device brand.
• Model — The commercial name of the device.
• Serial Begin — The beginning of the serial number range associated with the IMEI.
• Serial End — The end of the serial number range associated with the IMEI.
• Status — The status of the device: Active or Inactive.
• Added by — The first DKB version to include the IMEI range.
Using the IMEI Ranges Screen
The IMEI Ranges screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in
With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the IMEI Ranges screen, you can perform the
following tasks:
• From the Tac column, click a type approval code to edit the associated IMEI range.
The process for editing an IMEI range is the same as editing an IMEI range associated
with a selected device. For more information, see “Editing an IMEI Range” on
page 184.

DKB Management
• Click Delete to delete selected IMEI ranges. For more information, see “Deleting an
IMEI Range”.
• Click Activate to activate selected inactive IMEI ranges. For more information, see
“Activating an IMEI Range”.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate selected active IMEI ranges. For more information, see
“Deactivating an IMEI Range”.
Creating an IMEI Range
IMEI ranges are created when editing a device. For more information, see “Using the IMEI
Ranges Tab” on page 183.
Deleting an IMEI Range
To delete an IMEI range:
1. From the IMEI ranges screen (Figure 8.3 on page 250), check the box next to each IMEI
range to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all ranges.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected IMEI ranges?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also delete edited IMEI ranges by clicking Delete on the Edit IMEI screen
screen.
Activating an IMEI Range
To activate an IMEI range:
1. From the IMEI ranges screen (Figure 8.3 on page 250), check the box next to each
inactive IMEI range to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select
all inactive IMEI ranges.
2. Click Activate.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected IMEI ranges?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also activate edited IMEI ranges by clicking Activate on the Edit IMEI
range screen.

DKB Management
Deactivating an IMEI Range
To deactivate an IMEI range:
1. From the IMEI ranges screen (Figure 8.3 on page 250), check the box next to each
active IMEI range to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select
all active IMEI ranges.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected IMEI ranges?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also deactivate edited IMEI ranges by clicking Deactivate on the Edit
IMEI range screen.
Searching Devices by User Agent
User agent information is included in the http headers of a WAP page or the Multimedia
Messaging Services Center (MMS-C). This information is detected when a device accesses a
WAP page or the MMS-C. The correct device can be identified based on the user agent
profile.
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of user agents specific
to that criteria.
To manage user agent filters:
1. From the Device menu, select Searches > User agents.

3 The User agents > Filters screen displays.
Figure 8.4: User Agents > Filters Screen

DKB Management
Managing Devices by User Agent
1. From the User agents > Filters screen, click Show table.
3 The User agents screen displays.
Figure 8.5: User Agents Screen
The User agents screen displays the following information:

• User agent — The commercial name of the device. Click on a model name to modify
the user agents for the selected device.
• Brand — The device brand associated with the user agent.
• Device profile — The device profile associated with the user agent.
• Status — The user agent status. Status can include: Active (agent profile capabilities
are used) or Inactive (agent profile capabilities are not used).
• Resolved — Indicates whether the user agent is resolved: Yes or No.
• Added by — The first DKB version to include the user agent.

DKB Management
Using the User Agents Screen
The User agents screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in
With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the User agents screen, you can perform the
following tasks:
• From the User agent column, click a model to edit the user agents for the selected
model. The editing process is the same as when editing a user agent on a selected
device. For more information, see “Editing a User Agent” on page 187.
• Click Delete to delete selected user agents. For more information, see “Deleting a
User Agent” on page 254.
• Click Activate to activate selected inactive user agents. For more information, see
“Activating a User Agent” on page 255.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate selected active user agents. For more information, see
“Deactivating a User Agent” on page 255.
• In order to create a user agent, you must add it to a selected device. For more
Creating a User Agent
User agents are created when editing a device. For more information, see “Using the User
Agents Tab” on page 187.
Deleting a User Agent
To delete a user agent:
1. From the User agents screen (Figure 8.5 on page 253), check the box next to each user
agent to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all user agents.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected user agents?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited user agent by clicking Delete on the Edit user agent
screen.

DKB Management
Activating a User Agent
To activate a user agent:
1. From the User agents screen (Figure 8.5 on page 253), check the box next to each
inactive user agent to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select
all inactive user agents.
2. Click Activate.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected user agents?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also activate an edited user agent by clicking Activate on the Edit user
agent screen.
Deactivating a User Agent
To deactivate a user agent:
1. From the User agents screen (Figure 8.5 on page 253), check the box next to each
active user agent to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select
all active user agents.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected user agents?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also deactivate an edited user agent by clicking Deactivate on the Edit
user agent screen.
Searching Device Profiles
Device profiles can be inherited and passed down from profile to profile, allowing you to
further manage devices by reusing common device details, features, or capabilities.
1. From the Device menu, select Searches > Device profiles.

3 The Device profiles > Filters screen displays (Figure 8.6 on page 256).

DKB Management
Figure 8.6: Device profiles > Filters Screen
Managing Device Profiles
To manage device profiles:
From the Device profiles > Filters screen, click Show table.
3 The Device profiles screen displays (Figure 8.7 on page 257).

DKB Management
Figure 8.7: Device profiles Screen
The Device profiles screen displays the following information:

• Name — The name of the device profile.
• Model — The device model associated with the device profile.
• Resolved — Indicates whether the device profile is resolved: Yes or No.
• Status — The device profile status: Active or Inactive.
• Added by — The first DKB version to include the device profile.
Using the Device Profiles Screen
The Device profiles screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in
With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Device profiles screen, you can perform the
following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a device profile to modify. For more information, see
“Editing a Device Profile” on page 258.
• Click Delete to delete selected device profiles. For more information, see “Deleting a
Device Profile” on page 276.
• Click Activate to activate selected inactive device profiles. For more information, see
“Activating Device Profiles” on page 276.

DKB Management
• Click Deactivate to deactivate selected active device profiles. For more information,
see “Deactivating Device Profiles” on page 276.
Creating a Device Profile
Device profiles are created when editing a device. For more information, see “Creating a New
Editing a Device Profile
To edit a device profile:
1. From the Device profiles screen (Figure 8.7 on page 257), click a device profile from
the Name column to edit.
3 The Details tab on the Edit device profile screen displays.
Figure 8.8: Edit device profile Screen — Details Tab
From the Edit device profile screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click Delete to delete the edited device profile. For more information, see “Deleting a
• Click Edit associated model to view or modify the device model associated with the
device profile. For more information, see “Editing a Device” on page 180.
• Click Activate to activate the edited device profile. For more information, see
“Activating Device Profiles” on page 276.

DKB Management
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited device profile. For more information, see
“Deactivating Device Profiles” on page 276.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify general device profile information. For more
• Click the Capabilities tab to view or modify capabilities of the device profile. For more
information, see “Using the Capabilities Tab” on page 260.
• Click the Hardware tab to view or modify device profile hardware information. For
more information, see “Using the Hardware Tab” on page 263.
• Click the Hardware ext tab to view or modify device profile hardware extension
information. For more information, see “Using the Hardware Ext Tab” on page 264.
• Click the Software tab to view or modify device profile software information. For more
information, see “Using the Software Tab” on page 265.
• Click the Browser tab to view or modify device profile browser information. For more
information, see “Using the Browser Tab” on page 266.
• Click the Network tab to view or modify device profile network information. For more
information, see “Using the Network Tab” on page 268.
• Click the Wap tab to view or modify device profile WAP information. For more
information, see “Using the Wap Tab” on page 268.
• Click the Push tab to view or modify device profile Push information. For more
information, see “Using the Push Tab” on page 270.
• Click the MMS tab to view or modify device profile MMS information. For more
information, see “Using the MMS Tab” on page 271.
• Click the Settings tab to view or modify device profile settings. For more information,
see “Using the Settings Tab” on page 272.
• Click the SMS tab to view or modify device profile SMS information. For more
information, see “Using the SMS Tab” on page 273.
• Click the OMA DM CP tab to view or modify available OMA DM access lists of a device
for each configurable feature. For more information, see “Using the OMA DM CP Tab”
on page 275.
The Details tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.8 on page 258) allows you to
view or modify the following information:
• Status — The device profile status: Active or Inactive.
• Url — The URL address of the device profile.
• Name — The name of the device profile.
• Inherit — If the device profile inherits properties from another device profile, select
the other device profile from this list.

DKB Management
• Resolved — Indicates whether a detection set is associated with the profile: Yes or
No.
• Creation date — The date on which the device profile was created (cannot be
modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the device profile was last modified
Using the Capabilities Tab
The Capabilities tab on the Edit device profile screen allows you to view or modify device
profile capabilities.
Figure 8.9: Edit device profile Screen — Capabilities Tab
The Capabilities tab displays the following information:

• Feature — The feature name. Click a feature name to edit. For more information, see
“Editing a Capability” on page 261.
• Status — The feature status: Active or Inactive.
• Inherited — Indicates whether the device profile inherits properties from another
device profile: Yes or No.
• Added By — The DKB version to first include the feature.
• Creation Date — The date on which the device profile was created.
In addition to the functions available on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.8 on
page 258), from the Capabilities tab, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Feature column, click a feature to edit. For more information, see “Editing a
Capability” on page 261.
• Click New device profile capability to create a new feature. For more information,
see “Creating a Capability” on page 262.

DKB Management
• Click Delete device profile capability to delete selected device features. For more
information, see “Deleting a Capability” on page 262.
Editing a Capability
To edit a capability:
1. From the Capabilities tab on the Edit device profile screen, click New device profile
capability.
3 The Details tab on the Device profile capability screen displays.
Figure 8.10: Device profile capability Screen — Details Tab
From the Details tab on the Device profile capability screen, you can perform the
following tasks:
• Click Delete to delete the edited device profile capability. For more information, see
“Deleting a Capability” on page 262.
• Click Activate to activate the edited device profile capability. For more information,
see “Activating Device Profile Capabilities” on page 281.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited device profile capability. For more
information, see “Deactivating Device Profile Capabilities” on page 281.
• From the Formatting token list, select a different formatting token for the capability.
Click Submit to save changes.

DKB Management
Creating a Capability
To create a capability:
1. From the Capabilities tab on the Edit device profile screen, click New device profile
capability.
3 The New device profile capability screen displays.
Figure 8.11: New device profile capability Screen
2. From the Feature list, select a feature for the capability.
3. From the Trust source list, select the certified trust source for the capability.
4. From the DKB version list, select the first DKB version to include the capability.
5. Click Submit.
3 The device profile capability is created, and the Capabilities tab on the Edit device
profile screen displays.
Deleting a Capability
To delete a device profile capability:
1. From the Capabilities tab on the Edit device profile screen, check the box next to each
capability to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all
capabilities.
2. Click Delete device profile capability.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device profile
capabilities?” displays.

DKB Management
NOTE: You can also delete an edited device profile capability by clicking Delete on the
Edit device profile capability screen.
Using the Hardware Tab
The Hardware tab on the Edit device profile screen allows you to view or modify hardware
information for the device profile. This information comes from the Hardware component of
the corresponding user agent profile.
Figure 8.12: Edit device profile Screen — Hardware Tab
The Hardware tab allows you to modify the following information:
NOTE: For further detail regarding hardware information, see the descriptions documented
by the Open Mobile Alliance at the following web site:
http://www.openmobilealliance.org/tech/profiles/ccppschema-20030226.html
• Bits per pixel
• Keyboard
• CPU
• Vendor
• Model
• Number of soft keys

DKB Management
• Pointing resolution
• Pixel aspect ratio
• Screen size
• Screen size char
• Specify whether the hardware associated with the device profile includes the following
(Yes/No):
• Color capable
• Image capable
• Sound output capable
• Standard font proportional
• Text input capable
• Voice input capable
In addition, you can add a Bluetooth profile, input character set, or an output character set to
the hardware settings for the device profile.
To add one of these properties, click the next to the item to add, enter the required
information in the displayed field, then click Add. Added properties display on the right side
of the tab. To remove an item, click Remove next to the item to remove.
Using the Hardware Ext Tab
The Hardware ext tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.13 on page 264) allows
you to view or modify the additional hardware information for the device profile. This
information is provided by Mobile 365 to further detail the hardware characteristics of the
device.
Figure 8.13: The Edit device profile Screen — Hardware ext Tab

DKB Management
The Hardware ext tab allows you to view or modify the following information:
• Polyphonic channels — The number of polyphonic channels for the hardware
extension.
• Camera — Specify whether the hardware extension is a camera: Yes or No.
• Countries — Lists countries wehere the device is deployed.
• Radio stack — Lists radio protocols supported by the device.
Using the Software Tab
The Software tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.14 on page 265) allows you
to view or modify software run on devices associated with the device profile. This information
comes from the Software component of the corresponding user agent profile.
Figure 8.14: Edit device profile Screen — Software Tab

DKB Management
The Software tab allows you to view or modify the following information:
NOTE: For further detail regarding software information, see the descriptions documented
• Mexe specification
• OS name
• OS vendor
• OS version
• Recipient application agent
• Software number
• Specify whether the software for the device profile includes the following (Yes/No):
• Accept downloadable software
• Java enabled
• Mexe secure domains
In addition, you can the following to the software settings for the device profile:
Audio inputEncoder Email URL schemes

Common language infrastructure JVM version
platform Java package
CCPP accept Java platform
CCPP accept encoding Java protocol
CCPP accept language Mexe classmarks
Downloadable software support Video input encoder
Using the Browser Tab
The Browser tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.15 on page 267) allows you to
view or modify the WEB/WAP browser used by devices associated with the device profile.
This information comes from the BrowserUA component of the corresponding user agent
profile.

DKB Management
Figure 8.15: Edit device profile Screen — Browser Tab
The Browser tab allows you to view or modify the following information:
NOTE: For further detail regarding browser information, see the descriptions documented
• Browser name
• Browser version
• Html version
• JavaScript version
• XHTML version
• Specify whether the browser for the device profile includes the following (Yes/No):
• Frames capable
• Java applet enabled
• JavaScript enabled
• Preference for frames
• Tables capable
In addition, you can add downloadable browser applications and XHTML modules to the
browser settings for the device profile.

DKB Management
Using the Network Tab
The Network tab on the Edit device profile screen allows you to view or modify bearer
services (SMS, 3G, etc.) supported by devices associated with the device profile. This
information comes from the NetworkCharacteristics component of the corresponding user
agent profile.
Figure 8.16: Edit device profile Screen — Network Tab
The Network tab allows you to view or modify the following information:
NOTE: For further detail regarding network information, see the descriptions documented
• Current bearer service
• Supported bluetooth version
In addition, you can add security support or supported bearers information to the network
settings for the device profile.
Using the Wap Tab
The Wap tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.17 on page 269) allows you to
view or modify how the WAP protocol is supported in devices associated with the device
profile. This information comes from the WapCharacteristics component of the corresponding
user agent profile.

DKB Management
Figure 8.17: Edit device profile Screen — Wap Tab
The Wap tab allows you to view or modify the following information:
NOTE: For further detail regarding Wap information, see the descriptions documented by
the Open Mobile Alliance at the following web site:
• Wap device class
• WAP version
• WML deck size
• WTA version
• Specify whether the WAP includes a Oma download (Yes/No).
In addition, you can add the following information to the WAP settings for the device profile:
• Drm class
• Drm constraints
• Supported pictogramset
• WML script libraries
• WML script version
• WTAI libraries

DKB Management
Using the Push Tab
The Push tab on the Edit device profile screen allows you to view or modify WAP protocol
implementation details for the devices associated with the device profile. This information
comes from the PushCharacteristics component of the corresponding user agent profile.
Figure 8.18: Edit device profile Screen — Push Tab
The Push tab allows you to view or modify the following information:
NOTE: For further detail regarding Push information, see the descriptions documented by
• Max push request
• Message size
In addition, you can add the following information to the WAP settings for the device profile:
• Push accept
• Push accept application Id
• Push accept charset
• Push accept encoding
• Push accept language

DKB Management
Using the MMS Tab
The MMS tab on the Edit device profile screen allows you to view or modify MMS protocol
for the devices associated with the device profile. This information comes from the
MMSCharacteristics component of the corresponding user agent profile.
Figure 8.19: Edit device profile Screen — MMS Tab
The MMS tab allows you to view or modify the following information:
NOTE: For further detail regarding MMS information, see the descriptions documented by
• Max message size
• Max image resolution
• Specify whether the MMS includes the following (Yes/No):
• CCPP streaming capable
• Suppress content adaptation
In addition, you can add the following information to the MMS settings for the device profile:
• CCPP accept
• CCPP accept charset
• CCPP accept language
• CCPP accept encoding
• MMS version

DKB Management
• Smil baseset
• Content class
Using the Settings Tab
The Settings tab on the Edit device profile screen allows you to view or modify various
settings for devices associated with the device profile. This information is provided by Mobile
365 and describes a device’s behavior while receiving a setting.
Figure 8.20: Edit device profile Screen — Settings Tab
The Settings tab allows you to view or modify the following information:
• PIN size — Number of digit of the PIN code of the device (used to accept installation
of the setting in the device):
• 0 : The device uses no PIN Code
• 1 : PIN Code of the device contains 1 digit
• 4 : PIN Code of the device contains 4 digit
• OMA bootstrap connection included — Indicates whether the device accepts a OMA
DM Bootstrap that contains connection information.
• OMA bootstrap notification included — Indicates if the device accepts a OMA DM
Bootstrap which contains the notification (an event that signals the device to launch an
OMA DM session).
• PIN enabled features — Define features that can be installed on the device after the
correct PIN is entered.

DKB Management
• IMSI enabled features — Define features that can be installed on the device after
the correct IMSI code from the device‘s SIM card is validated.
• WAP 2.0 enabled features — Define features that can be used with the protocol
WAP 2.0. All available features not contained in this list must automatically be used
with old protocol WAP 1.2.
• Manual activation features — Define features that can be installed on the device
without using any type of authentication process.
Using the SMS Tab
The SMS tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.21 on page 274) allows you to
view or modify details about different SMS content types supported by devices associated
with the device profile. This information is provided by Mobile 365 and defines the logo size a
device can accept.

DKB Management
Figure 8.21: Edit device profile Screen — SMS Tab
The SMS tab allows you to view or modify the following information:
• Specify whether the device includes the following (Yes/No):
• EMS R4 support
• EMS R5 support

DKB Management
In addition, you can add the following information to the SMS settings for the device profile:
Logo black and white 16x16 Logo black and white 48x21
Logo black and white less than 101x29 Logo black and white 120x8
Logo black and white less than 101x46 Logo black and white 128x8
Logo black and white less than 101x50 Animation black and white 16x16x4
Logo black and white less than 101x64 Animation black and white 32x32x4
Logo grey scale less than 96x65 Logo black and white less than 96x65
Logo 64 colors less than 96x64 Logo black and white less than 96x29
Logo black and white 8x24 Logo black and white less than 96x46
Logo black and white 40x25
Using the OMA DM CP Tab
The OMA DM CP tab on the Edit device profile screen (Figure 8.21 on page 274) allows
you to view or modify details about different SMS content types supported by devices
associated with the device profile. This information is provided by Mobile 365 and defines
available OMA DM access lists (the rights around actions on OMA DM Tree Nodes) on a device
for each configurable feature.
Figure 8.22: Edit Device profile Screen — OMA DM CP Tab
The OMA DM CP tab allows you to perform the following tasks:

• Read — Define features that can be read (those which have settings that exist on the
OMA DM Tree Node for the device).
• Create — Define features on which a new setting can be created by OMA DM protocol.
In this case, new nodes are created on the OMA DM Tree for the device.

DKB Management
• Update — Define features that can be updated (those which have settings that exist
on the OMA DM Tree Node for the device).
• Delete — Define features that can be deleted (those which have settings that exist on
the OMA DM Tree Node of the device). In this case, existing nodes can be removed
from the OMA DM Tree for the device.
Deleting a Device Profile
To delete a device profile:
1. From the Device profiles screen (Figure 8.7 on page 257), check the box next to each
device profile to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all device
profiles.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device profiles?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited device profile by clicking Delete on the Edit device
profile screen.
Activating Device Profiles
To activate device profiles:
inactive device profile to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select
all inactive device profiles.
2. Click Activate.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected device profiles?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also activate an edited device profile by clicking Activate on the Edit
device profile screen.
Deactivating Device Profiles
To deactivate device profiles:
active device profile to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly
select all active device profiles.

DKB Management
profiles?” displays.
NOTE: You can also deactivate an edited device profile by clicking Deactivate on the Edit
device profile screen.
Searching Device Profile Capabilities
Device profile capabilities define the features associated with a device profile.
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of device profile
capabilities specific to that criteria.
To manage device profile capability filters:
1. From the Device menu, select Searches > Device profile capabilities.
3 The Device profile capabilities > Filters screen displays.
Figure 8.23: Device profile capability > Filters Screen

DKB Management
Managing Device Profile Capabilities
To view a list of device profile capabilities:
1. From the Device profile capabilities > Filters screen, click Show table.
3 The Device profile capabilities screen displays a list of device profile capabilities.
Figure 8.24: Device profile capabilities Screen
The Device profile capabilities screen displays the following information:

• Device profile — The name of the device profile. Click the corresponding Edit to
modify. For more information, see “Editing a Device Profile Capability” on page 279.
• Feature — The feature associated with the device profile.
• Status — The status of the device capability type: Active, Inactive, or Deprecated.
• Added by — The first Handset Manager version from which the device profile was
added.

DKB Management
Using the Device Profile Capabilities Screen
The Device profile capabilities screen provides the same basic functionality as other list
and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Device profile capabilities
• Click Edit next to a device profile capability to edit. For more information, see “Editing
a Device Profile Capability” on page 279.
• Click Delete to delete selected device applications. For more information, see
“Deleting a Device Profile Capability” on page 280.
• Click Activate to activate selected device applications. For more information, see
“Activating Device Profile Capabilities” on page 281.
• Click Deactivate to activate selected device applications. For more information, see
“Deactivating Device Profile Capabilities” on page 281.
Editing a Device Profile Capability
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights to modify a device profile capability. For more
information about these rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on
page 17.
To edit a device profile capability:
1. From the Device profile capabilities screen (Figure 8.24 on page 278), click Edit next
to the name of a capability to modify.
3 The Details tab on the Device profile capability screen displays.
Figure 8.25: Device profile capability Screen — Details Tab

DKB Management
The Device profile capability screen displays the following information:

• Status — Indicates whether the device profile capability is active, inactive or
deprecated (cannot be modified).
• Device profile — The name of the device profile (cannot be modified).
• Feature — The name of the feature (cannot be modified).
• Device profile capability handler — Indicates which (if any) handler created the
capability. These handlers are responsible for automatically creating a capability
according to specific information contained within device profile components (cannot
be modified).
• Formatting token — Specifies the formatting token used by Handset Manager to find
the right algorithm in order to format a content to the device destination.
• DKB version — The first DKB version to include the capability (cannot be modified).
• Creation date — The date on which the device profile capability was created (cannot
be modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the device profile capability was last
modified (updated automatically).
2. Click Submit to save changes.
The Device profile capability screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Delete to delete the edited capability. For more information, see “Deleting a
Device Profile Capability” on page 280.
• Click Activate to activate the edited capability. For more information, see “Activating
Device Profile Capabilities” on page 281.
• Click Deactivate to deactivate the edited capability. For more information, see
“Deactivating Device Profile Capabilities” on page 281.
Creating a Device Profile Capability
To create a device profile capability, you must first edit the device profile to which the
capability corresponds. From there, you can create a device profile capability on the
Capabilities tab of the Edit Device profile screen. For more information, see “Editing a
Deleting a Device Profile Capability
To delete a device profile capability:
1. From the Device profile capability screen (Figure 8.23 on page 277), check the box
next to each capability to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select
all capabilities.

DKB Management
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected device profile
NOTE: You can also delete an edited capability by clicking Delete on the Device profile
capability screen.
Activating Device Profile Capabilities
To activate device profile capabilities:
1. From the Device profile capabilities screen (Figure 8.24 on page 278), check the box
next to each inactive capability to activate. Check the box at the top of the column to
quickly select all capabilities.
2. Click Activate.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to activate selected device profile
NOTE: You can also activate edited capabilities by clicking Activate on the Device profile
capabilities screen.
Deactivating Device Profile Capabilities
To deactivate device profile capabilities:
1. From the Device profile capabilities screen (Figure 8.24 on page 278), check the box
next to each active capability to deactivate. Check the box at the top of the column to
quickly select all active capabilities.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to deactivate selected device profile
NOTE: You can also deactivate edited capabilities by clicking Deactivate on the Device
profile capability screen.

DKB Management
Managing Trust Sources
A trust source is a certified source for all device information stored within a Device
Knowledge Database (DKB).
Viewing Trust Sources
To view a list of trust sources:
1. From the Device menu, select Knowledge database > Trust sources.
3 The Trust sources screen displays.
Figure 8.26: Trust sources Screen
The Trust sources screen displays the following information:

• Name — The name of the trust source. Click a name to edit. For more information,
see “Editing a Trust Source” on page 283.
• Private key — Private keys are created in order to securely allow you to modify
information.
• Creation date — The date on which the trust source was created.
Using the Trust Sources Screen
From the Trust sources screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a name to edit a trust source. For more information, see
“Editing a Trust Source” on page 283.
• Click New trust source to create a new trust source. For more information, see
“Creating a Trust Source” on page 286.
• Click Delete to delete selected trust sources. For more information, see “Deleting a
Trust Source” on page 287.

DKB Management
Editing a Trust Source
To edit a trust source:
1. From the Trust sources screen (Figure 8.26 on page 282), click the name of a trust
source to modify.
3 The Details tab on the Edit trust source screen displays.
Figure 8.27: Edit trust source Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Trust Source Screen
The Edit device application version screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New trust source to create a new trust source. For more information, see
“Creating a Trust Source” on page 286.
• Click Delete to delete the edited device application version. For more information, see
“Deleting a Trust Source” on page 287.
• Click the Details tab to view general trust source information. Information on the
Details tab is view-only.
• Click the Versions tab to modify the versions associated with the trust source. For
more information, see “Using the Versions Tab”.
Using the Versions Tab
The Versions tab on the Edit trust source screen (Figure 8.28 on page 284) allows you to
view a list of versions associated with the trust source.

DKB Management
Figure 8.28: Edit trust source Screen — Versions Tab
In addition to the functions available on the Edit trust source screen, the Versions tab
allows you to perform the following tasks:
• From the Version column, click a version name to edit. The editing process is the
same as when editing a version after a search. For more information, see “Editing a
DKB Version” on page 289.
• Click New version to create a new version for the trust source. For more information,
see “Creating a Version” on page 285.
• Click Delete version to delete selected versions from the trust source. For more
information, see “Deleting a Version” on page 285.
• Click the up or down arrows next to versions to prioritize. The topmost version takes
priority.

DKB Management
Creating a Version
To create a version:
1. From the Versions tab on the Edit trust source screen, click New version.
3 The New version screen displays.
Figure 8.29: New version Screen
2. In the Version field, enter the name of the new trust source version.
3. From the Status list, select the version status: Client, Draft, or Released.
4. In the Comment field, type a short comment about the version (optional).
5. Click Submit.
3 The version is created, and the Versions tab on the Edit trust source screen
Deleting a Version
To delete a version:
1. From the Versions tab on the Edit trust source screen (Figure 8.28 on page 284),
check the box next to each version to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to
quickly select all versions.
2. Click Delete version.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected DKB versions?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited version by clicking Delete on the Edit version
screen.

DKB Management
Creating a Trust Source
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to modify trust source information.
For more information about these rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base
To create a trust source:
1. From the Trust sources screen (Figure 8.26 on page 282), click New trust source.
3 The New trust source screen displays.
NOTE: The New trust source function is also available when editing a trust source. For
more information, see “Editing a Trust Source” on page 283.
Figure 8.30: New trust source Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the trust source.
3. In the Certification key field, enter the full path and filename to the keystore file for the
trust source. Click Browse to search for the file.
4. In the File password field, enter the password required to open the keystore file.
5. In the Private key alias in keystore field, enter the private key alias for the keystore
file.
6. In the Password field, enter a password for the trust source.
7. Click Submit.
3 The trust source is created, and the Trust sources screen displays (Figure 8.26 on
page 282).

DKB Management
Deleting a Trust Source
To delete a trust source:
1. From the Trust sources screen (Figure 8.26 on page 282), check the box next to each
trust source to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all trust
sources.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected trust sources?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited trust source by clicking Delete on the Edit trust
source screen.
Managing DKB Versions
You can manage all DKB versions through Content Manager.
NOTE: To create a version, you must edit the trust source for which the version is created.
For more information, see “Editing a Trust Source” on page 283.
Viewing DKB Versions
To view a list of DKB versions:
1. From the Devices menu, select Knowledge base > Versions.

3 The Versions > Filters screen displays.

3 The Versions screen displays (Figure 8.31 on page 288). For information about the
Filters screen, see “Searching DKB Versions” on page 288.

DKB Management
Figure 8.31: Versions Screen
The Versions screen allows you to perform the following tasks:

• From the Version column, click a version name to edit. For more information, see
“Editing a DKB Version” on page 289.
• From the Trust source column, click a trust source name to edit. For more
information, see “Editing a Trust Source” on page 283.
• Click Delete version to delete selected versions. For more information, see “Deleting
a Version” on page 285.
Searching DKB Versions
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of versions specific to
that criteria.
To manage version filters:
1. From the Versions screen (Figure 8.31 on page 288), click Edit filters.
3 The Versions > Filters screen displays (Figure 8.32 on page 289).

DKB Management
Figure 8.32: Versions > Filters Screen
Editing a DKB Version
To edit a DKB version:
1. From the Versions screen (Figure 8.31 on page 288), click the name of a version from
the Version column to edit.
3 The Edit version screen displays.
Figure 8.33: Edit version Screen
2. Modify the following version details as necessary:

• Version — The name of the version.
• Status — The status of the version: Client, Draft, or Released.

DKB Management
• Trust source — The name of the trust source with which the version is associated
(cannot be modified).
• Comment — A short comment about the version (optional).
• Creation date — The date on which the version was created (cannot be modified).
• Last modification date — The date on which the version was last modified (updated
automatically).
Deleting a Version
To delete a version:
1. From the Versions screen (Figure 8.31 on page 288), check the box next to each version
to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all versions.
2. Click Delete version.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected DKB versions?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited version by clicking Delete on the Edit version
screen.
Managing DKB Archives
Content Manager allows you to view, generate, and download DKB archives. DKB archive
generation is possible only on platforms that have at least one master trust source. There are
several types of archives:
• Complete — The archive contains all data associated to a selected release-type
version. This version is called “the referenced version”. Versions are numbered in order
with all other previous release-type versions of the same trust source.
• Complete client — In addition to the complete archive data, the complete client
archive contains data associated to specific client-type versions dedicated to a client.
• Partial — The archive contains data only associated to the specific release or client-
type version. These archives contain only new data added since the last previous
archive.
• Mobile 365 token — Partial archive containing only new brands, new models or/and
new features.

DKB Management
To manage DKB archives:
1. From the Device menu, select Knowledge base > Archives.

3 The Archives screen displays.
2. If there are archive files present:

• Click Download to download the corresponding archive file.
• Click Remove from repository to remove the corresponding archive file.
Generating an Archive
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights to generate a DKB archive. For more
information about these rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on
page 17.
To generate a DKB archive:
1. Click Generate archive.

3 The Archives > Export screen displays.
2. In the Archive name field, enter a name for the archive.
3. Select the type of archive to generate: Complete, Complete Client, or Partial.
4. From the Trust source list, select the certified source for the archive.
5. From the DKB Version list, select the first DKB version to include the archive.
6. Click Generate archive.
Managing DKB Synchronizations
Synchronization processes allow you to automatically synchronize a DKB with the latest
version. During a process, data is imported from a DKB archive into a platform database.
This data then provides a historical record of the imported DKB archive. The synchronization
process occurs in two steps:
1. Notification generation: All data coming from the archive is verified using data coming
from the database. In turn, Create, Delete, or Update notifications are generated
according to the state of the database and the imported archive.
NOTE: While notifications are being generated, the process status displays as Building.
NOTE: During the transition between steps 1 and 2, the process status displays as
Pending.

DKB Management
2. Accept or refuse notifications: After all notifications are generated, there are two
additional notifications possible:
• Accept notifications: All Create, Delete, or Update notifications that take place within
the database are marked Accepted.
• Refuse notifications: All Create, Delete, or Update notifications that do not take place
within the database are marked Refused.
NOTE: When the process has finished, the process status displays as Done. If an error or a
stop action by an administrator has occurred, the process status displays as
Aborted.
Viewing Synchronization Processes
To view current processes:
1. From the Device menu, select Knowledge base > Synchronizations.

3 The Synchronizations > Filters screen displays.

3 The Synchronizations screen displays a list of current processes.
NOTE: Content Manager displays a list of Pending processes by default. To change the
search criteria for synchronizations, see “Searching Synchronization Processes” on
page 293.
Figure 8.34: Synchronizations Screen
The Synchronizations screen displays the following information:

• Status — The status of the process. For a description of each status, see “Managing
DKB Synchronizations” on page 291.
• Type — The type of archive. For a description of each type, see “Managing DKB
Archives” on page 290.
• Trust source — The trust source associated with the archive.

DKB Management
• Archive — The DKB archive path and filename.

• Creation date — The date on which the process was created.
Using the Synchronizations Screen
The Synchronizations screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in
With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Synchronizations screen, you can perform the
following tasks:
• Click Edit to monitor the corresponding process. For more information, see
“Monitoring a Synchronization Process” on page 293.
• Click New process to create a new process. For more information, see “Creating a
Synchronization Process” on page 296.
Searching Synchronization Processes
To search processes:
1. From the Synchronizations screen, click Edit filters.

3 The Synchronizations > Filters screen displays.
Figure 8.35: Synchronizations > Filters Screen
Monitoring a Synchronization Process
To monitor a synchronization process:
1. From the Synchronizations screen, click Edit next to a process to monitor.

3 The Synchronizations > Edit process screen displays (Figure 8.36 on page 294).

DKB Management
Figure 8.36: Synchronizations > Edit process Screen (1 of 2)
The Synchronizations > Edit process screen provides the following information:
• Type — The type of archive. For a description of each archive type, see “Managing
DKB Synchronizations” on page 291.
• Status — The current status of the process. For a description of each process status,
see “Managing DKB Synchronizations” on page 291.
NOTE: If the process status is Pending and you have the appropriate rights, you may also
be able to perform the following tasks:
• Click Refresh to view the most current process status.
• Click Stop process to stop the process. Once a pending process is stopped,
you may be able to, with the appropriate rights, accept or refuse notifications
manually. For more information, see “Managing Process Notifications” on
page 295.
NOTE: If the process status is Done, everything on the Synchronizations > Edit
process screen is view-only.
• Archive — The path to the DKB archive.
• Synchronization process state — A detailed description of a process status.
• Trust source — The name of the trust source used in the process.
• Versions — Versions of the DKB to be synchronized.
• Creation date — The date on which the synchronization process was created.
• Last modification date — The date on which the synchronization was last modified.

DKB Management
Managing Process Notifications
All data coming from the archive is verified using data coming from the database. In turn,
Created, Deleted, or Updated notifications are generated according to the state of the
database and the imported archive.
After all Created, Deleted, or Updated notifications are generated, two additional notifications
are assigned, determining the actions taken to the database:
• Accept notifications: All Created, Deleted, or Updated notifications that take place
within the database are marked Accepted.
• Refuse notifications: All Created, Deleted, or Updated notifications that do not take
place within the database are marked Refused.
NOTE: With the appropriate rights, you can elect to accept all or refuse all notifications
during a process. For more information about these rights, see “Device and Device
To accept or refuse all notifications for a process:
1. From the Synchonization process screen (Figure 8.34 on page 292), click Edit next to
a process for which to manage process notifications.
3 The Synchronizations > Edit process screen displays (Figure 8.36 on page 294).
NOTE: In order to accept or refuse the notifications for a process, the process you edit
must have a Pending status.
2. From the Synchronizations > Edit process screen, click Stop process.
3 The Synchronizations > Edit process screen refreshes and displays a list of all
process notifications (Figure 8.37 on page 296).

DKB Management
Figure 8.37: Synchronizations > Edit process Screen (2 of 2)
3. To accept all notifications and make the listed changes to the database, click Accept all
notifications. To refuse all notifications and leave the database unchanged, click Refuse
all notifications.
Creating a Synchronization Process
To create a synchronization process:
1. From the Synchronizations or Synchronizations > Edit process screens, click New
process.
3 The Create process screen displays (Figure 8.38 on page 297).

DKB Management
Figure 8.38: Create process Screen
2. In the Reference archive field, enter the path and filename to the archive file to access
during the process. Click Browse to search for the archive file.
3. Click Submit.
Managing Device and DKB Rights
The Global rights screen allows you to manage rights affecting all devices and data in the
Device Knowledge Database.
NOTE: You must have the appropriate rights in order to manage these rights. You may also
manage only those rights already granted to you. For more information about these
rights, see “Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
Granting Device and DKB Rights
To grant rights:
1. From the Device menu, Select Rights > Rights.

3 The Rights screen displays (Figure 8.39 on page 298).

DKB Management
Figure 8.39: Rights Screen
2. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a complete description of each right, see
“Device and Device Knowledge Base Rights” on page 17.
3. From the Groups list, select the groups that will benefit from selected rights. Press and
4. Click Add right.

3 The rights and their associated groups are displayed on the right side of the screen.
Revoking Device and DKB Rights
To remove device and DKB rights:
1. Click the next to each granted right to revoke.

9 Delivery Management
Managing Categories ............................................................................................. 300

Viewing Categories ................................................................................................ 300
Searching Categories ............................................................................................. 302
Creating a New Category........................................................................................ 302
Editing a Category ................................................................................................. 304
Deleting a Category ............................................................................................... 309
Managing Offers .................................................................................................... 310
Viewing Offers ...................................................................................................... 310
Searching Offers ................................................................................................... 312
Creating a New Offer ............................................................................................. 312
Editing an Offer..................................................................................................... 314
Managing Global Offer Rights .................................................................................. 334
Managing Download Codes ..................................................................................... 335
Deleting an Offer................................................................................................... 336
Managing Bundles ................................................................................................. 337
Viewing Bundles .................................................................................................... 337
Searching Bundles ................................................................................................. 339
Creating a Bundle.................................................................................................. 339
Editing a Bundle .................................................................................................... 341
Deleting a Bundle .................................................................................................. 355
Downloading a Bundle............................................................................................ 355
Creating a Bundle Bulk Process ............................................................................... 357
Viewing Popular Downloads .................................................................................... 362
Managing Triggers ................................................................................................. 363
Searching Triggers................................................................................................. 364
Managing Subscriptions.......................................................................................... 365
Editing or Deleting a Subscription ............................................................................ 366
Editing or Deleting a Subscription ............................................................................ 366
Managing Back-Office Catalog Rights........................................................................ 367
Managing Content Topics ........................................................................................ 368
Viewing Topics ...................................................................................................... 368
Searching Topics ................................................................................................... 370
Creating a New Topic ............................................................................................. 370
Editing a Topic ...................................................................................................... 372
Deleting a Topic .................................................................................................... 377
Managing Topic Rights............................................................................................ 377
Publishing Topics ................................................................................................... 379
Managing Content Systems..................................................................................... 381
Viewing Content Systems ....................................................................................... 381
Searching Content Systems .................................................................................... 382
Creating a New Content System .............................................................................. 382
Editing a Content System ....................................................................................... 384
Deleting a Content System ..................................................................................... 385

Delivery Management
This chapter describes the Catalog and Content portions of the Delivery menu, which allow
you to manage all elements used in the delivery service logic and delivery content. For
additional information about the System management and Tracking portions of the
Delivery menu, see “System Configuration” on page 386.
Managing Categories
Categories allow you to organize downloaded items and present them on a user’s Content
Manager interface, providing users with a method of navigation through which to browse
offers. Categories are associated to offers and bundles, and can differ between services.
NOTE: One category is always associated to a parent front-office service.
Dynamic categories are associated to bundles using dynamic information provided when
creating or editing a category. When the scheduled association time is reached, all bundles
that were previously associated to the category are disassociated, allowing new bundles to
become associated with the category. For more information about dynamic category
information, see “Editing a Category” on page 304.
NOTE: To associate a category with a bundle, you must first edit the bundle to which the
category is to be associated. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle” on
page 341.
Viewing Categories
To view categories:
1. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Categories.

3 The Categories > Filters screen displays. For information about the Filters screen,
see “Searching Categories” on page 302.
2. Click Show table to view a list of all categories.

• The Categories screen displays (Figure 9.1 on page 301). Categories are listed by
each service on the end-user interface.

Delivery Management
Figure 9.1: Categories Screen
The Categories screen displays the following information:

• Full name — The full name of the category. Click a category name to view or modify
the category. For more information, see “Editing a Category” on page 304.
• Type — The category type.
• Description — A short description of the category (if available).
• End user service — The front-office service associated with the category.
Using the Categories Screen
The Categories screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content
Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Categories screen, you can perform the following
tasks:
• From the Full name column, click a category to edit. For more information, see
• Click Delete category to remove all selected categories. For more information, see
“Deleting a Category” on page 309.

Delivery Management
Searching Categories
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of categories specific to
that criteria.
To manage category filters:
1. From the Categories screen (Figure 9.1 on page 301), click Edit filters.
Figure 9.2: Categories > Filters Screen
Creating a New Category
To create a new category:
1. From the Categories screen (Figure 9.1 on page 301), click New category.
NOTE: The New category function is also available when searching for or editing a
category. For more information, see “Searching Categories” on page 302 and
3 The Create category screen displays (Figure 9.3 on page 303).

Delivery Management
Figure 9.3: Create category Screen
2. From the End-user service list, select a front-office service with which to associate the
category. The category is then accessible through only the service selected here.
3. From the Parent category list, select a parent category (if applicable).
4. In the Name field, enter a name for the category. Two categories can have the same
name as long as they have two different parent categories.
5. From the Type list, select the type of category to create: keyword, default, or
headline.
6. In the Description field, enter a short description for the category (optional).
7. Check the Dynamic box to apply dynamic-related data to the category. If checked, this
category is to be scheduled for dynamic association with one or more bundles. If not
checked, you must edit bundles individually in order to associate the category. For more
information, see “Editing a Bundle” on page 341.
• If the category is dynamic, define the maximum number of delivery bundles and
timeslots for the dynamic category in the Delivery bundles max count field.

Delivery Management
• Set a schedule for the dynamic category. Check the “repetitive” option if you wish to
repeat the schedule several times; otherwise, the category is associated only once.
For example:
To associate this category each day at 8 AM, from the Hour list, select “08”, from the
Minute list, select “00”, and make sure that the Repetitive box is checked.
To associate this category on the first day of the month only when the first day is a
Monday, from the Day of the month list, select “1” and from the Day of the week
list, select “Monday”.
8. Click Submit.
3 The Edit category screen displays (Figure 9.4), allowing you to view or modify the
new category.
Editing a Category
To modify a category:
1. From the List categories screen (Figure 9.1 on page 301), click the name of a category
to modify.
NOTE: The Edit category screen also displays immediately after creating a new category.
3 The Details tab on the Edit category screen displays.
Figure 9.4: Edit category Screen — Details Tab
From the Edit category screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New category to create a category. For more information, see “Creating a New

Delivery Management
• Click Delete to delete the edited category. For more information, see “Deleting a
• Click the Details tab to view or modify general category details. For more information,
see “Using the Details Tab” on page 305.
• Click the Data for dynamic category tab to view or modify dynamic data applied to
the category. For more information, see “Using the Data For Dynamic Category Tab” on
page 305.
• Click the MetaData tab to view or modify metadata information associated with the
category. For more information, see “Using the MetaData Tab” on page 307.
The Details tab on the Edit category screen allows you to view or modify a category’s
general information, such as the parent category, category name, or description as
necessary. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the Data For Dynamic Category Tab
NOTE: The Data for dynamic category tab applies only when the Dynamic check box is
checked.
The Data for dynamic category tab on the Edit category screen (Figure 9.5 on page 306)
allows you to view or modify any dynamic data specified for the category.

Delivery Management
Figure 9.5: Edit category Screen — Data for dynamic category Tab
The Data for dynamic category tab allows you to modify the following information:
• Dynamic — Check the box to dynamically associate the category with one or more
bundles.
NOTE: The Data for dynamic category tab does not apply to non-dynamic
categories. If the category is to be non-dynamic, skip this section. For
information about associating non-dynamic categories with bundles, see
“Editing a Bundle” on page 341.
• Delivery bundle max count — Specify the maximum number of delivery bundles for
the dynamic category.

Delivery Management
• Repetitive — Check the box to repeat the dynamic association schedule. If the box is
unchecked, the assocation will occur only once.
• Specify the times and dates on which the dynamic association is to occur.
For example:
To associate this category each day at 8 AM, from the Hour list, select “08”, from the
Minute list, select “00”, and make sure that the Repetitive box is checked.
To associate this category on the first day of the month only when the first day is a
Monday, from the Day of the month list, select “1” and from the Day of the week
list, select “Monday”, and make sure that the Repetitive box is checked.
• Bundle offer — The category is dynamically associated with bundles belonging to the
offer selected here (optional).
• Bundle categories — The category is dynamically associated with bundles associated
with the categories selected here (optional). Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple
bundle categories.
• Bundle reference date order — The category is dynamically associated with bundles
having reference dates that meet the criteria specified here (optional).
If a bundle reference date order was specified, define the bundle dates to include.
Check the Disable boxes to include all reference dates.
• Popularity type — The category is dynamically associated with bundles having a
popularity type selected here (optional).
Using the MetaData Tab
The MetaData tab on the Edit category screen allows you to view any metadata associated
with the edited category. You can search for metadata by language and type.
Figure 9.6: Edit category Screen — MetaData Tab
In addition to searching metadata by language and type, the MetaData tab allows you to
• Click New meta data to create metadata for the category. For more information, see
“Creating Metadata” below.

Delivery Management
• If metadata exists for the category, a list displays. Click a metadata type to view or
modify. For more information, see “Editing Metadata” on page 309.
• Click Delete meta data to delete selected metadata from the category. For more
information, see “Deleting Metadata” on page 309.
Creating Metadata
To create metadata:
1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit category screen, click New meta data.
3 The Create meta data screen displays.
Figure 9.7: Create meta data Screen
2. From the Type list, select the type of metadata to create.

3 The Create meta data screen refreshes and displays fields specific to the type
selected.
• textdescription — A metadata type made up of a text message. When selected,
fields display prompting you to select a preferred language and enter a text
description for the metadata.
• picture_description — A metadata type that includes a picture file. When
selected, fields display prompting you to select a preferred language, enter a text
description, and locate the picture file to include in the metadata.
• name — A metadata type that includes a name. When selected, fields display
prompting you to select a preferred language and enter a name for the metadata.

Delivery Management
Editing Metadata
To view or modify existing metadata:
1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit category screen, click a metadata type to edit.
3 The Edit metadata screen displays.
NOTE: Metadata information that can be updated depends on the metadata type selected
from the MetaData tab. For more information on metadata types, see “Creating
Metadata” on page 308.
2. Make changes as necessary, and click Submit when finished.
Deleting Metadata
To delete metadata:
1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit category screen (Figure 9.6 on page 307), check
the box next to one or more listed metadata to delete. Check the box at the top of the
column to quickly select all listed metadata.
2. Click Delete meta data.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected category meta
data?” displays.
Deleting a Category
NOTE: Deleting a category will not delete associated bundles.
To delete a category:
1. From the Categories screen (Figure 9.1 on page 301), check the box next to one or
more categories to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all
categories.
2. Click Delete category.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected categories?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also delete edited categories by clicking Delete category on the Edit
category screen.

Delivery Management
Managing Offers
Offers are packages of items that can be downloaded by users that are associated to
authorized groups and compatible devices. Offers are composed of the following:
• Bundles — The actual items that can be ordered by users. Each bundle defines the
content to be downloaded (through Topics), the method by which they are formatted
(using patterns), and which delivery scenario is to be used (through Session
sequences).
• Triggers — Define when bundles should be delivered.
Viewing Offers
To view all authorized offers and their associated bundles:
1. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Offers.

3 The Offers > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of all offers. For information about the Filters screen, see
“Searching Offers” on page 312.
Figure 9.8: Offers Screen

Delivery Management
The Offers screen displays the following information:

• Name — The name of the offer. Click an offer name to view or modify the offer. For
more information, see “Editing an Offer” on page 314.
• Description — A short description of the offer (if available).
• Application Id — The application ID used to deliver contents from the offer.
• End-user service — The front-office service associated with the offer.
• Status — The status of the offer. Values include Published (can be downloaded), Not
Validated or Draft (cannot be downloaded), and Deprecated (the offer was
Published, but has since been deleted).
• Technical — Indicates whether or not the offer is technical. A technical offer is an
internal offer, and is linked only to technical bundles. Technical offers and bundles are
used for things such as passwords, activation codes, credit notifications, or any other
kind of “dynamic” content based upon a user’s profile. Technical offers are not
accessible from storefronts. For more information about technical bundles, see
“Viewing Bundles” on page 337.
Using the Offers Screen
The Offers screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content
Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Offers screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click an offer to edit. For more information, see “Editing an
Offer” on page 314.
• Click New offer to create a new offer. For more information, see “Creating a New
• Click Delete offer to remove all selected offers. For more information, see “Deleting
an Offer” on page 336.
• Click Global end-users rights to manage users rights affecting all offers. For more
information, see “Managing Global Offer Rights” on page 334.
• Click Manage download codes to export default SMS download codes associated
with one or several offers. For more information, see “Managing Download Codes” on
page 335.

Delivery Management
Searching Offers
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of offers specific to that
criteria.
To manage offer filters:
1. From the Offers screen (Figure 9.8 on page 310), click Edit filters.
3 The Offers > Filters screen displays.
Figure 9.9: Offers > Filters Screen
Creating a New Offer
To create a new offer:
1. From the Offers screen (Figure 9.8 on page 310), click New offer.
3 The Create offer screen displays (Figure 9.10 on page 313).
NOTE: The New offer function is also available when searching for or editing an offer. For
more information, see “Searching Offers” on page 312 and “Editing an Offer” on
page 314.

Delivery Management
Figure 9.10: Create offer Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the offer. No two offers can have the same
name.
3. In the Description field, enter a short description for the offer (optional).
4. From the End-user service list, select front-office service with which to associate the
offer. Only authorized group users of the selected this service will be able to access the
offer.
5. From the Application ID list, select an ID used to deliver messages. Available IDs are
retrieved from messaging credentials associated to the selected front-office service.
6. From the Status list, select a status for the offer. Values include Draft or Not Validated.
NOTE: Offers can be published only if they contain at least one published bundle.
7. Check the Technical box to indicate whether the offer is technical.

3 The Details tab on the Edit offer screen displays, allowing you to modify the new
offer.

Delivery Management
Editing an Offer
To edit a offer:
1. From the Offers screen (Figure 9.8 on page 310), click the name of an offer to modify.
3 The Details tab on the Edit offer screen displays.
NOTE: The Edit offer screen also displays immediately after creating a new offer.
Figure 9.11: Edit offer Screen — Details Tab
Using the Edit Offer Screen
From the Edit offer screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New offer to create a new offer. For more information about creating an offer,
see “Creating a New Offer” on page 312.
• Click Delete to remove the edited offer. For more information about deleting offers,
see “Deleting an Offer” on page 336.
• Click Manage download codes to export SMS download codes for the edited offer.
For more information, see “Managing Download Codes” on page 335.
• Click the Details tab to view or modify offer details. For more information, see “Using
• Click the Bundle templates tab to manage bundle templates associated with the
offer. For more information about managing bundles, see “Using the Bundle Templates
Tab” on page 315.

Delivery Management
• Click the Offer capabilities tab to manage devices compatible with the offer. For
more information about viewing compatible devices, see “Viewing Offer
Compatibilities” on page 330.
• Click the MetaData tab to manage any metadata associated with the offer. For more
information, see “Using the MetaData Tab” on page 331.
• Click the End-user rights tab to manage front-office group rights on the edited offer.
For more information, see “Using the End-Users Rights Tab” on page 332.
• Click the Administration rights tab to manage back-office group rights on the edited
offer. For more information, see “Using the Administration Rights Tab” on page 333.
The Details tab on the Edit offer screen (Figure 9.11 on page 314) allows you to modify the
following details about the selected offer:
• Name — The unique name of the offer. No two offers can have the same name.
• Description — A short description for the offer (optional).
• End-user service — The front-office service associated with the offer (cannot be
modified).
• Application ID — The ID used to deliver messages. Available IDs are retrieved from
messaging credentials associated to the selected end-user service.
• Status — The status of the offer. Status values include:
• Published — offer can be downloaded
• Draft/Not validated — offer cannot be downloaded
• Deprecated — offer was Published, but has since been deleted
NOTE: The offer can be published only if it contains at least one published bundle.
• Technical — Indicates whether the offer is technical. For a full description of a

technical offer, see “Viewing Offers” on page 310.
Using the Bundle Templates Tab
The Bundle templates tab on the Edit offer screen (Figure 9.12 on page 316) allows you
to manage the bundle templates used with the offer. A bundle template is used to
automatically create new bundles after a topic is created. A bundle template contains all
useful bundle information, delivery triggers, and topic filters. Topic filters determine whether
to include or exclude newly-created topics for which to generate bundles. Delivery triggers
are then defined in the bundle template and associated to the new bundle.

Delivery Management
Figure 9.12: Edit offer Screen — Bundle templates Tab
The Bundle templates tab displays the following information:

• Name — The name of the bundle template. Click a name to view or modify the bundle
template. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle Template” on page 318.
• Categories — The names of the categories linked to a bundle template.
• Content system — The content system used to filter topics. When a topic is created,
a bundle is created only if it is linked to the listed content system.
• Session sequence — The session sequence linked to a bundle template.
• Status — The status of the bundle template. Values include: Validated (enables
automatic bundle creation) or Draft.
The Bundle templates tab on the Edit offer screen provides the same basic functionality as
other list screens in Content Manager. For information about basic functions available, see
“Viewing and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Bundles tab, you can
• From the Name column, click a bundle template to edit. For more information, see
“Editing a Bundle Template” on page 318.
• Click New bundle to create a new bundle template. For more information about
creating a bundle, see “Creating a Bundle Template” on page 316.
• Click Delete bundle to remove the edited bundle template. For more information
about deleting bundles, see “Deleting a Bundle Template” on page 330.
• Click Published to change the status of selected bundle templates to Published.
Creating a Bundle Template
To create a bundle template:
1. From the Bundle templates tab on the Edit offer screen, click New bundle.
3 The Create bundle template screen displays (Figure 9.13 on page 317).

Delivery Management
Figure 9.13: Create bundle template Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the bundle template.
3. From the Content system list, select a content system to use to filter topics. When a
topic is created, a bundle is created only if it is linked to the content system selected
here.
4. From the Topic type list, select a topic type to use to filter topics. When a topic is
created, a bundle is created only if it is of the type selected here.
5. In the Bundle name template field, enter the naming convention the bundle template
will use to name new bundles. Possible parameters include:
• $topic.name — names the bundle after the topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.id — names the bundle after the topic ID of the topic that triggers bundle
creation

Delivery Management
• $topic.contentSystem — names the bundle after the content system ID of the topic
that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.type — names the bundle after the type of topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.contentBundleType — names the bundle after the content template of the
topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.categories — names the bundle after the content categories of the topic that
triggers bundle creation
• $topic.fetch count — names the bundle after the fetch count of the topic that
6. From the Session sequence list, select a sequence that defines how the contents in the
bundle template are delivered.
7. From the Bundle status list, select the status of newly created bundles. Values include:
Published (can be downloaded), Not validated or Draft (cannot be downloaded).
8. Check the Technical box to indicate whether bundles created using the bundle template
are technical. For more about technical bundles, see “Viewing Bundles” on page 337.
9. From the Categories list, select one or more categories to associate when bundles are
created. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple categories.
10. In the Reference date field, enter the reference date for each bundle created using the
template. The reference date is the date criteria by which to filter bundles using dynamic
categories.
11. Click Submit.

3 The General tab on the Edit bundle template screen displays allowing you to modify
the bundle template. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle Template” on
page 318.
Editing a Bundle Template
To edit a bundle template:
1. From the Bundle templates tab on the Edit offer screen, click the name of a bundle
template to edit.
3 The General tab on the Edit bundle template screen displays (Figure 9.14 on
page 319).
NOTE: The General tab on the Edit bundle template screen also displays immediately
after creating a new bundle template.

Delivery Management
Figure 9.14: Edit bundle template Screen — General Tab
From the Edit bundle template screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New template to create a new bundle template. For more information, see
“Creating a Bundle Template” on page 316.
• Click Delete template to delete the edited bundle template. For more information,
see “Deleting a Bundle Template” on page 330.
• Click the General tab to modify general information about the bundle. For more
information, see “Using the General Tab” on page 319.
• Click the Topic details tab to modify topics associated with the bundle. For more
information, see “Using the Topic Details Tab” on page 320.
• Click the Topic filters tab to search for topics. For more information, see “Using the
Topic Filters Tab” on page 320.
• Click the Bundle Details tab to manage for the bundle template. For more
information, see “Using the Bundle Details Tab” on page 321.
• Click the Content templates tab to manage content templates associated with the
edited bundle template. For more information, see “Using the Content Templates Tab”
on page 323.
• Click the Triggers on content tab to manage “on content” triggers for the bundle. For
more information, see “Using the Trigger On Content Tab” on page 324.
• Click the Triggers on message tab to manage “on message” triggers for the bundle.
For more information, see “Using the Triggers on Message Tab” on page 325.
• Click the Triggers on schedule tab to manage “on schedule” triggers for the bundle.
For more information, see “Using the Triggers On Schedule Tab” on page 326.
Using the General Tab. The General tab (Figure 9.14) allows you to change the name and
status of the bundle template.

Delivery Management
Using the Topic Details Tab. The Topic Details tab (Figure 9.15) allows you to manage
topics associated with the bundle template. Topics act as “content selectors” to retrieve
contents from the “content” repository or from other content systems. When the bundle
delivery is triggered, Content Manager initiates the delivery of all topics associated to the
bundle template and compatible with the recipient device.
Topics are ordered within a bundle to indicate which topic is delivered first. The delivery
sequence of different topics is defined by the session sequence associated with the bundle.
Each topic is associated with one or several patterns that define how bundle contents are
converted to deliverable contents.
Figure 9.15: Edit bundle template Screen — Topic details Tab
1. From the Content system list, select a content system by which the template will filter
topics. When a topic is created, a bundle is created only if it is linked to the content
system selected here.
2. From the Topic type list, select whether the topic is linked to a bundleid (content) or
category (content category). When a topic is created, a bundle is created only if it is of
the type selected here.
Using the Topic Filters Tab. The Topic filters tab allows you to specify criteria by which
to associate topics with the bundle template. The amount of information you add to the filter
determines how specific you want to be in your associations. For more information about
using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.

Delivery Management
Figure 9.16: Edit bundle template Screen— Topic filters Tab
Using the Bundle Details Tab. The Bundle Details tab (Figure 9.17 on page 322) allows
you to view or modify bundle template details.

Delivery Management
Figure 9.17: Edit bundle template Screen — Bundle Details Tab
The Bundle Details tab allows you to view or modify the following details of the associated
bundle template:
• Name template — The naming convention used by the template to name newly
created bundles. Possible parameters include:
• $topic.name — names the bundle after the topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.id — names the bundle after the topic ID of the topic that triggers bundle
creation
• $topic.contentSystem — names the bundle after the content system ID of the
topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.type — names the bundle after the type of topic that triggers bundle
creation
• $topic.contentBundleType — names the bundle after the content template of
the topic that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.categories — names the bundle after the content categories of the topic
that triggers bundle creation
• $topic.fetch count — names the bundle after the fetch count of the topic that

Delivery Management
• Session sequence — This sequence defines how the contents in a bundle are
delivered.
• Bundle status — The status of created bundles. Values include: Published (can be
downloaded), Not validated or Draft (cannot be downloaded).
• Technical — Indicates whether bundles created using the template are technical. For
more about technical bundles, see “Viewing Bundles” on page 337.
• Categories — Select one or more categories to associate with the bundles created
using the template. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple categories.
• Reference date — The date by which to filter bundles using dynamic categories.
• Enable trigger on demand — Check this box to activate “on demand” triggers for
the bundle.
Using the Content Templates Tab. The Content templates tab allows you to manage
content templates associated with the bundle template.
Figure 9.18: Edit bundle template Screen — Content templates Tab
To add a content template:
1. Select one or more templates from the Available content templates list. Press and
hold Ctrl to select multiple templates.
2. Click Add.
3 The selected templates display in the Associated content templates list.

Delivery Management
To remove a content template:
1. Select one or more templates from the Associated content templates list. Press and
hold Ctrl to select multiple templates.
2. Click Remove.
3 The selected templates display in the Available content templates list.
Using the Trigger On Content Tab. The Trigger on content tab (Figure 9.19 on
page 324) allows you to manage “on content” triggers (“push” triggers) for the bundle
template. This trigger is activated when new content is detected by one of the topics
associated with the bundle template. Only one “on content” trigger can be configured per
bundle.
Figure 9.19: Edit bundle template Screen — Trigger on content Tab
Enabling an “on content” Trigger
To enable an “on content” trigger:
1. Check the Enabled box to activate the trigger. To disable the trigger, uncheck the
Enabled box.
2. Select the following information for the trigger:

• Sequence type — When the trigger is activated, a large number of provisioning
operations may be initiated simultaneously. To limit the load on the system, different
operations are processed according to the sequence type defined here. Types include:
• Waiting session completion: X number of operations are processed completely
before the following X number of operations (X = Target count value)

Delivery Management
• Limit target workflow: No more than X number of operations are processed

simultaneously (X = Target count value)
• Schedule targets: X number of operations are processed simultaneously, then
the system waits for a predefined period of time (Waiting time value) before
processing the next X number of operations (X = Target count value)
• Simple: all operations are processed simultaneously
• Waiting time — The time frame between each processing operation (Schedule
target sequences only).
• Process priority — Select the global process priority for the provisioning operations
generated by the trigger. LOWER is lowest priority (operations are processed after
other operations), while HIGHER is highest priority (operations are processed before
other operations).
Using the Triggers on Message Tab. The Triggers on message tab (Figure 9.20) allows
you to manage “on message” triggers for the bundle. These triggers are activated when a
message meets certain rules and is sent or received on the application ID associated with the
parent offer.
The Triggers on message tab allows you to define the rules to be used to activate the
bundle. You can define several triggers or “sets of rules” for the same bundle. To initiate a
delivery, a message must meet ALL of the rules contained in one of the triggers. In this case,
the trigger is activated even if the message does not meet the rules of the other triggers.
Figure 9.20: Edit bundle Screen — Triggers on message Tab
The Triggers on message tab displays the filter criteria defined for existing triggers.

Delivery Management
Creating an “on message” Trigger
To create a new trigger:
1. From the Triggers on message tab, click New trigger.

3 The Create trigger screen displays, allowing you to define the filter criteria for the
trigger. For information about defining filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
2. Click Create trigger when finished.
Editing an “on message” Trigger
To edit an existing trigger:
1. From the Triggers on message tab, click Edit trigger next to the trigger to edit.
3 The Edit trigger on message screen displays, allowing you to modify the filter criteria
for the trigger. For more information about defining filters, see “Using the Filters
Screen” on page 8.
2. Make changes as necessary. To delete an existing trigger filter, click the next to the
filter to remove.
Deleting an “on message” Trigger
To delete a trigger:
1. From the Triggers on message tab, click Remove trigger next to the trigger to delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected trigger?”
displays.
Using the Triggers On Schedule Tab. The Triggers on schedule tab (Figure 9.21 on
page 327) allows you to manage “on schedule” triggers for the bundle template. These
triggers are activated at predefined times, according to a certain schedule.

Delivery Management
Figure 9.21: Edit bundle template Screen — Triggers on schedule Tab
Creating an “on schedule” Trigger
To create an “on schedule” trigger:
1. Enter the following information on the Triggers on schedule tab:

• Trigger name — The name of the new trigger.
• Repetitive — Check this option to repeat the schedule. Otherwise, the trigger is
activated only once. Select the times when the trigger should be activated.
For example, to trigger a delivery each day at 8:00 AM: from the Hours list, select
“08”, from the Minute list, select “00”, and make sure that the Repetitive box is
checked.
To trigger a delivery on the first Monday of each month: from the Day of week list,
select “Monday”, from the Day of the month list, select “1”, and make sure that the
Repetitive box is checked.

Delivery Management

• Waiting session completion: X number of operations are processed
completely before the following X number of operations (X = Target count
value)
target sequences only).
other operations).
2. Click Create trigger when finished.

3 The new trigger is listed on the right side of the tab.
Editing an “on schedule” Trigger
1. From the list of existing triggers, click the name of the trigger to edit.
3 The Edit trigger on schedule screen displays (Figure 9.22 on page 329).

Delivery Management
Figure 9.22: Edit trigger on schedule Screen
The Edit trigger on schedule screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Delete trigger on schedule to remove the edited trigger.
• Make changes to the trigger as necessary, and click Submit when finished.
Deleting an “on schedule” Trigger
To delete an existing trigger:
1. From the Edit trigger on schedule screen, click Delete trigger on schedule.

Delivery Management
Deleting a Bundle Template
To delete a bundle template:
1. From the Bundle templates tab on the Edit offer screen (Figure 9.12 on page 316),
check the boxes next to the bundle templates to delete. Check the box at the top of the
column to quickly select all templates.
2. Click Delete bundle templates.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected bundle
templates?” displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited bundle template by clicking Delete template on the
Edit bundle template screen.
Viewing Offer Compatibilities
The Offer compatibilities tab on the Edit offer screen allows you to search for and list all
devices that are compatible with the offer. A device is marked as compatible if at least one
associated bundle is compatible.
Figure 9.23: Edit offer Screen — Offer compatibilities Tab
1. From the Feature list, select the feature for which to search.
2. From the Language list, select the preferred language for which to search.
3. From the Brands list, select one or more device brands for which to search. Press and
hold Ctrl to select multiple brands.

Delivery Management
4. Specify whether or not to display inherited profiles.
5. Click Show filter.

3 Results of the search display at the bottom of the Offer compatibilities tab. This
information is view-only.
The MetaData tab on the Edit offer screen allows you to review any metadata that may be
associated with the offer, and create or delete metadata. You can search for metadata by
language and type.
Metadata types include the following:

• Billing default — default billing information (short code and price by country and
operator)
• Billing MO — billing information used on sent MO (short code and price by country
and operator)
• Billing MT — not currently used
• Billing IVR — billing information used with IVR (short code and price by country and
operator)
Creating Metadata. To create metadata for an offer, from the MetaData tab on the Edit
offer screen, click New meta data from the MetaData tab on the Edit offer screen.
3 The Create metadata screen displays.
Select a metadata type and language, then click Submit.
Editing Metadata. To edit existing metadata for an offer, from the MetaData tab on the
Edit offer screen, click Edit next to the metadata to modify.
NOTE: The fields available for modification depend on the type of metadata you are
editing.
Deleting Metadata. To delete metadata from an offer, from the MetaData tab on the Edit
offer screen, check the box next to each metadata to delete. Check the box at the top of the
column to quickly select all metadata. Click Delete meta data.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected offer meta data?”
displays.
Click Ok to confirm, or Cancel to void deletion.
NOTE: You can also delete edited metadata by clicking Delete meta data on the Edit
meta data screen.

Delivery Management
Using the End-Users Rights Tab
The End-users rights tab on the Edit offer screen allows you to define which front-office
groups can receive the selected offer contents. For information about granting offer rights
affecting all offers, see “Using the Administration Rights Tab” on page 333.
NOTE: Only those front-office groups attached to services on which you have rights are
listed.
Figure 9.24: Edit offer Screen — End-users rights Tab
Adding End-User Offer Rights
The “buy offer” right is the only right available on the End-users rights tab. This right
allows groups to access and download the offer’s contents through any of the bundle triggers
defined for the offer.
To add the “buy offer” right to front-office groups:
1. Check the box next to the “buy offer” right.
2. From the Groups list, select one or more groups to which to grant the “buy offer” right.
3. Click Add right.

3 The groups granted the “buy-offer” right are listed on the right side of the tab.

Delivery Management
Revoking End-User Offer Rights
To remove the “buy offer” right from end-user groups:
1. From the End-users rights tab on the Edit offer screen, click the next to each group
from which to revoke the “buy offer” right.
Using the Administration Rights Tab
The Administration rights tab on the Edit offer screen allows you to define the groups to
receive the edited offer.
The “Read catalog item” right is the only right available on the Administration rights tab.
This right allows back-office groups to access and download the offer’s contents using any of
the bundle triggers defined for the offer.
Figure 9.25: Edit offer Screen — Administration rights Tab
Adding Back-Office Offer Rights
To define the groups receiving the edited offer:
1. Check the box next to the “Read catalog item” right.
2. From the Groups list, select the groups to which to grant the “Read catalog item” right.
3. Click Add right.

3 The groups granted the “Read catalog item” right are listed on the right side of the tab.

Delivery Management
Revoking Back-Office Offer Rights
To remove rights to the offer:
1. From the Administration rights tab on the Edit offer screen, click the next to each
group from which to revoke the “Read catalog item” right.
Managing Global Offer Rights
The End-users rights screen allows you to define which groups receive all offers. For
information about granting access to a single offer, see “Using the End-Users Rights Tab” on
page 332.
The “Buy offer” right is the only right available on the End-users rights screen. This right
allows back-office groups to access any offer and any associated content.
Adding Global Offer Rights
To grant groups access to all offers:
1. From the Offers screen (Figure 9.8 on page 310), click Global end-users rights.
3 The End-users rights screen displays.
NOTE: Only those front-office groups on which you have rights are listed.
Figure 9.26: End-users rights Screen
2. Check the box next to the “buy offer” right.
3. Select the groups to which to grant the “buy offer” right. Press and hold Ctrl to select
multiple groups.

Delivery Management
4. Click Add right.

3 The groups granted the “buy-offer” right are listed on the right side of the tab.
Revoking Global Offer Rights
To remove group access to all offers:
1. From the End-users rights screen, click the next to each group from which to revoke
the “buy offer” right.
Managing Download Codes
To export default (automatically generated) SMS download codes associated to one or

several offers:
1. From the Offers screen (Figure 9.8 on page 310), check the boxes next to the offers for
which to download SMS codes.
2. Click Manage download codes.

3 The Manage download codes screen displays.
NOTE: You can also manage download codes related to an edited offer by clicking Manage
download codes on the Edit offer screen. For more information, see “Editing an
The Manage download codes screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Refresh to update the list of export files.
• Click Launch new export to initiate a new export. Content Manager generates SMS
codes for the selected offers and their child bundles and stores them in a .csv file for
download.
• To delete existing export files, check the boxes next to the files to delete. Check the
box at the top of the column to quickly select all files. Click Delete files.
• Click Download next to the export file to download.

Delivery Management
Export File Formats
The format for each export file is as follows: one line per device and per bundle, with
columns separated by commas “,”. The following table defines the export file columns:
Field Type Description Example

Offer ID String ID (internal object key) of the parent offer of 0000010810FD309E-00325
the bundle
Offer name String Name of the parent offer Free offer
Bundle ID String ID (internal object key) of the bundle 0000010810FDD700-00340
Bundle name String Name of the bundle GlobalBundle
Device brand String Brand of the device Motorola
Device model String Model of the device C650
Terminal ID Integer Internal terminal ID of the device 570004
Simple SMS code String Simple SMS code, followed by “|” 0a4m57|
Bundle SMS code Integer Bundle/Brand (or alias)/Model (or alias) GlobalBundle m c650| Global-
codes. Each possible code is separated by “|”. Bundle motorola c650|
Offer SMS code String Offer/Brand (or alias)/Model (or alias) codes. free offer m c650|free offer
Each possible code is separated by “|”. motorola c650|
Deleting an Offer
Deleting an offer results in the deletion of all attached bundle templates.
NOTE: If you delete an active offer, its status is switched to Deprecated. If the offer is not
active, it is removed immediately.
To delete an offer:
1. From the Offers screen (Figure 9.8 on page 310), check the box next to one or more
offers to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all offers.
2. Click Delete offer.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected offers?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited offer by clicking Delete offer on the Edit offer
screen.

Delivery Management
Managing Bundles
From the Delivery menu, you can view, edit, create, and delete delivery bundles.
Viewing Bundles
To view a list of bundles:
1. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Bundles.

3 The Bundles > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of all bundles. For information about the Filters screen,
see “Searching Bundles” on page 339.
3 The Bundles screen displays.
Figure 9.27: Bundles Screen
The Bundles screen displays the following information:

• Name — The name of the bundle. Click a bundle name to view or modify the bundle.
For more information, see “Editing a Bundle” on page 341.
• Numeric alias — A digital identification number associated with the bundle.
• Session sequence — The session sequence associated with the bundle. Possible
sequences include:

Delivery Management

• Status — The status of the bundle. Values include: Published (can be downloaded),
Not validated or Draft (cannot be downloaded), and Deprecated (the bundle was
• Technical — A technical bundle is, for example, linked to a session sequence whose
type is Workflow-based. A trigger is defined in the bundle, and when a SMS-MO is
received and triggers this bundle, a delivery session is created and follows the
Workflow-based sequence. This sequence can then create a new session and send
contents by sending another bundle to the user. In effect, the technical bundle is not
used to send contents directly to a user, it is used as a SMS-MO dispatcher.
Using the Bundles Screen
The Bundles screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content
Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Bundles screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a bundle to edit. For more information, see “Editing a
Bundle” on page 341.
• On the right side of the table, click Download to download the corresponding bundle.
For more information, see “Using the Popularity Tab” on page 353.
• On the right side of the table, click Bulk process to create a bulk process for the
corresponding bundle. For more information, see “Creating a Bundle Bulk Process” on
page 357.
• Click New bundle to create a new bundle. For more information, see“Creating a
• Click Delete bundle to remove all selected bundles. For more information, see
“Deleting a Bundle” on page 355.
• Click Publish to enable download of all selected bundles.

Delivery Management
Searching Bundles
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of bundles specific to
that criteria.
To manage bundle filters:
1. From the Bundles screen (Figure 9.27 on page 337), click Edit filters.
3 The Bundles > Filters screen displays.
Figure 9.28: Bundles > Filters Screen
Creating a Bundle
To create a bundle:
1. From the Bundles screen (Figure 9.27 on page 337), click New bundle.
3 The Create bundle screen displays (Figure 9.29 on page 340).

Delivery Management
Figure 9.29: Create Bundle Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the bundle.
3. From the Session sequence list, select a sequence method that defines how the
contents in the bundle are delivered. For more about session sequences, see “Viewing
Bundles” on page 337.
4. From the Status list, select a status for the bundle. Values include: Published (can be
downloaded), Not validated or Draft (cannot be downloaded).
5. From the Categories list, select one or more categories to associate with the bundle.
Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple categories.
6. Check the Technical box to indicate whether the bundle is technical. For more about
technical bundles, see “Viewing Bundles” on page 337.
7. If necessary, modify the date in the Reference date field. The reference date is the date
criteria by which to filter bundles using dynamic categories. For more information about
dynamic categories, see “Editing a Category” on page 304.

3 The Details tab on the Edit bundle screen displays allowing you to modify the new
bundle. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle” on page 341.

Delivery Management
Editing a Bundle
To edit a bundle:
1. From the Bundles screen, click the name of a bundle to edit from the Name column.
3 The Details tab on the Edit bundle screen displays.
NOTE: The Details tab on the Edit bundle screen also displays immediately after creating
a new bundle.
Figure 9.30: Edit bundle Screen — Details Tab
From the Edit bundle screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click New bundle to create a new bundle. For more information, see “Creating a
• Click Delete bundle to delete the edited bundle. For more information, see “Deleting a
• Click Download to download the edited bundle.
• Click the Details tab to modify general information about the bundle. For more
information, see “Using the General Tab” on page 319.

Delivery Management
• Click the Topics tab to modify topics associated with the bundle. For more
information, see “Using the Topic Details Tab” on page 320.
• Click the Bundle capabilities tab to manage device capabilities for the bundle. For
more information, see “Using the Bundle Details Tab” on page 321.
• Click the Triggers on message tab to manage “on message” triggers for the bundle.
For more information, see “Using the Triggers on Message Tab” on page 348.
• Click the Triggers on schedule tab to manage “on schedule” triggers for the bundle.
For more information, see “Using the Triggers On Schedule Tab” on page 348.
• Click the Triggers on content tab to manage “on content” triggers for the bundle. For
more information, see “Using the Triggers On Content Tab” on page 352.
• Click the Popularity tab to calculate the download totals for the bundle. For more
information, see “Using the Popularity Tab” on page 353.
• Click the MetaData tab to manage any metadata associated with the bundle. For
more information, see “Using the MetaData Tab” on page 354.
The Details tab (Figure 9.30 on page 341) allows you to modify the following details of the
bundle:
• Id — The internal identification number assigned to the bundle (cannot be modified).
• Name — The name of the bundle.
• Numeric alias — The numeric alias automatically generated for the bundle by
Content Manager and used for the default MO interface (cannot be modified).
• Session sequence — The session sequence associated with the bundle. Possible
sequences include:
• Failsafe: This sequence is used to process WAP content and resend it as long as a
download has not started.
• Categories — Categories associated with the bundle. Press and hold Ctrl to select
multiple categories.
• Status — The status of the bundle. Values include: Published (can be downloaded),
Not validated or Draft (cannot be downloaded), and Deprecated (the offer was

Delivery Management
• Technical — Indicates whether the bundle is technical (cannot be modified). For more
about technical bundles, see “Viewing Bundles” on page 337.
• Reference date — The date by which to filter bundles using dynamic categories.
• Enable trigger on demand — Check this box to activate “on demand” triggers for
the bundle.
Using the Topics Tab
The Topics tab allows you to manage topics associated with the bundle. Topics act as
“content selectors” to retrieve contents from the “content” repository or from other content
systems. When the bundle delivery is triggered, Content Manager initiates the delivery of all
topics associated to the bundle and compatible with the recipient device.
Topics are ordered within a bundle to indicate which topic is delivered first. The delivery
sequence of different topics is defined by the session sequence associated with the bundle.
Each topic is associated with one or several patterns that define how bundle contents are
converted to deliverable contents.
Figure 9.31: Edit bundle Screen — Topics Tab
If there are topics currently associated with the bundle, the Topics tab displays the following
information:
• Index — When a bundle is activated by a trigger, the first topic is activated, followed
by the second, and third, and so on. The index is the number order on which a topic is
activated. To reorder associated topics, select a topic from the list, then click Move up
or Move down to change the order.
• Topic Name — The name of the topic. Click a topic name to edit topic pattern options.
For more information, see “Managing Topic Patterns” on page 344.
• Topic patterns — The pattern used by a topic to generate a message from the
content that the topic has selected.

Delivery Management
Adding a Topic to a Bundle
To add a topic:
1. From the Topics tab on the Edit bundle screen, click Add topic.
3 The Topics > Filters screen displays.
2. Enter the criteria on which to search topics. The amount of information you add to the
filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information about
using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
3. From the list of topics, click Add topic next to each topic to add to the bundle.
3 The Topic and message patterns screen displays, allowing you to manage the
selected topic’s patterns. For more information, see “Managing Topic Patterns” on
page 344.
Managing Topic Patterns
Topic patterns are used by topics to generate a message from the content selected by the
topic. Several patterns may be selected and placed in order for the same topic. When content
is to be sent to a device, Content Manager automatically selects the first pattern compatible
with the device.
NOTE: Only those patterns compatible with the content templates associated with the
current topic are used.
To manage topic patterns:
1. From the Topics tab on the Edit bundle screen (Figure 9.15 on page 320), click the
name of a currently associated topic.
3 The Topic and message patterns screen displays (Figure 9.32 on page 345).
NOTE: The Topic and message patterns screen also displays immediately after adding a
topic to a bundle.

Delivery Management
Figure 9.32: Topic and message patterns Screen
The Topic and message patterns screen displays the following view-only information
about the topic:
• Name — The name of the topic.
• Content system — The associated content system.
• Type — The type of topic. Either of the following types may display:
• By content id — The topic is associated to a specific content on selected content
system. If the topic is linked to a content, the following information displays:
• Content — The name of the content associated with the topic.
• Validity start — The date on which the content becomes valid.
• Validity end — The date on which the content becomes invalid.
• Content template — The content type.
• By category — The topic automatically selects the last published content in
selected categories. If the topic is linked to categories, the following information
displays:
• Content categories — Names of categories linked to the topic.
• Content template — The content type.
• Number of fetched content — The number of contents retrieved by the topic
simultaneously.

Delivery Management
Currently associated message patterns display the following information at the bottom of the
screen:
• Index — The index number relates to pattern order. When the topic is activated by a
trigger, the first pattern is used to format the content retrieved by the topic. If the
pattern is not compatible with the target device, the next pattern is used, and so on.
• Pattern name — The name of the pattern. Click a pattern name to view or modify the
pattern. For more information, see “Editing a Message Pattern” on page 399.
In addtion, the Topic and message patterns screen allows you to perform the following
tasks:
• Click Edit topic to edit the selected topic. For more information, see “Editing a Topic”
on page 372.
• Click View topic capabilities to list all devices compatible with the edited topic. For
more information, see “Using the Topic Capabilities Tab” on page 374.
• From the Pattern name list, select a pattern and click Add to add the pattern to the
topic. To remove a pattern from the topic, click Remove next to the pattern to
remove.
• Select an index number from the list of associated patterns and click Move up or
Move down to change the order of authorized patterns.
Using the Bundle Compatibilities Tab
The Bundle compatibilities tab (Figure 9.33 on page 347) allows you to manage devices
compatible with the bundle. Devices are marked as compatible if at least one of the patterns
and associated topics is compatible. This tab displays a list of compatible device features,
models, and brands.

Delivery Management
Figure 9.33: Edit bundle Screen — Bundle compatibilities Tab (With Results)
1. From the Feature list, select a feature on which to conduct a search for compatible
devices.
2. From the Language list, select the preferred language for compatible devices.
3. From the Brands list, select one or more brands on which to search. Press and hold Ctrl
to select multiple brands.
4. Select whether to display inherited profiles.

Delivery Management
5. Click Show filter when finished.

3 Results of the search display at the bottom of the tab.
Using the Triggers on Message Tab
The Triggers on message tab allows you to manage “on message” triggers for the bundle.
These triggers are activated when a message meets certain rules and is sent or received on
the application ID associated with the parent offer.
The Triggers on message tab allows you to define triggers, or sets of rules, to be used to
activate the bundle. You can define several triggers for the same bundle. To initiate a
delivery, a message must meet all of the rules contained in one of the triggers. In this case,
the trigger is activated even if the message does not meet the rules of the other triggers.
The Triggers on message tab displays the filter criteria defined for existing triggers. For
information about using filters in Content Manager, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
Creating an “on message” Trigger
NOTE: In order to activate the trigger, all rules defined in the trigger must be met.
To create a new trigger:
1. From the Triggers on message tab, click New trigger.

3 The Create trigger screen displays, allowing you to define the filter criteria for the
trigger. For information about defining filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
2. Click Create trigger.
Editing an “on message” Trigger
1. From the Triggers on message tab, click Edit trigger next to the trigger to edit.
3 The Edit trigger on message screen displays, allowing you to modify the filter criteria
for the trigger. For more information about defining filters, see “Using the Filters
Screen” on page 8.
2. Make changes as necessary. To delete an existing trigger filter, click the next to the
filter to remove.
Using the Triggers On Schedule Tab
The Triggers on schedule tab (Figure 9.34 on page 349) allows you to manage “on
schedule” triggers for the bundle. These triggers are activated at predefined times, according
to a certain schedule.

Delivery Management
Figure 9.34: Edit bundle Screen — Triggers on schedule Tab
Creating an “on schedule” Trigger
To create a trigger:
1. Enter the following information on the Triggers on schedule tab:

• Trigger name — The name of the new trigger.
• Schedule — Select the Repetitive option to repeat the schedule. Otherwise, the
trigger is activated only once. Select the times when the trigger should be activated.
For example, to trigger a delivery each day at 8:00 AM: from the Hours list, select
“08”, from the Minute list, select “00”, and select Repetitive.
To trigger a delivery on the first Monday of each month: from the Day of week list,
select “Monday”, from the Day of the month list, select “1”, and select Repetitive.

Delivery Management

• Waiting session completion: X number of operations are processed
value)
target sequences only)
other operations).
2. Click Create trigger.

3 The new trigger is listed on the right side of the tab.
Editing an “on schedule” Trigger
1. From the list of existing triggers, click the name of the trigger to edit.
3 The Edit trigger on schedule screen displays (Figure 9.22 on page 329).

Delivery Management
Figure 9.35: Edit trigger on schedule Screen
The Edit trigger on schedule screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Delete trigger to remove the edited trigger.
• Click Subscribe end-user to associate an end-user with the selected bundle and
trigger.
3The Subscribe end-user screen displays. For more information, see “Editing or
Deleting a Subscription” on page 366.
• Make changes to the trigger schedule as necessary, then click Submit.

Delivery Management
Deleting an “on schedule” Trigger
To delete a trigger:
1. From the Edit trigger on schedule screen, click Delete trigger on schedule.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected trigger?”
displays.
Using the Triggers On Content Tab
The Triggers on content tab allows you to manage an “on content” trigger for the bundle.
This trigger is activated when new content is detected by one of the topics associated with
the bundle. Only one “on content” trigger can be configured per bundle.
Figure 9.36: Edit bundle Screen — Triggers on content Tab
Enabling an “on content” Trigger
To enable an “on content” trigger:
1. Check the Enabled box to activate the trigger.
2. Select the following information for the trigger:

• Waiting session completion — X number of operations are processed
value)

Delivery Management
• Limit target workflow — No more than X number of operations are

processed simultaneously (X = Target count value). If selected, the Target
count field displays. Specify the number of operations to process here.
• Schedule — X number of operations are processed simultaneously, then the
system waits for a predefined period of time (Waiting time value) before
processing the next X number of operations (X = Target count value). If
selected, the Waiting time field displays. Specify the time from between each
processing operation here.
• Simple — All operations are processed simultaneously.
other operations).
3. Click Submit.
Using the Popularity Tab
The Popularity tab allows you to determine how to calculate the number of times the edited
bundle has been downloaded over a certain period of time. Downloaded bundles are based
on the number of completed delivery sessions linked to this bundle.
Figure 9.37: Edit bundle Screen — Popularity Tab
To determine how the popularity of the bundle is calculated:
1. From the Type list, select how to calculate the number of delivery sessions for the
bundle: Monthly, Daily, Hourly, Weekly, Yearly, or Absolute.
2. Click Submit.
To adjust the number of downloads to date, in the Count field, enter the number of
downloads for the bundle, then click Submit.

Delivery Management
The MetaData tab on the Edit bundle screen allows you to review any metadata that may
be associated with the offer. You can search for metadata by language and type.
Figure 9.38: Edit bundle Screen — MetaData Tab
Creating Metadata
To create metadata for the bundle:
From the MetaData tab on the Edit bundle screen, click New meta data.
1. From the Type list, select a metadata type. Additional fields available on the Create
metadata screen depend on the type selected here. Metadata types include:
• Name — Displays the name of the bundle.
• Text description — Displays an additional description.
• Highlight — Displays the bundle as highlighted.
• CM1 contentId — References the last identification for the last content system.
2. From the Language list, select the preferred language for the metadata.
3. Provide other information as required by the metadata type selected. Click Submit when
finished.
Editing Metadata
1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit bundle screen, click Edit next to the metadata to
modify.
editing.

Delivery Management
Deleting Metadata
To delete metadata from a bundle:
1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit bundle screen, check the box next to each
metadata to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all metadata.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected bundle meta data?”
displays.
meta data screen.
Deleting a Bundle
To delete a bundle:
1. From the Bundles screen (Figure 9.27 on page 337), check one or more boxes next to
the bundles to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all
bundles.
NOTE: You can also delete edited bundles by clicking Delete bundle on the Edit bundle
screen.
2. Click Delete bundle.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected bundle(s)?”
displays.
Downloading a Bundle
To download a bundle:
1. From the Bundles screen (Figure 9.27 on page 337), click Download to the right of the
bundle to download.
NOTE: The Download function is also available when editing a bundle. For more
information, see “Editing a Bundle” on page 341.
3 The Download Bundle screen displays (Figure 9.39 on page 356).

Delivery Management
Figure 9.39: Download Bundle Screen
NOTE: All information entered is optional, unless otherwise noted.
2. From the Language list, select the preferred bundle language type.
3. Check the Determine account and device from specified address for the option to
restrict the download according to the timeslots set for the end user account. If checked,
the screen refreshes and the Enable using user’s timeslot preferences box displays.
To restrict the download to the user’s specified timeslots, check the Enable using user’s
timeslot preferences box. For more information about managing end user timeslots,
see “Editing a Front-Office Account” on page 84.
4. From the Address type list, select the type of receiving device address: Mobile or Mail
(email). This field is required.
5. In the Address field, type the address for the receiving device. This address must be of
the type selected from the Address type list, or you can specify an IMEI address when
the Select device by imei box is checked. This field is required.
6. From the Brand list, select the brand of receiving device.

Delivery Management
7. From the Model list, select the model of the receiving device.
8. In the Time to start field, specify when the download begins. Time format is YYYY-MM-
DD HH:MM:SS.
9. In the Time to live field, specify when to initiate delivery. Time format is YYYY-MM-DD
HH:MM:SS.
10. In the Call back URL field, specify the URL to be called once the download is successfully
complete. This is useful for clients that need to perform specific tasks following a
download (for example, downloading the event to their client computer).
11. From the Interface type list, select from the following types of SMS interface used to
view associated codes:
• Simple interface: A SMS interface. The syntax of the code to be sent by SMS is
0aXbY (where a = content type, X = delivery bundle numeric alias, b = device brand
alias, and Y = the digital portion of the device model terminal ID).
• Bundle name, brand alias, model alias interface: The syntax of the code to be
sent by SMS is UBM (where U = delivery bundle name, B = device brand or brand
alias, and M = device model or model alias).
• Offer name, brand alias, model alias interface: The syntax of the code to be sent
by SMS is OBM (where O = parent delivery offer name, B = device brand or brand
alias, and M = device model or model alias).
• Bundle id, brand alias, model alias: The syntax of the code to be sent by SMS is
UBM (where U = delivery bundle ID, B = device brand or brand alias, and M = device
model or model alias).
• Bundle id: Used if end-user devices are not necessary (SMS text messages or MMS
messages or content types compatible with a large number of devices). This simplifies
the interface for end-users.
• Simple interface (short): Similar to the Simple interface, except that the content
type information is not specified.
Creating a Bundle Bulk Process
To create a bulk process for a bundle:
1. From right side of the Bundles screen (Figure 9.27 on page 337), click Bulk Process
next to the bundle for which to create the process.
3 The Process details tab on the Create bulk process screen displays (Figure 9.40 on
page 358).

Delivery Management
Figure 9.40: Create bulk process Screen — Process details Tab
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the process.
3. From the Status list, select the status of the process.
4. From the Priority list, select the priority level of the process.
5. In the Time to start field, enter the date and time at which the process begins (format is
YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS).
6. In the Timeout for target reporting (in milliseconds) field, enter a timeout period.
7. Click Next.
3 The Bulk action tab on the Create bulk process screen displays.
Figure 9.41: Create bulk process Screen — Bulk action Tab
8. From the Action type list, select the method by which to deliver the bundle contents.
9. Check the Allow delaying sessions box to have the ability to delay delivery sessions.

Delivery Management
10. Click Next.

Figure 9.42: Create bulk process Screen — Targets Tab
11. From the Target type list, select the method by which to target bundle recipients.
If you select By CSV file:

• From the Language list, select the preferred language of the bundle.
• In the CSV File field, enter the full path and filename to the CSV file containing
recipient information. Click Browse to search for the file.
• In the CSV separator field, enter the type of field separator used in the CSV file.
• Check the Use meta data box if the first line of the CSV file is to be used as
metadata.
• From the Encoding list, select the type of encoding.
• Click Next.
3The Bulk flow control strategy tab on the Create bulk process screen displays
If you select By group:

• From the End-user group list, select the target group.
• Click Next.
3The Bulk flow control strategy tab on the Create bulk process screen displays

Delivery Management
Figure 9.43: Create bulk process Screen — Bulk flow control strategy Tab
13. Click Next.

Figure 9.44: The Create bulk process Screen — Timeslots Tab

Delivery Management

16. Click Next.

3 The Confirmation tab on the Create bulk process screen displays.
Figure 9.45: Create bulk process Screen — Confirmation Tab

Delivery Management
Viewing Popular Downloads
From the Delivery menu, you can view statistics regarding the most/least downloaded
delivery bundles for all services over a certain period of time.
NOTE: Bundle popularity is calculated based on the number of successfully completed

delivery sessions.
To view downloads by popularity:
1. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Popularity.

3 The Popularity screen displays.
Figure 9.46: Popularity Screen
2. From the Type list, select the type of popularity ratings to view: Daily, Monthly,
Weekly, Yearly, Absolute, or Hourly. Ratings listed are current, for instance, current
day or current month.
NOTE: The Popularity screen refreshes the list of downloads each time a selection is
made.
3. From the End-user service list, select a service from which to view downloads.
4. Select whether to display more popular or less popular bundle downloads first.
5. From the Top list, select the number of results to display: 5, 10, 15, or 20.
6. If you choose, you can specify the number of successful delivery sessions from which to
calculate popularity ratings by clicking a bundle name from the list of results.
3 The Edit popularity screen displays.

Delivery Management
7. Enter the number of successful delivery sessions, then click Submit.

3 A message displays confirming your saved changes. The new number is used in the
next calculation of popularity ratings.
Managing Triggers
From the Delivery menu, you can directly manage all triggers on all offers simultaneously.
To manage global triggers:
1. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Triggers.

3 The Triggers screen displays.
Figure 9.47: Triggers Screen
2. Click the type of triggers to manage:

• Triggers on message — control all defined SMS keywords
NOTE: Only manually defined keywords are listed; codes that are automatically
generated are not displayed.
• Triggers on schedule — control all programmed schedules
• Triggers on content — control all defined alerts
• Triggers on demand — control all message (manual) triggers
3 The Filters screen for the selected trigger type displays, allowing you to view all
triggers, or specify criteria for searching triggers. To view all triggers without the use of
a filter, click Show table. To modify filters after displaying the table, click Edit filters.
NOTE: When managing Triggers on message, you can also manage triggers by
application ID by clicking the Triggers by appId tab.

Delivery Management
Searching Triggers
The Filters screen for a selected trigger type allows you to set search criteria that returns a
list of triggers specific to that criteria.
To apply filters for a search, enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information
you add to the filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more
information about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
The following table describes the search criteria available:
Criteria Description Triggers on Triggers on Triggers on Triggers on

message schedule content demand
Id Trigger ID
3 3 3 3
Offer Parent offer of the trigger
3 3 3 3
Application Id ID used to deliver contents from
the offer
3
Bundle Bundle associated to the trigger 3 3 3 3
Filters Filters associated to the trigger
3
Authenticated Indicates whether the authenti-
mode cated mode is enabled (True) or
3
not (False).
Schedule time Trigger schedule
3
Repetition Indicates whether the trigger is
repetitive (True) or not (False).
3
Sequence type Indicates the type of sequence
used for the trigger
3
To view all triggers without the use of a filter, click Show table.
Once a list of results displays, you can perform the following tasks:
• Use the pull-down menu to show a specific number of items per page — 5, 10, 15, 20,
50, 100, or 500 items per page.
• Click Refresh to update the list.
• Browse pages: Previous — go back; Next — go to next page.
• Click Edit filters to modify filter settings for triggers. For more information, see
“Searching Triggers” on page 364.
• Click Reset filters to remove all existing filters.
• Click Hide or Show filters to hide or display all filtering criteria.
• Click the column headings to sort column items alphabetically (default is descending;
click again to sort ascending).

Delivery Management
Managing Subscriptions
The Delivery menu allows you to manage front-office subscriptions to push services, for
instance, subscriptions to bundles that contain triggers on content or triggers on schedule.
For information about subscribing an end-user to a bundle, see “Editing an “on schedule”
Trigger” on page 328 or “Enabling an “on content” Trigger” on page 324.
To manage subscriptions, from the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Subscriptions.
3 The Subscriptions screen displays.
Figure 9.48: Subscriptions Screen
The Subscriptions screen allows you to search accounts to subscribe based on an end-
user’s MSISDN or account alias name.
Searching Accounts by MSISDN
To search by MSISDN:
1. From the Search by address tab, enter the MSISDN of the user account for which to
search.
2. Click List subscriptions by end-user address.

3 If subscriptions are found, the following subscription information displays:
• Alias — The alias name for the account.
• Type — The address type: Mobile, Email, or Phone.
• Status — The account status: Active or Inactive.
• First name — The account holder’s first name.
• Last name — The account holder’s last name.
To subscribe an end-user account, click Subscribe next to the desired account.

3 A confirmation window displays. Review the information and modify if necessary, then
click Ok to create the subscription, or Cancel to void the subscription.

Delivery Management
Searching Accounts by Alias
To search by alias:
1. From the Search by alias tab, enter the alias name of the user account for which to
search.
2. Click List subscriptions by end-user alias.

3 If subscriptions are found, the following subscription information displays:
• End-user alias — The alias name for the account.
• Status — The account status: Active or Inactive.
• First name — The account holder’s first name.
• Last name — The account holder’s last name.
To subscribe an end-user account, click Subscribe next to the desired account.

3 A confirmation window displays. Review the information and modify if necessary, then
click Ok to create the subscription, or Cancel to void the subscription.
Editing or Deleting a Subscription
Once an account is subscribed to one or more bundles, you can manage all active
subscriptions for a specified account.
To edit a subscription, you must first locate the account for which to edit subscriptions. For
information about searching accounts, see “Searching Accounts by MSISDN” on page 365
and “Searching Accounts by Alias” on page 366.
Once an account with subscriptions is located, you can perform the following tasks from the
Subscriptions screen:
• Select one or more subscriptions from the list and click Delete subscriptions to
remove the subscriptions from the account.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected subscriptions?”
displays. Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion.
• Click an Id to view the subscription options for this account, bundle, and trigger.
Options available are described in “Editing or Deleting a Subscription” on page 366.
• Click a Bundle name to edit the associated bundle. For more information, see “Editing
a Bundle Template” on page 318.
• Click the Trigger type to edit the associated trigger. For more information, see
“Managing Triggers” on page 363.

Delivery Management
Managing Back-Office Catalog Rights
The Delivery menu allows you to manage all rights on offers, bundles, and triggers
associated with back-office (administrator) groups.
NOTE: Only those back-office children groups of groups on which you have rights are
listed. You may grant only those rights you already have on offers.
To grant offer access to front-office (end-user) groups, see “Using the Administration Rights
Tab” on page 333.
To grant rights associated with topics, see “Managing Topic Rights” on page 377.
Granting Catalog Rights
To grant catalog rights to back-office groups:
1. From the Delivery menu, select Catalog > Administration rights.

3 The Administration rights screen displays.
Figure 9.49: Administration rights Screen
2. From the End-user service list, select a service from which to display associated rights.
Only services on which you have rights are listed.
3. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of these rights, see “Catalog
4. From the Groups list, select the groups to associate with the selected rights. Press and

Delivery Management
5. Click Add right.

3 The newly granted rights and associated groups are listed on the right side of the
screen.
Revoking Catalog Rights
To revoke a right from a group, click the next to each right to remove.
Managing Content Topics
Topics are content selectors that indicate where the contents can be found for each bundle.
There are two types of topics:
• By content id — The topic is associated to one published content stored on a content
system. It inherits the compatibilities and validity from the content.
• By category — The topic is associated to one or several categories on a content
system. It automatically selects one or several published content in these categories.
When a new content is published in any category, it activates all associated “on
content” triggers.
Viewing Topics
To view topics:
1. From the Delivery menu, select Content > Topics.

2. Click Show table to view a list of topics. For information about the Filters screen, see
“Searching Topics” on page 370.
3 The Topics screen displays a list of all topics (Figure 9.50 on page 369).

Delivery Management
Figure 9.50: Topics Screen
Using the Topics Screen
The Topics screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content
Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Topics screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a topic name to modify the selected topic. For more
information, see “Editing a Topic” on page 372.
• Click New topic to create a new topic. For more information, see “Creating a New
Topic” on page 370.
• Click Delete topics to remove all selected topics. For more information, see “Deleting
a Topic” on page 377.
• Click Administration rights to manage topic rights. For more information, see
“Managing Topic Rights” on page 377.
• Click Publish to publish selected topics, create bundles, and offers. For more
information, see “Publishing Topics” on page 379.

Delivery Management
Searching Topics
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of topics specific to that
criteria.
To manage topic filters:
1. From the Topics screen (Figure 9.50 on page 369), click Edit filters.
Figure 9.51: Topics > Filters Screen
Creating a New Topic
To create a new topic:
1. From the Topics screen, click New topic.

3 The Create topic screen displays (Figure 9.52 on page 371).

Delivery Management
Figure 9.52: Create topic Screen
2. From the Content system list, select a system from where the contents is fetched for
this topic. For more information about content systems, see “Managing Content Systems”
on page 381.
3. From the Type list, select a topic type: by category or by content id.
4. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the topic. No two topics should have the
same name.
5. If the topic type is by category:

• Select a template for the selected content. Only contents in the selected template are
selected.
• Select one or more Categories available from the selected content system. Press and
hold Ctrl to select multiple categories. If you select multiple categories, all contents
fetched must be associated to all selected categories.
• Enter the number of contents the topic is to retrieve.
• Click Create.
3The Topic compatibilities tab on the Edit topic screen displays. For information
about editing a topic, see “Editing a Topic” on page 372.
6. If the topic type is by content id:

• Select a template for the content.
• Click Next.

Delivery Management
• A Filters screen displays allowing you to set search criteria for the content in the
topic. For information about using the Filters screen, see “Using the Filters Screen” on
page 8.
3The Content selection (Step 2/3) screen displays a list of all resulting content.
• Click the Create topic in the table that corresponds to the desired content.
Editing a Topic
To edit a topic:
1. From the Topics screen (Figure 9.50 on page 369), click the name of a topic to edit.
3 The Edit topic screen displays.
NOTE: Depending on the topic type selected, one of two screens displays:
Figure 9.53: Edit topic Screen (By Content ID)

Delivery Management
Figure 9.54: Edit topic Screen (By Category)
The Edit topic screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New topic to create a new topic. For more information, see “Creating a New
Topic” on page 370.
• Click Delete topic to delete the edited topic.
• Click the Details tab to modify general information about the topic. For more
• Click the Topic capabilities tab to manage device capabilities associated with the
edited topic. For more information, see “Using the Topic Capabilities Tab” on page 374.
• Click the MetaData tab to manage any metadata associated with the topic. For more
information, see “Using the MetaData Tab” on page 376.
From the Details tab on the Edit topic screen, you can make the following changes to the
edited topic:
• If the topic type is by category:
• Name — The unique name of the topic. No two topics should have the same name.
• Content template — The template used by the content in the topic.
• Content categories — Categories of content associated with the topic.
• Number of fetched contents — The number of contents that the topic should
retrieve.

Delivery Management
• If the topic type is by content id:

• Name — The unique name of the topic. No two topics should have the same name.
Using the Topic Capabilities Tab
From the Topic capabilities tab on the Edit topic screen, you can view the devices and
features compatible with the edited topic.
NOTE: The information listed on the Topic capabilities tab for by content id topics is
view-only.
In the case of by category topics, compatible devices are defined manually based on their
compatibility with the content type selected. By default, only devices with a feature
compatible with the selected content type are listed. For by category topics, the Topic
capabilities tab displays as in Figure 9.55 on page 375.

Delivery Management
Figure 9.55: Edit topic Screen — Topic capabilities Tab (By Category)
1. From the Language list, select the preferred language for devices associated with the
topic.
2. To search for devices by feature, check the Feature box, and select a feature from the
Feature list.
3. To search for devices by brand, check the Brands box, then select one or more brands
for which to search. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple brands.
4. Specify whether to display or hide inherited profiles.
5. Click Show filter to view search results.

3 Results display at the bottom of the tab.

Delivery Management
6. Check the boxes next to each device to associate with the topic. Check the Assign all
available compatibilities box to assign all listed devices.
The MetaData tab on the Edit topic screen allows you to review any metadata that may be
associated with the topic. Metadata is used to attach additional data to a category. You can
search for metadata by language and type.
Creating Metadata
To create metadata for the topic:
From the MetaData tab on the Edit topic screen, click New meta data.
1. From the Type list, select a metadata type. Additional fields available on the Create
metadata screen depend on the type selected here. Metadata types include:
• Preview — A preview of the content.
• Preview URL — An external URL leading to a content preview.
• Text description — An additional description of the topic.
• Author — author information
• Copyright — copyright information
• Content Id — The content identifier for the last content system.
2. From the Language list, select the preferred language for the metadata.
3. Provide other information as required by the metadata type selected. Click Submit when
finished.
Editing Metadata
1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit topic screen, click Edit next to the metadata to
modify.
editing.

Delivery Management
Deleting Metadata
To delete metadata from a topic:
1. From the MetaData tab on the Edit topic screen, check the box next to each metadata
to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all metadata.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected topic meta data?”
displays.
meta data screen.
Deleting a Topic
To delete a topic:
1. From the Topics screen, check the boxes next to the topics to delete. Check the box at
the top of the column to quickly select all topics.
2. Click Delete topic.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected topics?” displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited topic by clicking Delete topic on the Edit topic
screen.
Managing Topic Rights
NOTE: Rights on topics are granted per content system. Only those back-office children
groups of groups on which you have rights are listed. You may grant only those
rights you already have on topics.
Adding Topic Rights
To grant topic access to a back-office group:
1. From the Topics screen (Figure 9.50 on page 369), click Administration rights.
3 The Administration rights screen displays (Figure 9.56 on page 378).

Delivery Management
2. From the Content system list, select a content system from which to display associated
rights. Only services on which you have rights are listed.
Topic Rights” on page 18.
4. From the Groups list, select the groups to associate with selected rights. Press and hold
5. Click Add right.

3 The newly granted rights and associated groups are listed on the right side of the
screen.
Revoking Topic Rights
To remove topic access from a group, click the next to each granted right to remove.

Delivery Management
Publishing Topics
To publish a topic is to associate them to bundles and offers in order for associated content to
be downloaded by end-users.
Two publishing options are available:

• Publish topics in an existing offer — The publications wizard creates a bundle for each
selected topic and associates it to a compatible pattern. All created bundles are
associated to a single offer.
• Publish topics in new offers — The publications wizard creates a bundle and offer for
each selected topic.
To publish topics:
1. From the Topics screen (Figure 9.50 on page 369), select the topics to publish, then click
Publish.
3 The Publish Topics screen displays.
Figure 9.57: Publish Topics Screen

Delivery Management
2. From the Type list, select the type of publication: New offer (topics will be associated
with a new offer and a new bundle) or Existing offer (topics will be associated with a
new bundle in an existing offer).
3. If you selected New offer:

• In the Offer name field, enter the name of the new offer. By default, offers are named
after their associated topics. You can add text before or after the topic name.
• In the Description field, enter a description for the offer (optional).
• From the End-user service list, select an end-user service in which the topic will be
published.
• To create bundles for topics that are not yet associated with a bundle, select Yes next
to Skip associated topics.
• From the Application ID list, select the application ID for the new offer.
• From the Status list, select the status of the new offer.
• From the Categories list, select one or several categories to be associated with the
new offer. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple categories.
• In the Bundle name field, enter the name of the new bundle(s). By default, bundles
are named after their associated topics. You can add text before or after the topic
name.
• From the Session sequence list, select the session sequence for the new bundle(s).
• From the Status list, select the status of the new bundle(s).
4. If you selected Existing offer:

• To create bundles for topics that are not yet associated with a bundle, select Yes next
to Skip associated topics.
• From the End-user service list, select an end-user service in which the topic will be
published.
• From the Select offer list, select a parent offer in the selected service. A new bundle
is created for each selected topic and is associated to the selected offer.
• In the Bundle name field, enter the name of the new bundle(s). By default, bundles
are named after their associated topics. You can add text before or after the topic
name.
• From the Session sequence list, select the session sequence for the new bundle(s).
• From the Status list, select the status of the new bundle(s).

Delivery Management

3 The topic is published, and the Published topics screen displays a list of all published
topics. Click any offer or bundle name in the list to edit. For information about editing
offers or bundles, see “Editing an Offer” on page 314 or “Editing a Bundle Template” on
page 318.
NOTE: If errors occurred during the publication process, they are reported on the
Published topics screen. If no errors occurred, this line item is equal to
None.
Managing Content Systems
Content systems are repositories from which Content Manager retrieves content and
metadata, using them to generate deliverable content. By default, two content systems are
automatically created:
• Local ContentSystem By Bundle — the default content system for all “by content
id” topics
• Local ContentSystem By Category — the default content system for all “by
category” topics
Viewing Content Systems
To view content systems:
1. From the Delivery menu, select Content > Content systems.

3 The Content systems screen displays a list of content systems.
Figure 9.58: Content systems Screen

Delivery Management
Using the Content Systems Screen
The Content systems screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in
With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Content systems screen, you can perform the
following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a content system to edit. For more information, see
“Editing a Content System” on page 384.
• Click New content system to create a new content system. For more information,
see “Creating a New Content System” on page 382.
• Click Delete content systems to remove all selected content systems. For more
information, see “Deleting a Content System” on page 385.
Searching Content Systems
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of content systems
To manage category filters:
1. From the Content systems screen (Figure 9.58 on page 381), click Edit filters.
3 The Content systems > Filters screen displays.
Figure 9.59: Content systems > Filters Screen
Creating a New Content System
To create a new content system:
1. From the Content system screen (Figure 9.58 on page 381), click New content
system.
3 The New content system screen displays (Figure 9.60 on page 383).

Delivery Management
NOTE: The New content system function is also available when searching for or editing a
content system. For more information, see “Searching Content Systems” on
page 382 and “Editing a Content System” on page 384.
Figure 9.60: New content system Screen
2. From the Type list, select the type of content system. Custom content systems can be
added.
3. In the Name field, enter a name for the content system.
4. In the Description field, enter a short description of the content system (optional).
5. From the “Content” backoffice service name list, select the back-office service to be
associated with the system. This service must be registered with the Content Manager
platform.
6. If the Enable topic synchronization option is checked, items on the content system
and “by bundleid” topics are synchronized.
NOTE: If a content system is deleted during synchronization, the associated topic is

deleted as well.
7. If the Enable capabilities synchronization for topics “by content id” option is
checked, content capabilities (a list of compatible devices for each content) is
synchronized with “by bundleid” topic capabilities.
NOTE: If a device is deactivated within content during synchronization, it is automatically

deactivated for the associated topic as well.
8. Click Submit.

Delivery Management
3 The content system is created and the Content systems screen (Figure 9.58 on
page 381) displays.
Editing a Content System
To edit a content system:
1. From the Content systems screen (Figure 9.58 on page 381), click the name of a
content system to modify.
3 The Edit content system screen displays.
Figure 9.61: Edit content system Screen
2. Make changes to the content system as necessary. For information about content system
details, see “Creating a New Content System” on page 382.

Delivery Management
Deleting a Content System
CAUTION: If you delete content systems, contents may become undeliverable by

Content Manager.
To delete a content system:
1. From the Content systems screen (Figure 9.58 on page 381), select the content
systems to remove, and click Delete content system.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected content
systems?” displays.

NOTE: You can also delete an edited content system by clicking Delete content system
on the Edit content system screen.

10 System Configuration
Cache Management ............................................................................................... 387

Viewing and Modifying Cache Management Details ..................................................... 387
Managing Messaging Credentials ............................................................................. 391
Viewing Credentials ............................................................................................... 391
Searching Credentials ............................................................................................ 392
Creating New Credentials ....................................................................................... 393
Editing Credentials ................................................................................................ 394
Deleting Credentials............................................................................................... 394
Managing Message Patterns .................................................................................... 395
Viewing Message Patterns....................................................................................... 395
Searching Message Patterns.................................................................................... 396
Creating a New Message Pattern ............................................................................. 396
Editing a Message Pattern....................................................................................... 399
Deleting a Message Pattern..................................................................................... 403
Managing Session Sequences .................................................................................. 403
Viewing Session Sequences .................................................................................... 403
Searching Session Sequences ................................................................................. 404
Creating a New Session Sequence ........................................................................... 404
Editing a Session Sequence .................................................................................... 406
Deleting a Session Sequence .................................................................................. 406
Managing Workflows .............................................................................................. 408
Viewing Workflows................................................................................................. 408
Searching Workflows.............................................................................................. 409
Creating a New Workflow........................................................................................ 409
Editing a Workflow................................................................................................. 410
Deleting a Workflow............................................................................................... 423
Managing System Administration Rights ................................................................... 424
Viewing Bulk Content Processes .............................................................................. 425
Searching Bulk Content Processes ........................................................................... 426
Accessing a Bulk Content Process ............................................................................ 426
Managing Sessions ................................................................................................ 428
Viewing Session Reports......................................................................................... 428
Editing Session Details ........................................................................................... 430
Purging Sessions ................................................................................................... 432
Managing Retry Sessions ........................................................................................ 432
Viewing Retry Sessions .......................................................................................... 432
Searching Retry Sessions ....................................................................................... 433
Viewing Session Details.......................................................................................... 433
Viewing Session Details.......................................................................................... 433
Managing Purges ................................................................................................... 435
Viewing Purges ..................................................................................................... 436
Searching Purged Sessions ..................................................................................... 437
Viewing Purge Details ............................................................................................ 437
Deleting Bulk Content Process Reports ..................................................................... 439
Managing Session and Bulk Process Rights................................................................ 439

System Configuration
This chapter describes the Device, System management and Tracking portions of the
Delivery menu, which allow you to manage all elements necessary for configuring the
delivery system. For additional information about the Catalog and Content portions of the
Delivery menu, see “Delivery Management” on page 299.
Cache Management
The Device portion of the Delivery menu allows you to manage authorized devices and their
profiles by service.
Viewing and Modifying Cache Management Details
To view and modify cache management details:
1. From the Delivery menu, select Device > Cache management.

3 The Brand tab on the Cache management screen displays.
Figure 10.1: Cache management Screen — Brand Tab

Using the Brand Tab
The Brand tab allows you to specify the device brands for which to manage cache.
To view device brands:
1. From the Service list, select a service from which to view brands.

3 A list of brands associated with the selected service displays.
3. Check the boxes next to each brand to include in cache. Uncheck the boxes next to each
brand to exclude. Click Select all to select all brands, or Unselect all to deselect all
brands.
Using the Model Tab
The Model tab on the Cache management screen allows you to manage device model
cache.
Figure 10.2: Cache management Screen — Model Tab

To view device models:
1. From the Service list, select a service from which to view device models.
2. To narrow your search further, from the Select brands list, select one or more brands
from which to view device models.

3 A list of models associated with the selected service and brands displays.
4. Check the boxes next to each model to include in cache. Uncheck the boxes next to each
model to exclude. Click Select all to select all models, or Unselect all to deselect all
models.
Using the Device Profile Tab
The Device profile tab on the Cache management screen allows you to manage device
profile cache.
Figure 10.3: Cache management Screen — Device profile Tab
To view device profiles:
1. From the Service list, select a service from which to view device profiles.

2. To narrow your search further:

• From the Select brands list, select a brand from which to view device profiles.
• From the Select model list, select one or more device models from which to view
device profiles. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple models.
• Select whether or not to display and select profiles that are inherited.

3 A list of device profiles associated with the selected criteria displays.
4. Check the boxes next to each profile to include in cache. Uncheck the boxes next to each
profile to exclude. Click Select all to select all profiles, or Unselect all to deselect all
profiles.
Using the Device Profile Capability Tab
The Device profile capability tab on the Cache management screen allows you to
manage device profile capabilities cache.
Figure 10.4: Cache management Screen — Device profile capability Tab

To view device profile capabilities:
1. From the Service list, select a service from which to view profile capabilities.
2. To narrow your search further:

• From the Select brands list, select a brand from which to view capabilities.
• From the Select model list, select one or more device models from which to view
capabilities. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple models.
• Select whether to select a profile or feature for which to search. Select one or more
items from the list. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple items.
• Select whether or not to display and select profiles that are inherited.

3 A list of capabilities associated with the selected criteria displays.
4. Check the boxes next to each capability to include in cache. Uncheck the boxes next to
each capability to exclude. Click Select all to select all capabilities, or Unselect all to
deselect all capabilities.
Managing Messaging Credentials
Messaging credentials are login and password information used by Content Manager to
submit messages on a messaging system. Messaging credentials are associated to different
account services. For more information about account services, see “Managing Services” on
page 61.
Viewing Credentials
To view all previously defined messaging credentials:
1. From the Delivery menu, select System management > Messaging.

3 The Messaging screen displays a list of end-user services with defined messaging
credentials (Figure 10.5 on page 392).

Figure 10.5: Messaging Screen
Using the Messaging Screen
The Messaging screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content
Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Messaging screen, you can perform the following
tasks:
• From the End-user service column, click a service for which to edit credentials. For
more information, see “Editing Credentials” on page 394.
• Click New credentials to create new credentials for a service. For more information,
see “Creating New Credentials” on page 393.
• Click Delete credentials to remove all selected credentials. For more information, see
“Deleting Credentials” on page 394.
Searching Credentials
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of services with
credentials specific to that criteria.
To manage messaging credential filters:
1. From the Messaging screen (Figure 10.5 on page 392), click Edit filters.
3 The Messaging > Filters screen displays (Figure 10.6 on page 393).

Figure 10.6: Messaging > Filters Screen
Creating New Credentials
To create new messaging credentials:
1. From the Messaging screen, click New credentials.

3 The Create credentials screen displays.
NOTE: The New credentials function is also available when searching for and editing
credentials. For more information, see “Searching Credentials” on page 392 and
“Editing Credentials” on page 394.
Figure 10.7: Create credentials Screen
2. From the End-user service list, select the service for which to create credentials.
3. In the Login field, enter the login name used to access the external messaging system.
4. In the Password field, enter the password for the login used to access the external
messaging system.

5. In the Confirm password field, enter the password again to confirm.
6. Click Submit.
3 The Edit credentials screen displays, allowing you to modify the new credentials. For
more information about editing credentials, see “Editing Credentials” on page 394.
Editing Credentials
To edit credentials:
1. From the Messaging credentials screen (Figure 10.5 on page 392), click the name of a
service for which to modify credentials.
3 The Edit credentials screen displays.
Figure 10.8: Edit credentials Screen
2. Modify the login and password as necessary.
Deleting Credentials
CAUTION: If you delete credentials, Content Manager may no longer be able to send or
deliver messages.
To delete messaging credentials:
1. From the Messaging credentials screen (Figure 10.5 on page 392), check the box next
to one or more services that have the credentials to remove. Check the box at the top of
the column to quickly select all credentials.

2. Click Delete credentials.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete the selected credentials?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also delete edited credentials by clicking Delete credentials on the Edit
credentials screen.
Managing Message Patterns
Message patterns are modules that enable the generation of downloadable elements from
contents.
Viewing Message Patterns
To view all available message patterns:
1. From the Delivery menu, select System management > Message patterns.
3 The Message patterns screen displays.
Figure 10.9: Message patterns Screen

Using the Message Patterns Screen
The Message patterns screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in
With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Message Patterns screen, you can perform the
following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a message pattern to edit. For more information, see
“Editing a Message Pattern” on page 399.
• Click New message pattern to create a new pattern. For more information, see
“Creating a New Message Pattern” on page 396.
• Click Delete message patterns to remove all selected patterns. For more
information, see “Deleting a Message Pattern” on page 403.
Searching Message Patterns
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of message patterns
To manage message pattern filters:
1. From the Message patterns screen (Figure 10.9 on page 395), click Edit filters.
3 The Message patterns > Filters screen displays.
Figure 10.10: Message patterns > Filters Screen
Creating a New Message Pattern
To create a new message pattern:
1. From the Message pattern screen, click New message pattern.

3 The Create message pattern screen displays (Figure 10.11 on page 397).

Figure 10.11: Create message pattern Screen
2. From the Message pattern type list, select a type of message pattern to create. The
following table describes the types of message patterns available:
NOTE: Most patterns allow you to modify only the name of the pattern. Those patterns
marked with an asterisk (*) allow for total customization.
Message Pattern Description

WAP Video pattern formats video extracts for delivery by WAP
SMS Animation pattern formats animations for delivery by SMS
SMS Logo Screensaver pattern formats screensaver logos for delivery by SMS
WAP Java pattern formats Java Applications for delivery by WAP
WAP Picture pattern formats pictures for delivery by WAP
SMS System pattern formats SMS messages
WAP File pattern formats any file for delivery by WAP
SMS Logo Group pattern formats black and white group logos for delivery by SMS
Rich text EMAIL pattern formats emails from “RICH TEXT” content
SMS Ringtone Monophonic pattern formats monophonic ringtones for delivery by SMS
SMS Logo Operator pattern formats operator logos for delivery by SMS
*Rich text SMS pattern formats SMS from “RICH TEXT” content (fully customizable)
SMS Logo Color pattern formats color logos for delivery by SMS
WAP Ringtone Polyphonic pattern formats polyphonic ringtones for delivery by WAP
MMS Postcard pattern formats multimedia postcards for delivery by MMS
WAP Application pattern formats smartphone applications for delivery by WAP
*SMS Message pattern formats SMS messages (fully customizable)
*MMS pattern formats MMS messages (fully customizable)
Rich text MMS pattern formats MMS from “RICH TEXT” content
*EMAIL pattern formats email messages (fully customizable)
WAP Realtone pattern formats realtones for delivery by WAP
SMS Logo Message pattern formats message logos for delivery by SMS
WAP Animation pattern formats animated pictures for delivery by WAP

3. In the Name field, change the pattern name as necessary. The following table describes
the additional information available to customize on the Rich text SMS, SMS Message,
MMS, and EMAIL patterns:
Field Description Rich Text SMS MMS EMAIL

SMS Message
Header Enter the text message to be placed
before the content retrieved by the topic.
3 3 3 3
Footer Enter the text message to be placed after
the content retrieved by the topic.
3 3 3 3
Receipt Select True to request a deliver receipt 3 3
for all sent messages.
Truncate messages Select True to automatically truncate
messages at 160 characters.
3 3
Concatenate message Select Binary mode to enable transpar-
ent message concatenation: messages
3 3
longer than 160 characters are split over
several SMS and tagged so that the
device automatically concatenate the dif-
ferent parts upon reception.
NOTE: Not all devices support this fea-

ture.
Select Text mode to enable automatic

splitting of long messages into several
numbered text SMS.
Concatenate message Select True to concatenate messages (if
several content are to be delivered simul-
3 3
taneously) or False to deliver the differ-
ent content in different messages.
SMS template Enter the script used to format the mes-
sage. The script must be compliant with
3 3
the Velocity language. For more informa-
tion, see http://jakarta.apache.org/
velocity/user-guide.html.
Return receipt Select True to request a deliver receipt
for all sent messages.
3 3
Ignore image Select False to attach pictures retrieved 3 3
from the content to the formatted MMS or
email.
Ignore sound Select False to attach sounds retrieved
from the content to the formatted MMS or
3 3
email.
Ignore video Select False to attach video retrieved
from the content to the formatted MMS.
3
Originator The default email address or MMS subject
to be used in the From field.
3 3
Default subject The default subject of the email or MMS. 3 3
callbackMMSPushPath Select the path to be used for MMS push 3
(only if MMS Push = True).
callbackMMSPushURL Select the URL to be used to retrieve the
MMS (only if MMS Push = True).
3
callbackMMSPushParam Enter parameters to be used to generate
the push notification (only if MMS Push =
3
True).

Field Description Rich Text SMS MMS EMAIL

SMS Message
MMSPush Select True to bypass MMS-C and send 3
only MMS notification by SMS to end-
users. User devices will then directly
download MMS content from Content
Manager. Select False to push MMS mes-
sages to an external MMS-C.
MMS template Enter the script used to format the mes-
sage. The script must be compliant with
3
the Velocity language. For more informa-
tion, see http://jakarta.apache.org/
velocity/user-guide.html.
Text template Enter the script used to format the mes- 3
sage in text mode. The script must be
compliant with the Velocity language. For
more information, see http://
jakarta.apache.org/velocity/user-
guide.html.
HTML template Enter the script used to format the mes-
sage in HTML mode. The script must be
3
compliant with the Velocity language. For
more information, see http://
jakarta.apache.org/velocity/user-
guide.html.
NOTE: If you enter a script, it is applied to ALL content generated by the pattern. If you
want a script to apply only to one content, specify the script when editing content.
For more information, see “Editing Content” on page 140.
4. Click Submit.
3 The pattern is created, and the Edit message pattern screen displays (Figure 10.12
on page 400). For more information about editing a message pattern, see “Editing a
Message Pattern” on page 399.
Editing a Message Pattern
To edit a message pattern:
1. From the Message patterns screen (Figure 10.9 on page 395), click the name of a
message pattern to modify.
3 The Details tab on the Edit message pattern screen displays (Figure 10.12 on
page 400).
NOTE: The Details tab on the Edit message pattern screen also displays
immediately after a new pattern is created. For information about creating a
message pattern, see “Creating a New Message Pattern” on page 396.

Figure 10.12: Edit message pattern Screen > Details Tab
The Edit message pattern screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click New message pattern to create a new pattern. For more information, see
“Creating a New Message Pattern” on page 396.
• Click Delete message pattern to delete the edited pattern. For more information,
see “Deleting a Message Pattern” on page 403.
• Click the Details tab to modify general information about the pattern. For more
• Click the Data patterns tab to modify data patterns associated with the edited
message pattern. For more information, see “Using the Data Patterns Tab” on
page 400.
The Details tab on the Edit message pattern screen (Figure 10.12) allows you to modify
the general information determined when the pattern was created.
NOTE: With a few exceptions, most message patterns allow you to customize only the
pattern name. For detailed information about the information available for each
message pattern, see “Creating a New Message Pattern” on page 396.
Using the Data Patterns Tab
The Data patterns tab on the Edit message pattern screen (Figure 10.13 on page 401)
allows you manage a message’s data patterns. Data patterns define how the different
elements of a content are combined to form a downloadable content.

Figure 10.13: Edit message pattern Screen — Data patterns Tab
Adding Data Patterns to a Message Pattern
To add a data pattern to a message pattern:
1. From the Content system list, select a content system for the data pattern.
2. From the Content template list, select a content template for the data pattern.
3. From the Data pattern type list, select a data pattern type for the data pattern.
4. Click Add new data pattern.

3 The Edit data pattern screen displays (Figure 10.14 on page 402), allowing you to
verify or delete the data pattern information.

Figure 10.14: Edit data pattern Screen
Validating a Data Pattern
To validate a data pattern:
1. If there are data patterns associated with the message pattern, they are listed on the
right side of the Data patterns tab (Figure 10.13). Click the name of the content
template used in the existing data pattern to modify.
3 The Edit data pattern screen displays.
NOTE: The Edit data pattern screen also displays immediately after a data pattern is
created. The information on the Edit data pattern screen is view-only.
2. To continue using the selected data pattern, click Submit.
Deleting a Data Pattern
To delete a data pattern:
1. From the Data patterns tab on the Edit message pattern screen (Figure 10.13 on
page 401), check the box next to one or more data patterns to remove. Check the box at
the top of the column to quickly select all data patterns.
2. Click Delete data patterns.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected data patterns?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited data pattern by clicking Delete data pattern on the
Edit data pattern screen.

Deleting a Message Pattern
CAUTION: If a message pattern is deleted, Content Manager may no longer be able to

generate download messages.
To delete a message pattern:
1. From the Message patterns screen (Figure 10.9 on page 395), check the box next to
one or more message patterns to remove. Check the box at the top of the column to
quickly select all message patterns.
2. Click Delete message patterns.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited message pattern by clicking Delete message
pattern on the Edit message pattern screen.
Managing Session Sequences
A session sequence determines the order in which a delivery is processed.
Viewing Session Sequences
To view a list of available session sequences:
1. From the Delivery menu, select System management > Session sequences.
3 The Session sequences screen displays.
Figure 10.15: Session sequences Screen

Using the Session Sequences Screen
The Session sequences screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in
With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Session sequences screen, you can perform
the following tasks:
• From the Name column, click a session sequence to edit. For more information, see
“Editing a Session Sequence” on page 406.
• Click New session sequence to create a new sequence. For more information, see
“Creating a New Session Sequence” on page 404.
• Click Delete session sequences to remove all selected sequences. For more
information, see “Deleting a Session Sequence” on page 406.
Searching Session Sequences
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of session sequences
To manage session sequence filters:
1. From the Session sequences screen (Figure 10.15 on page 403), click Edit filters.
3 The Session sequences > Filters screen displays.
Figure 10.16: Session sequences > Filters Screen
Creating a New Session Sequence
To create a new session sequence:
1. From the Session sequence screen, click New session sequence.

3 The Create session sequence screen displays (Figure 10.17 on page 405).

Figure 10.17: Create session sequence Screen
2. From the Type list, select a session sequence type. Sequence types available include:
• Workflow based — topics are processed as defined in the selected workflow.
• Schedule topics — the system processes the first X number of topics inside the
bundle, then waits for a specified period of time before processing the next X number
of topics.
• Simple — all topics associated to the bundle are processed simultaneously.
3. In the Name field, enter a session sequence name for reference.
4. If the session sequence type is Workflow based, select a workflow from the Workflow
drop-down list. Workflow types available include:
• Workflow Simple Interface MO: A workflow defined automatically to enable direct
content download using a single MO message.
• SubscriptionWorkflow: A workflow that automatically subscribes a user to a certain
bundle.
• UnsubscriptionWorkflow: A workflow that automatically unsubscribes a user from a
certain bundle.
5. If the session sequence type is Schedule topics, specify the following information:
• how long (in milliseconds) the system should wait between processes
• the number of topics to be processed simultaneously
6. If the session sequence type is Simple, check or uncheck the Requires acknowledge
box to indicate whether or not the system should wait for a receipt from the previous
topic before moving on to the next topic.
7. Enter a description of the workflow (optional).

8. Click Submit.
3 The Session sequences screen displays (Figure 10.15 on page 403).
Editing a Session Sequence
To edit a session sequence:
1. From the Session sequences screen, click the name of the sequence to modify.
3 The Edit session sequence screen displays.
NOTE: The information available for modifying depends on the sequence type selected
when the sequence was created. For information about sequence types, see
“Creating a New Session Sequence” on page 404.
Deleting a Session Sequence
CAUTION: If a session sequence is deleted, Content Manager may no longer be able to

trigger certain delivery operations.
To delete a session sequence:
1. From the Session sequences screen (Figure 10.15 on page 403), check the box next to
one or more sequences to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select
all sequences.
2. Click Delete session sequences.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected session
sequences?” displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited session sequence by clicking Delete sequence on
the Edit session sequence screen. For more information about editing a session
sequence, see “Editing a Session Sequence” on page 406.

Understanding Session Sequences
There are four types of session sequences:

• Simple — This session sequence is standard. The following parameters are required
for Simple session sequences:
• Requires acknowledge: If enabled, the sequence waits for an
acknowledgement before processing the next topic. The sequence is ended only
if messages are received by the handset.
• Requires content: If enabled, an error occurs in the session if there is no
content found. This parameter must be checked if receiving content is required.
• Workflow — This session sequence is standard. The following parameters are
required for Workflow session sequences:
• Requires acknowledge: If enabled, the sequence waits for an
acknowledgement before processing the next topic. The sequence is ended only
if messages are received by the handset.
• Schedule topics — The system processes the first X number of topics inside the
bundle, then waits for a specified period of time before processing the next X number
of topics. The following parameters are required for Schedule topics session
sequences:
• Waiting time (in milliseconds): Specify the amount of time the system
should wait between each process.
• Topics counts: Specify how many topics should be processed at the same
time.
• Failsafe — This sequence is used to process WAP content and resend it as long as a
download has not started. After a while, a bookmark leading to the content is sent,
and in the end, an SMS message containing the URL of the content is sent. The
following parameters are required for Failsafe session sequences:
• WAP Push topics: Reference to the topic and related content (SMS System
Message only) used to create the WAP Push. The content and topic must be
created before the sequence.
• WAP Push pattern: Reference to the WAP Push message pattern used to send
the WAP content.
• Time between first and second WAP Push: The amount of time (in
minutes) a user has to download the content before the next WAP Push is sent.
• Time between WAP Push and WAP bookmark: The amount of time (in
minutes) a user has to download the content before the bookmark is sent.
• Enable bookmark: If disabled, the bookmark phase is skipped and the SMS
message is sent directly.
• Bookmark topic: Reference to the topic and related content (SMS System
Message only) used to create the WAP Bookmark. The content and topic must
be created before the sequence.
• Time between WAP bookmark and SMS: The amount of time (in minutes) a
user has to download the content before the SMS message is sent. This is used
only if bookmark is enabled in the sequence.

• SMS topic: Reference to the topic and related content (SMS System Message
only) used to create the SMS message. The content and topic must be created
before the sequence.
NOTE: The SMS System Message must contain “$url” in order for the URL of
the content to be sent in the SMS message.
• SMS pattern: Reference to the SMS message pattern used to send the WAP
content.
• Time after SMS: The amount of time (in minutes) a user has to download the
content before a time out error occurs.
• Max number of retries: The maximum number of allowed download retries.
For example, the download may be available three times, but the fourth time
it’s downloaded, the content is not sent.
• Require content: If enabled, an error occurs if no content is found. This
parameter must be checked if receiving content is required.
Managing Workflows
Workflows are modules that describe how the system should behave when certain events are
triggered. Each workflow is made up of states and actions, which in turn are linked by
conditions and rules for both incoming and outgoing processes. For more information about
states and actions, see “Using the State/Actions Tab” on page 411.
Viewing Workflows
To view a list of available workflows:
1. From the Delivery menu, select System management > Workflows.

3 The Workflows screen displays.
Figure 10.18: Workflows Screen

Using the Workflows Screen
The Workflows screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content
Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Workflows screen, you can perform the following
tasks:
• From the Name column, click a workflow to edit. For more information, see “Editing a
Workflow” on page 410.
• Click New workflow to create a new workflow. For more information, see “Creating a
New Workflow” on page 409.
• Click Delete workflows to remove all selected workflows. For more information, see
“Deleting a Workflow” on page 423.
Searching Workflows
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of workflows specific to
that criteria.
To manage workflow filters:
1. From the Workflows screen (Figure 10.18 on page 408), click Edit filters.
3 The Workflows > Filters screen displays.
Figure 10.19: Workflows > Filters Screen
Creating a New Workflow
To create a new workflow:
1. From the Workflows screen, click New workflow.

3 The Create workflow screen displays (Figure 10.20 on page 410).

Figure 10.20: Create workflow Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the workflow.
3. In the Description field, enter a short description of the workflow (optional).
4. Click Submit.
3 The workflow is created, and the Workflows screen (Figure 10.18 on page 408)
displays.
Editing a Workflow
To edit a workflow:
1. From the Workflows screen, click the name of the workflow to modify.
3 The Details tab on the Edit workflow screen displays.
Figure 10.21: Edit workflow Screen — Details Tab

The Edit workflow screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Delete workflow to delete the edited workflow. For more information, see
• Click the Details tab to modify the name and description of the workflow. For more
• Click the States/Actions tab to modify states and actions associated with the edited
workflow. For more information, see “Using the State/Actions Tab” on page 411.
• Click the Conditions tab to modify the conditions associated to the edited workflow.
For more information, see “Using the Conditions Tab” on page 419.
The Details tab on the Edit workflow screen allows you to change the name and
description of the selected workflow. Click Submit to save any changes.
Using the State/Actions Tab
The State/Actions tab on the Edit workflow screen (Figure 10.22 on page 412) allows you
to manage the states and actions associated with the selected workflow.
If there are no states or actions for the workflow, you can create them by clicking New state
or New action. For more information, see “Creating a State” on page 413 and “Creating an
Action” on page 416.
If there are states and actions currently associated with the workflow, the States/Actions
tab displays them in a table.

Figure 10.22: Edit workflow Screen — States/Actions Tab
The table of existing states and actions allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Select an item or items using the check box located in the first column on the left.
Click the box at the top of the column to quickly select all items in the list.
• From the Name column, click the name of a state to modify the state. For more
information, see “Editing a State” on page 414.
• From the Incoming conditions and rules column, click an item to modify. For more
information, see “Editing a Condition” on page 421.
• From the State outputs and outgoing conditions column, click an item to modify.
For more information, see “Editing a Condition” on page 421.
• From the Action outputs and outgoing conditions column, click an item to modify.
For more information, see “Editing a Condition” on page 421.
• Click New state to create a new state for the workflow, For more information, see
“Creating a State” on page 413.
• Click Delete states to remove all selected states from the workflow. For more
information, see “Deleting States” on page 415.

• Click New action to create a new action for the workflow. For more information, see
“Creating an Action” on page 416.
• Click Delete actions to remove all selected actions. For more information, see
“Deleting Actions” on page 418.
Creating a State
A state defines the beginning, in-process, and end point in a workflow.
To create a state for the selected workflow:
1. From the States/Actions tab, click New state.

3 The Create state screen displays.
Figure 10.23: Create state Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the state.
3. From the State status list, select a status for the state. Status options include:
• Initial — the beginning point in the workflow
• Intermediary — the in-process point in the workflow
• Final — the end point in the workflow
4. From the Session status list, select a status for the session. Status options include:
• Pending — the session has not yet started
• Processing wait — the session is currently being processed, but is waiting for the
next operation
NOTE: If you select Processing wait as the session status, enter the amount of
time in seconds to wait between operations.

5. Click Submit.
3 The States/Actions tab displays the list of created states for the workflow.
Editing a State
To modify a state:
1. From the States/Actions tab (Figure 10.22 on page 412), click the name of the state to
edit.
3 The Edit state screen displays.
Figure 10.24: Edit state Screen
2. From the Edit state screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Change the name of the state, click Submit, and return to the States/Actions tab.
• Modify the output associated with the state (if present). To modify selected output for
the state, click the output name.
3 The Edit output screen displays (Figure 10.25 on page 415).

Figure 10.25: Edit output Screen
a. From the Edit output screen, you can:

• Change the name of the output, click Submit, and return to the Edit state
screen.
• Modify the condition associated with the output (if present). To modify the
condition, click the condition name.
3 The Edit condition screen displays. For information about editing a
condition, see “Editing a Condition” on page 421.
To return to the Edit state screen, click the state name or > Edit state.
2. Click Submit.
3. Click > Edit workflow to return to the Edit workflow screen (Figure 10.21 on
page 410).
Deleting States
To delete a state:
1. From the States/Actions tab, check the box next to one or more states to delete. Check
the box at the top of the column to quickly select all states.
2. Click Delete states.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected states?” displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited state by clicking Delete state on the Edit state
screen.

Creating an Action
To create an action in the selected workflow:
1. From the States/Actions tab, click New action.

3 The Create action screen displays.
Figure 10.26: Create action Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the action.
3. From the Type list, select an action type. Action types include:
• Multishot Parsing Model MO: uses keywords not shown to end-users (SMS should
contain the Model keyword)
• Subscription Parsing MO: subscribe or unsubscribe a user
• Send topic: deliver a topic
• Get account subscription: retrieve an end-user account and its subscription
• Send bundle: deliver a bundle
• Multishot Parsing Bundle MO: uses keywords not shown to end-users (SMS should
contain the Bundle keyword)
• Get account: retrieve an end-user account
• Child session creation: create a new child delivery session
• Subscribe user: subscribe an end-user to a bundle
• Unsubscribe user: unsubscribe an end-user from a bundle
• Parsing MO: parse an SMS MO to retrieve specific keywords

• Get account unsubscription: retrieve an end-user account and its unsubscription

• Multishot Parsing Brand MO: uses keywords not shown to end-users (SMS should
contain the Brand keyword)
NOTE: Additional information required depends on the type of action created.
4. Click Submit.
3 The States/Actions tab displays the list of created actions for the workflow.
Editing an Action
To modify an action:
1. From the States/Actions tab (Figure 10.22 on page 412), click the name of the action
to edit.
3 The Edit action screen displays.
Figure 10.27: Edit action Screen
2. From the Edit action screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Change the name of the action and the other information required for the selected
action type, then click Submit to save any changes.
• Modify the output associated with the action (if present). To modify selected output for
the action, click the output name.
3 The Edit output screen displays (Figure 10.28 on page 418).

Figure 10.28: Edit action > Edit output Screen
From the Edit output screen, you can:

• Change the name of the output, click Submit, and return to the Edit action
screen.
• Modify the condition associated with the output (if present). To modify the
condition, click the condition name.
3 The Edit condition screen displays. For more information, see “Editing a
Condition” on page 421.
• To return to the Edit action screen, click the action name or > Edit action.
3. Click Submit.
4. Click > Edit workflow to return to the Edit workflow screen (Figure 10.21 on
page 410).
Deleting Actions
CAUTION: Deleting an action may cause the parent workflow to become inactive.
To delete actions:
1. From the States/Actions tab, check the box next to one or more existing actions to
delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all actions.
2. Click Delete actions.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected actions?” displays.

NOTE: You can also delete an edited action by clicking Delete action on the Edit action
screen.

Using the Conditions Tab
The Conditions tab on the Edit workflow screen allows you to manage the conditions
associated with the selected workflow.
If there are no conditions for the workflow, you can create them by clicking New condition.
For more information, see “Creating a State” on page 413.
If there are conditions currently associated with the workflow, the Conditions tab displays
them in a table.
Figure 10.29: Edit workflow Screen — Conditions Tab
The table of existing conditions allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Select an item or items using the check boxes located in the first column on the left.
Click the box at the top of the column to quickly select all items in the list.
• From the Name column, click the name of a condition to modify. For more
• From the Origins (states or actions/outputs) column, click an item to modify. For
more information, see “Editing a State” on page 414 and “Editing an Action” on
page 417.
• From the Rules and destinations column, click an item to modify. For more
• Click New condition to create a new condition for the workflow, For more
information, see “Creating a Condition” on page 420.
• Click Delete condition to remove all selected conditions from the workflow. For more
information, see “Deleting Conditions” on page 423.

Creating a Condition
To create a condition in the selected workflow:
1. From the Conditions tab, click New condition.

3 The Create condition screen displays.
Figure 10.30: Create condition Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the condition.
3. From the Type list, select a condition type. Condition type options include:
• Code OK — indicates that user input is correct and valid
• Always true — indicates a pass-through condition where no validation is required.
4. From the Origins list, select one or more condition origins. Press and hold Ctrl to select
multiple origins.
5. Click Submit.
3 The Conditions tab displays the newly created condition in a list of conditions for the
workflow.

Editing a Condition
To modify a condition:
1. From the Conditions tab (Figure 10.29 on page 419), click the name of the condition to
edit.
3 The Edit condition screen displays.
Figure 10.31: Edit condition Screen
2. Make changes to the condition name and origins as necessary.
Creating Condition Rules. To create a new rule for the condition, from the Edit condition
screen, click New condition rule.
3 The Create condition rule screen displays (Figure 10.32 on page 422).

Figure 10.32: Create condition rule Screen
1. In the Name field, enter a name for the rule.
2. From the Type list, select the type of condition (true).
3. From the Destination list, select the destination of the condition rule.
4. Click Submit.
Editing Condition Rules. To edit an existing condition rule, from the Edit condition screen
(Figure 10.31 on page 421), click the name of the rule in the list to modify.
3 The Edit condition rule screen displays.
Figure 10.33: Edit condition rule Screen
Make changes to the condition rule as necessary, then click Submit to save any changes.

Deleting Condition Rules. From the Edit condition rule screen, click Remove next to
each rule to delete.
CAUTION: Deleting condition rules may cause the parent workflow to become inactive.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected condition rules?”
displays.
Click Ok to delete, or Cancel to void deletion.
Deleting Conditions
To delete a condition:
1. From the Conditions tab on the Edit workflow screen (Figure 10.29 on page 419),
check the box next to one or more conditions to delete. Check the box at the top of the
column to quickly select all conditions.
2. Click Delete conditions.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected conditions?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited condition by clicking Delete condition on the Edit
condition screen. For more information about editing conditions, see “Editing a
Condition” on page 421.
Deleting a Workflow
NOTE: When a workflow is deleted, any states, actions, and conditions associated with the
workflow are also deleted.
To delete a workflow:
1. From the Workflows screen (Figure 10.18 on page 408), check the box next to one or
more workflows to delete. Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all
workflows.
2. Click Delete workflows.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected workflows?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited workflow by clicking Delete workflow on the Edit
workflow screen. For more information about editing a workflow, see “Editing a
Workflow” on page 410.

Managing System Administration Rights
System administration rights allow back-office group access to system items (credentials,
message patterns, session sequences, and so on).
To define system configuration rights for a back-office group:
1. From the Delivery menu, select System Management > Administration rights.
3 The Administration rights screen displays.
Adding System Administration Rights
1. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of these rights, see “System
Administration Rights” on page 19.
2. Select the groups from the Groups list to which to grant rights. Press and hold Ctrl to
NOTE: Only those back-office children groups of groups to which you have rights
are listed. You may grant only rights that are already assigned to you for
sessions and processes.
3. Click Add right.

3 The rights and associated groups display on the right side of the screen.
Revoking System Administration Rights
To revoke group rights, click the next to each right to remove.

Managing Bulk Content Processes
A bulk process is a content delivery process that is directed toward several recipients. The
Tracking portion of the Delivery menu allows you to manage elements of a bulk process.
Viewing Bulk Content Processes
To view all bulk process operations launched on the platform:
1. From the Delivery menu, select Tracking > Bulk processes.

3 The Bulk processes > Filters screen displays.

3 The Bulk processes screen displays. For information about the Filters screen, see
“Searching Bulk Content Processes” on page 426.
Figure 10.35: Bulk processes Screen
Using the Bulk Processes Screen
The Bulk processes screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in
With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Bulk processes screen, you can perform the
following tasks:
• From the Id column, click a bulk process ID for which to view details. For more
information, see “Accessing a Bulk Content Process” on page 426.
• Click Purge bulk processes to remove all past bulk process reports. For more
information, see “Deleting Bulk Content Process Reports” on page 439.

Searching Bulk Content Processes
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of processes specific to
that criteria.
To manage bulk process filters:
1. From the Bulk processes screen (Figure 10.35 on page 425), click Edit filters.
3 The Bulk processes > Filters screen displays.
Figure 10.36: Bulk processes > Filters Screen
Accessing a Bulk Content Process
To access a process:
1. From Id column on the Bulk process screen, click the process ID to access.
3 The Display bulk information screen displays (Figure 10.37 on page 427).

Figure 10.37: Display bulk information Screen
The Display bulk information screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Restart process to run the open process.
• Click Pause process to temporarily pause the process.
• Click Stop process to halt the process operations.
• Click the Timeslots tab to view the process timeslots.

Managing Sessions
Sessions are unique delivery operations between one bundle and one user. Sessions are
executed when a trigger is activated in a bundle. A process is made up of several sessions.
The Delivery menu allows you to directly manage all authorized session reports.
Viewing Session Reports
To view a report listing all authorized session reports:
1. From the Delivery menu, select Tracking > Sessions.

3 The Search by address tab on the Sessions screen displays.
Figure 10.38: Sessions Screen > Search by address Tab
The Sessions screen includes two tabs that allow you several ways to search sessions:
• Search by address — Lists sessions by addresses or IDs you provide.
• Done sessions with error — List completed sessions in which errors occurred. The
Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of sessions specific to
that criteria. From the Done sessions with error tab, click Edit filters.
3 The Done sessions with error tab displays filter criteria (Figure 10.39 on
page 429).

Figure 10.39: Done sessions with error > Filters Tab
• Enter the criteria on which to search. The amount of information you add to the
filter determines how specific you want to be in your search. For more information
about using filters, see “Using the Filters Screen” on page 8.
If sessions matching your criteria are found for any type of search, the Sessions screen
displays the following information:
• Id — The ID of the bulk operation. Click an item in the Id column to edit. For more
information, see “Editing Session Details” on page 430.
• Delivery bundle — The bundle used for the bulk operation.
• Bulk process (Done sessions with error tab only)— The name of the bulk process.
• Status (Search by address tab only) — The session status: Pending, Processing,
Processing Wait, Sleep, Done, Processing child session.
• Error — The following errors may display:
• None — No error occurred during processing.
• Unexpected — An unexpected and unclassifiable error has occurred during
processing.
• Timeout — Session processing has failed because the time to live expired.
• Interrupted — Session processing has been interrupted by an external actor.
• Formatting — Session processing has failed because of a content formatting error.
• Protocol — An error occurred during protocol session processing.
• Session sequence — An error occured during session sequence processing.
• Billing sequence — An error occurred during billing sequence processing.
• Time created — The time the session was started.

• Time finished — The time the session ended.

In addition, the Sessions screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens
Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Sessions screen, you can perform the
following tasks:
• From the Id column, click a session for which to access details. For more information,
see “Editing Session Details” on page 430.
• Click New session to create a new session. For more information, see “Creating a
New Session Sequence” on page 404.
• Click Purge sessions to remove all past sessions. For more information, see “Purging
Sessions” on page 432.
• Click Retry session(s) to retry sessions selected from the list.
Editing Session Details
To edit session details:
1. From the Sessions screen (Figure 10.38 on page 428), click the session ID for the
session to modify.
3 The Display session information screen displays.
Figure 10.40: Display session information Screen

The Display session information screen allows you to perform the following tasks:
• Click Restart session to re-deliver the associated bundles.
• Click Stop session to stop bundle delivery.
• Click Refresh session to update viewed details.
• From the Bundle id session item, click the bundle to edit. For more information, see
“Editing a Bundle Template” on page 318.
The Display session information screen displays the following information:

• Id — The internal session ID.
• Delivery bundle: The associated bundle that triggered the session. Click a bundle to
edit. For more information, see “Editing a Bundle Template” on page 318.
• Status: The session status. The following table describes each status option:
Status Description
Pending The session has not yet started.
Processing The session is currently being processed.
Processing wait The session is currently being processed, but is waiting for the next
operation.
Sleep The session is currently paused and will restart at the time specified
(time next continue date).
Done The session is finished.
Processing child session The main session is finished, and a related session is being
processed.
• Error — The type of error that may have occurred during the session. The following
table describes each possible error message:
Error Description
None no session error
Unexpected an unknown error occurred
Timeout the session encountered a time out
Interrupted the session was interrupted during processing
Formatting an error occurred during a formatting operation
Protocol a communication error was detected
Session sequence an error occurred related to the session sequence
Billing Sequence an error occurred related to the billing sequence
• Time created — The time at which the session was created.

• Time to live — The time at which the session begins.
• Time next continue — The time at which the session is restarted in the case of an
interruption.
• Time finished — The time at which the session ended.
• Target account — The account ID and alias of the user receiving the session.

• Target address type — The type of device associated with the session (Mobile,
Email, or Phone).
• Target address — The address and associated ID of the recipient’s device.
Purging Sessions
To purge all finished session processes:
1. From the Sessions screen (Figure 10.38 on page 428), click Purge sessions.
3 A confirmation message “Please confirm you want to launch the sessions purge.”
displays.
2. Click Ok to begin, or Cancel to void purging sessions.
Managing Retry Sessions
You can view a list of retry session reports directly through the Delivery menu.
Viewing Retry Sessions
To view all retry session reports:
1. From the Delivery menu, select Tracking > Retry Sessions.

3 The Retry sessions > Filters screen displays.

3 The Retry sessions screen displays. For information about the Filters screen, see
“Searching Retry Sessions” on page 433.
Using the Retry Sessions Screen
The Retry sessions screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in
With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Retry sessions screen, you can perform the
following tasks:
• From the Id column, click a session for details. For more information, see “Accessing a
Bulk Content Process” on page 426.
• Click Bulk Process on the right side of the screen to create a bulk process to retry
sessions. For more information, see “Creating a Retry Sessions Bulk Process” on
page 434.

• Click Purge bulk processes to remove all past session reports. For more information,
see “Purging Sessions” on page 432.
Searching Retry Sessions
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of retry session reports
To manage retry session filters:
1. From the Retry sessions screen (Figure 10.42 on page 436), click Edit filters.
3 The Retry sessions > Filters screen displays.
Figure 10.41: Retry sessions > Filters Screen
Viewing Session Details
To view session detail information:
1. From the Retry sessions screen, click the ID of a session to view.

3 The Details tab on the Display session information screen displays.
In addition to viewing session details, the Display session information screen allows you
to perform the following tasks:
• Click Stop process to stop the current process.
• Click the Timeslots tab to view authorized timeslots for the process. From the
Timeslots tab, you can also restart, pause, and stop the process.

Creating a Retry Sessions Bulk Process
To create a bulk process for a retry session:
1. From right side of the Retry sessions screen, click Bulk Process next to the session for
which to create the process.
3 The Process details tab on the Create bulk process screen displays
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the process.
3. From the Status list, select the status of the process.
4. From the Priority list, select the priority level of the process.
5. In the Time to start field, enter the date and time at which the process begins (format is
YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS).
6. In the Timeout for target reporting (in milliseconds) field,
7. Click Next.
3 The Bulk action tab on the Create bulk process screen displays.
8. From the Action type list, select the method by which to gather session error
information.
If you select By CSV file:

• From the Sessions retry mode list, select the retry mode.
• In the CSV filename field, enter the full path and filename of the CSV file.
• In the CSV separator field, enter the type of field separator used in the CSV file.
• From the Encoding list, select the type of encoding.
• Click Next.
9. From the Target type list, select the method by which to save error information.
10. Click Next.

3The Bulk flow control strategy tab on the Create bulk process screen displays.
12. Click Next.



15. Click Next.

3 The Confirmation tab on the Create bulk process screen displays.
Purging Retry Sessions
To purge all retry session processes:
1. From the Retry sessions screen (Figure 10.40 on page 430), select one or more retry
sessions to purge, then click Purge bulk processes.
purge.” displays.
2. Click Ok to begin, or Cancel to void purging sessions.
Managing Purges
You can view a list of purged reports directly through the Delivery menu.

Viewing Purges
To view all purged session reports:
1. From the Delivery menu, select Tracking > Purges.

3 The Purges > Filters screen displays. For information about the Filters screen, see
“Searching Purged Sessions” on page 437.

3 The Purges screen displays.
Figure 10.42: Purges Screen
Using the Purges Screen
The Purges screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content
Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Purges screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Id column, click a process for details. For more information, see “Accessing a
Bulk Content Process” on page 426.
• Click Purge bulk processes to remove all past session reports. For more information,
see “Purging Sessions” on page 432.

Searching Purged Sessions
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of purged session
reports specific to that criteria.
To manage purged session filters:
1. From the Purges screen (Figure 10.42 on page 436), click Edit filters.
3 The Purges > Filters screen displays.
Figure 10.43: Purges > Filters Screen
Viewing Purge Details
To view purge detail information:
1. From the Purges screen (Figure 10.42 on page 436), click the ID of a process to view.
3 The Details tab on the Display purge process information screen displays

Figure 10.44: Display purge process information Screen — Details Tab
Click the Timeslots tab to view authorized timeslots for the process.
The Display purge process information screen displays the following information:
• Id — The internal purge operation ID.
• Status — The status of the purge operation. The following table describes each status
option:
Status Description
Pending The session has not yet started.
Processing The session is currently being processed.
Processing wait The session is currently being processed, but is waiting for the next operation.
Done The session is finished.
Processing child session The main session is finished, and a related session is being processed.
• Time created — The time at which the purge was created.

• Time next continue — The time at which the purge is restarted in the case of an
interruption.
• Time finished — The time at which the purge ended.

• Action type — The type of operation: session purge.

• Target type — The target of the operation: done sessions.
• Processed targets — The number of sessions that were purges.
• Processing position in file — The percentage of completion.
• Purge will delete all sessions that have been done for — The sessions that have
been purged; sessions in “done” status that are at least 1 day old.
• Workflow strategy — The workflow used to purge sessions.
Deleting Bulk Content Process Reports
To purge all finished bulk process reports:
1. From the Purges screen (Figure 10.42 on page 436), click Purge bulk processes.
purge.” displays.
2. Click Ok to begin, or Cancel to void deletion.
Managing Session and Bulk Process Rights
To manage group global session and bulk process rights:
NOTE: Individual session and process rights are granted per end-user service, and are
applied to bulk operations.
1. From the Delivery menu, select Tracking > Administration rights.

3 The Administration rights screen displays (Figure 10.45 on page 440).

Adding Tracking Administration Rights
1. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of these rights, see “Tracking
2. Select the groups from the Groups list to which to grant rights. Press and hold Ctrl to
NOTE: Only those back-office children groups of groups to which you have rights are
listed. You may only grant rights that are already granted to you for sessions and
processes.
3. Click Add right.

Revoking Tracking Administration Rights
To revoke group rights, click the next to each granted right to remove.

11 Statistics
Managing Statistics Processes ................................................................................. 442

Searching Statistic Processes .................................................................................. 442
Viewing Process Details .......................................................................................... 443
Statistics Tracking ................................................................................................. 447
Viewing Statistic Compilation Details ........................................................................ 448
Device Statistics.................................................................................................... 451
Downloads Per Brand ............................................................................................. 451
Downloads Per Model ............................................................................................. 452
Content Statistics .................................................................................................. 453
Downloads Per Provider.......................................................................................... 453
Downloads Per Content .......................................................................................... 454
Content Per Provider .............................................................................................. 454
Other Statistics ..................................................................................................... 455
Downloads Per Offer .............................................................................................. 455
Downloads Per Service ........................................................................................... 456

Statistics
The Statistics menu provides access to statistics produced by the Content Manager
platform.
Managing Statistics Processes
To display a list of running processes:
1. From the Statistics menu, select Statistics definitions > Statistics processes.
3 The Statistics processes > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of all running processes. For more information about the
Filters screen, see “Searching Statistic Processes” on page 442.
3 The Statistics processes screen displays.
Figure 11.1: Statistics processes Screen
Using the Statistics Processes Screen
The Statistics processes screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens
Working With Lists” on page 6. You can also view further details about a process by clicking
on a process ID from the Id column. For more information, see “Viewing Process Details” on
page 443.
Searching Statistic Processes
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of statistics processes
To manage statistics process filters:
1. From the Statistics processes screen (Figure 11.1 on page 442), click Edit filters.
3 The Statistics processes > Filters screen displays (Figure 11.2 on page 443).

Statistics
Figure 11.2: Statistics processes > Filters Screen
Viewing Process Details
To view detailed information about a process:
1. From the Statistics processes screen (Figure 11.1), click a process ID from the Id
column.
3 The Details tab on the Edit statistics process screen displays.
Figure 11.3: Edit statistics process Screen — Details Tab

Statistics
From the Edit statistics process screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• Click the Details tab (Figure 11.3) to view general process information, such as
process name, creation and execution times, and any applied process schedule.
• Click the Statistics tables tab to view statistics information. For more information,
see “Using the Statistics Tables Tab” on page 444.
• Click the Pre tasks tab to view tasks required prior to running the process. For more
information, see “Using the Pre Tasks Tab” on page 446.
• Click the Post tasks tab to view tasks required after the process is finished. For more
information, see “Using the Post Tasks Tab” on page 446.
Using the Statistics Tables Tab
The Statistics table tab on the Edit statistics process screen allows you to view statistics
regarding the selected process.
Figure 11.4: Edit statistics process Screen — Statistics tables Tab
From the Name column, click a statistics table to view.

3 The Details tab on the Edit statistics process > Edit statistics tables screen
displays.
Figure 11.5: Edit statistics process > Edit statistics tables Screen — Details Tab

Statistics
To view further details about the specified Statistics target handler, click the target
handler name.
Using the Statistics Table Tab
The Statistics table tab on the Edit statistics table screen allows you to view detailed
information about specific sets of statistics.
Figure 11.6: Edit statistics process > Edit statistics tables Screen — Statistics table Tab
To view a statistics table, click the name of a statistics table to view.

3 The Statistic results tab on the Edit statistics table screen displays.
Figure 11.7: Edit statistics table Screen — Statistics results Tab

Statistics
Using the Edit Statistics Table Screen. There are four tabs available on the Edit
statistics table screen:
• Details — Click to view general information about the about the selected statistics
table.
• Statistics results — Click to view a list of result reports. To view further details about
a result report, click an ID number from the Id column.
3 The Edit statistic result screen displays.
• Group by
• Operation
Using the Pre Tasks Tab
The Pre tasks tab on the Edit statistics process screen allows you to review any tasks
scheduled to complete prior to running the process.
To review a task:
1. From the Name column, click the name of a process to view.

3 The Edit pre-task screen displays further information about the selected task.
Using the Post Tasks Tab
The Post tasks tab on the Edit statistics process screen allows you to review any tasks
scheduled to complete after a process has run.
Figure 11.8: Edit statistics process Screen — Post tasks Tab
To review a task:
1. From the Name column, click the name of a process to view.

3 The Edit post-task screen displays further information about the selected task.

Statistics
Statistics Tracking
From the Statistics menu, you can track statistics compilation information, such as the
current status or execution date on currently running processes.
To track currently running processes:
1. From the Statistics menu, select Statistics tracking > Statistics compilation.
3 The Statistics compilation > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of processes with a status of Processing. For information
about the Filters screen, see “Searching Statistic Processes” on page 442.
3 The Statistics compilation screen displays.
Figure 11.9: Statistics compilation Screen
Using the Statistics Compilation Screen
The Statistics compilation screen provides the same basic functionality as other list
and Working With Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Statistics compilation screen, you
can perform the following tasks:
• From the Id column, click a compilation to view. For more information, see “Viewing
Statistic Compilation Details” on page 448.
• From the Statistics process column, click a process to review. For more information,
see “Viewing Process Details” on page 443.

Statistics
Searching Statistics Compilations
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of statistics
compilations specific to that criteria.
To manage statistics compilation filters:
1. From the Statistics compilation screen (Figure 11.9 on page 447), click Edit filters.
3 The Statistics compilation > Filters screen displays.
Figure 11.10: Statistics compilation > Filters Screen
Viewing Statistic Compilation Details
To view compilation details:
1. From the Statistics compilation screen (Figure 11.9 on page 447), click a compilation
from the Id column.
3 The Details tab on the Edit statistics compilation screen displays (Figure 11.11 on
page 449).

Statistics
Figure 11.11: Edit statistics compilation Screen — Details Tab
The Details tab on the Edit statistics compilation screen displays general information
about the compilation. Click the Statistics process name to view the statistics process. For
more information, see “Viewing Process Details” on page 443.
Using the Bulk Processes Tab
The Bulk processes tab on the Edit statistics compilation screen displays a list of bulk
processes in the compilation. Click a process ID from the Id column to view the bulk process.
3 The Edit bulk process screen displays (Figure 11.12 on page 450).

Statistics
Figure 11.12: Edit statistics compilation > Edit bulk process Screen — Details Tab
NOTE: Information displayed on the Details tab is view-only.
Using the Timeslots Tab
Click the Timeslot tab on the Edit statistics compilation screen to view scheduled times
that the process is authorized to run.
NOTE: Information displayed on the Timeslot tab is view-only.
Using the Generated Results Tab
Click the Generated results tab to review statistic information about the process. Click a
result ID from the Id column to view statistics results. Click a table name from the
Statistics table column to edit the table. For more information about editing the statistics
table, see “Using the Edit Statistics Table Screen” on page 446.

Statistics
Device Statistics
There are two types of device statistics available for display through the Statistics menu:
Downloads per brand, and Downloads per model.
Downloads Per Brand
To select and display statistics on device brands used by end-users to download content:
1. From the Statistics menu, select Device Statistics > Downloads per brand.
3 The Downloads per brand screen displays.
Figure 11.13: Downloads per brand Screen
2. From the Table list, select the method by which to view statistics sent: hourly, daily,
weekly, monthly, or annually.
3. From the Date lists, select a date that corresponds to the last day of the selected time
frame. The format is YYYY MM DD HH.
NOTE: Most of the time, statistics are compiled daily. If you want the most up to date
statistics, select yesterday’s date as the end of the time frame.
4. Click Submit.
3 The statistics information displays, listing the following information:
• Content type (for example, WAP logos, SMS, and so on)
• The number and percentage of content downloaded for each content type during
the period on a device attached to the device brand
• The number and percentage of the total downloads for each content type
5. Select a different date or time frame to produce a different set of statistics.

Statistics
Downloads Per Model
To select and display statistics on device models used by end-users to download content:
1. From the Statistics menu, select Device Statistics > Downloads per model.
3 The Downloads per model screen displays.
Figure 11.14: Downloads per model Screen
2. From the Table list, select the method by which to view statistics: hourly, daily, weekly,
monthly, or annually.
4. Click Submit.
• The device model
• The number and percentage of content types downloaded during the period on
each device model
• The number and percentage of the total downloads for each device model

Statistics
Content Statistics
There are three types of content statistics available for display through the Statistics menu:
Downloads per provider, Downloads per content, and Content per provider.
Downloads Per Provider
To select and display statistics on the amount of content downloaded per provider:
1. From the Statistics menu, select Content Statistics > Downloads per provider.
3 The Downloads per provider screen displays.
Figure 11.15: Downloads per provider Screen
4. Click Submit.
• The content name and type
• The number and percentage of content types downloaded for each content
provider
• The number and percentage of the total downloads for each content provider

Statistics
Downloads Per Content
To select and display statistics on the amount of content downloaded by content type:
1. From the Statistics menu, select Content Statistics > Downloads per content.
3 The Downloads per content screen displays.
Figure 11.16: Downloads per content Screen
4. Click Submit.
• The content name
• The number and percentage of content types downloaded for each device brand
• The number and percentage of the total downloads for each content type
Content Per Provider
To select and display statistics on the amount of content created, updated, and deleted per
provider:
1. From the Statistics menu, select Content Statistics > Content Per Provider.
3 The Content per provider screen displays (Figure 11.17 on page 455).

Statistics
Figure 11.17: Content per provider Screen
4. Click Submit.
3 The statistics information displays, listing the following information in three categories:
Content created by content provider, Content modified by content provider,
and Content deleted by content provider:
• The name of the content provider
• The number and percentage of content created, modified, and deleted by each
provider
• The number and percentage of total content created, modified, and deleted
Other Statistics
There are two types of other statistics available for display through the Statistics menu:
Downloads per offer, and Downloads per service.
Downloads Per Offer
To select and display statistics on the number of downloads per offer:
1. From the Statistics menu, select Other Statistics > Downloads per offer.
3 The Downloads per offer screen displays (Figure 11.18 on page 456).

Statistics
Figure 11.18: Downloads per offer Screen
4. Click Submit.
• The type of offer
• The number and percentage of content requests per offer
• The number and percentage of total content requests
Downloads Per Service
To select and display statistics on the number of downloads per service:
1. From the Statistics menu, select Other Statistics > Downloads per service.
3 The Downloads per service screen displays.
Figure 11.19: Downloads per service Screen

Statistics
4. Click Submit.
• The service name
• The number and percentage of content requests per service
• The number and percentage of total content requests

12 System Information
Managing Countries ............................................................................................... 459

Viewing Countries.................................................................................................. 459
Searching Countries............................................................................................... 460
Adding a Country .................................................................................................. 461
Editing a Country .................................................................................................. 461
Deleting a Country ................................................................................................ 462
Managing Mobile Network Operators ........................................................................ 463
Viewing Mobile Network Operators ........................................................................... 463
Searching Operators .............................................................................................. 464
Creating a New Operator ........................................................................................ 465
Editing an Operator ............................................................................................... 465
Deleting an Operator ............................................................................................. 466
Managing Phone Prefixes ........................................................................................ 467
Viewing Prefixes .................................................................................................... 467
Searching Prefixes ................................................................................................. 468
Creating New Prefixes ............................................................................................ 469
Editing a Prefix...................................................................................................... 469
Deleting a Prefix.................................................................................................... 470
History File Configuration ....................................................................................... 471
Viewing the Dispatch File Configuration .................................................................... 471
Managing History Rights......................................................................................... 473

System Information
The System menu allows you to manage basic system options, such as countries, operators,
phone prefixes, history file configuration, and global system rights.
Managing Countries
The Countries manager section of the System menu allows you to manage country codes
previously defined in Content Manager.
Viewing Countries
To view a list of previously defined countries:
1. From the System menu, select Countries manager > Countries.

3 The Countries > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of countries. For information about the Filters screen, see
“Searching Countries” on page 460.
3 The Countries screen displays.
Figure 12.1: Countries Screen
The Countries screen displays the following information:

• Name — the name of the operator
• Mcc — the country’s Mobile Country Code
• Date created — the date on which the country was added to the system

System Information
Using the Countries Screen
The Countries screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content
Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Countries screen, you can perform the following
tasks:
• From the Name column, click a country to edit. For more information about editing
countries, see “Editing a Country” on page 461.
• Click New country to add a new country. For more information, see “Adding a
Country” on page 461.
• Click Delete to remove all selected countries. For more information, see “Deleting a
Country” on page 462.
Searching Countries
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of countries specific to
that criteria.
To edit filters:
1. From the Countries screen (Figure 12.1 on page 459), click Edit filters.
3 The Countries > Filters screen displays.
Figure 12.2: List operators > Filters Screen

System Information
Adding a Country
To add a country to the system:
1. From the Countries screen (Figure 12.1 on page 459), click New country.
3 The New country screen displays.
NOTE: The New country function is also available when searching for or editing a
country. For more information, see “Editing a Country” on page 461.
Figure 12.3: New country Screen
2. In the Mcc field, enter the country’s Mobile Country Code.
3. In the Name field, enter a name for the country. This name displays for end-users.
4. In the Prefix field, enter the country’s phone prefix.
5. In the Locale field, enter the locale to be used with the country.
6. Click Submit.
Editing a Country
The Edit country screen allows you to modify operator details.
To edit a country:
1. From the Name column on the Countries screen, click a country to edit.
3 The Edit country screen displays (Figure 12.8 on page 466).

System Information
Figure 12.4: Edit country Screen
The following information is available to modify on the Edit country screen:

• Name — the country name
• Mcc — the country’s Mobile Country Code
• Prefix — the country’s phone prefix
• Date created — the date on which the country was added to the system (cannot be
modified).
• Date modified — The date on which the country was last edited (updated
automatically).
Deleting a Country
To delete a country:
1. From the Countries screen, check the box next to one or more countries to delete. Check
the box at the top of the column to quickly select all countries.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected countries?” displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited country by clicking Delete on the Edit country
screen.

System Information
Managing Mobile Network Operators
The Operators manager section of the System menu allows you to manage mobile
network operators on the CM system.
Viewing Mobile Network Operators
To view mobile network operators:
1. From the System menu, select Operators manager > operators.

3 The Operators > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show table to view a list of all available operators. For information about the
Filters screen, see “Searching Operators” on page 464.
3 The Operators screen displays.
Figure 12.5: Operators Screen
The Operators screen displays the following information:

• Name — the name of the operator
• Mnc — the Mobile Network Code associated with the operator
• Country — the operator’s country
• Date created — the date on which the operator was created

System Information
Using the Operators Screen
The Operators screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content
Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Operators screen, you can perform the following
tasks:
• From the Name column, click an operator to edit. For more information about editing
operators, see “Editing an Operator” on page 465.
• Click New operator to create a new operator. For more information, see “Creating a
New Operator” on page 465.
• Click Delete to remove all selected operators. For more information, see “Deleting an
Operator” on page 466.
Searching Operators
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of operators specific to
that criteria.
To edit filters:
1. From the Operators screen (Figure 12.5 on page 463), click Edit filters.
3 The Operators > Filters screen displays.
Figure 12.6: Operators > Filters Screen

System Information
Creating a New Operator
NOTE: Countries must be defined prior to creating an operator. For information about
adding countries, see “Adding a Country” on page 461.
To create a new mobile network operator:
1. From the Operators screen, click New operator.

3 The New operator screen displays.
NOTE: The New operator function is also available when searching for or editing an
operator. For more information, see “Searching Operators” on page 464 and
“Editing an Operator” on page 465.
Figure 12.7: New operator Screen
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the operator.
3. From the Mcc list, select an existing Mobile Country Code for the operator.
4. In the Mnc field, enter the Mobile Network Code for the operator. This information is
required.
5. Click Submit.
Editing an Operator
The Edit operator screen allows you to modify operator details.
To edit an operator:
1. From the Name column on the Operators screen (Figure 12.5 on page 463), click an
operator to edit.
3 The Edit operator screen displays (Figure 12.8 on page 466).

System Information
Figure 12.8: Edit operator Screen
The following information is available to modify on the Edit operator screen:

• Name — the operator name
• Mcc — the Mobile Country Code for the operator
• Mnc — the Mobile Network Code for the operator
• Date created — the date on which the operator was created (cannot be modified)
• Date modified — the date on which the operator was last edited (updated
automatically)
Deleting an Operator
To delete an operator:
1. From the Operators screen, check the box next to one or more operators to delete.
Check the box at the top of the column to quickly select all operators.
2. Click Delete.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected operators?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited operator by clicking Delete on the Edit operator
screen.

System Information
Managing Phone Prefixes
The Phone prefix manager portion of the System menu allows you to manage phone
prefixes. Before you can create a service, you must define all possible Mobile Subscriber
Integrated Services Digital Network (MSISDN) formats, including: prefixes, minimum and
maximum lengths, and conversions to the standard phone format (international format).
For example, French mobile phone numbers start with “06” and are 10 digits long. Before
they can be used, these numbers must be converted to the international format, for
example, starting with “336”.
Viewing Prefixes
To view a list of previously defined phone prefixes:
1. From the System menu, select Phone prefix manager > Prefixes.
3 The Prefixes > Filters screen displays.
2. Click Show prefixes to view the list of prefixes. For information about the Filters screen,
see “Searching Prefixes” on page 468.
3 The Prefixes screen displays.
Figure 12.9: Prefixes Screen
The Prefixes screen displays the following information:

• Prefix — the original prefix entered
• Replace — the prefix used in place of the original prefix
• Length min — the minimum length of the MSISDN allowed for the associated prefix
• Length max — the maximum length of the MSISDN allowed for the associated prefix

System Information
Using the Prefixes Screen
The Prefixes screen provides the same basic functionality as other list screens in Content
Lists” on page 6. In addition, from the Prefixes screen, you can perform the following tasks:
• From the Prefix column, click a prefix to edit. For more information, see “Editing a
Prefix” on page 469.
• Click Create prefix to create a new prefix. For more information, see “Creating New
Prefixes” on page 469.
• Click Delete Prefix to remove all selected prefixes. For more information, see
“Deleting a Prefix” on page 470.
Searching Prefixes
The Filters screen allows you to set search criteria that returns a list of prefixes specific to
that criteria.
To edit filters:
1. From the Prefixes screen (Figure 12.9 on page 467), click Edit filters.
3 The Prefixes > Filters screen displays.
Figure 12.10: Prefixes > Filters Screen

System Information
Creating New Prefixes
To create a new prefix:
1. From the Prefixes screen, click Create prefix.

3 The New prefix screen displays.
NOTE: The Create prefix function is also available when searching for or editing a prefix.
For more information, see “Searching Prefixes” on page 468 and “Editing a Prefix”
on page 469.
Figure 12.11: New prefix Screen
2. In the Prefix field, enter the original, authorized prefix.
3. In the Replace field, enter the prefix used to replace the authorized prefix.
4. In the Length min field, enter the minimum length of the MSISDN that can be entered.
5. In the Length max field, enter the maximum length of the MSISDN that can be entered.
6. Click Submit.
Editing a Prefix
To access the Edit prefix screen:
1. From the Prefix column on the Prefixes screen, click a prefix to edit.
3 The Edit prefix screen displays (Figure 12.12 on page 470).

System Information
Figure 12.12: Edit prefix Screen
The following information is available to modify on the Edit prefix screen:

• Prefix — the original, authorized prefix (cannot be modified)
• Replace — the prefix used to replace the authorized prefix
• Length min — the minimum length of the MSISDN that can be entered
• Length max — the maximum length of the MSISDN that can be entered
Deleting a Prefix
To delete a prefix:
1. From the Prefixes screen, check the box next to one or more prefixes to delete. Check
the box at the top of the column to quickly select all prefixes.
2. Click Delete prefix.

3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to delete selected phone prefixes?”
displays.
NOTE: You can also delete an edited prefix by clicking Delete on the Edit prefix screen.

System Information
History File Configuration
All tracking features (user history tracking, event tracking, and so on) are managed by a
single component. You can edit the configuration for this component through the System
menu.
Viewing the Dispatch File Configuration
The dispatch file is where history logs and information on how they are generated are stored
on the server.
To access the History Configuration Edit screen:
1. From the System menu, select History Configuration > Edit.

3 The History Configuration > Edit screen displays.
Figure 12.13: History Configuration > Edit Screen
The History Configuration >Edit screen displays the following information:
NOTE: The information displayed on the History Configuration > Edit screen is view-
only. Contact your system administrator to make changes to the history file
configuration.
• History folder — The relative directory where history files are stored.
• Absolute History path — The directory path to where history files are stored
(calculated from the relative directory path).
• History root filename — The root filename for all history files.
• Dispatch options — Indicates whether history files are to be dispatched by owner,
and whether to close history files each day or every hour.

System Information
Purging History Files
To view purging options:
1. From the History Configuration > Edit screen, click the Purge configuration tab.
3 The Purge configuration tab displays.
Figure 12.14: History Configuration > Edit Screen — Purge configuration Tab
The Purge configuration tab displays the following information:
NOTE: The information displayed on the Purge configuration tab is view-only.
• Purge activated — Indicates whether the purge function is active.

• Purge files older than (days) — Indicates how long history files are stored (in
days).
• Purge scheduling — Indicates how often history files are purged.
Purging History Files
To manually purge history files:
1. From the Purge configuration tab on the History Configuration > Edit screen, click
Purge now.
3 A confirmation message “Are you sure you want to launch the purge process? During
the purge, X files will be removed from the persistence system.” displays.
2. Click Ok to purge, or Cancel to void the purge process.

System Information
Managing History Rights
To establish history rights:
1. From the System menu, select History rights > Define global rights.
3 The Define global rights screen displays.
Figure 12.15: Define global rights Screen
2. Check the box next to each right to grant. For a description of these rights, see “System
History Rights” on page 15.
NOTE: You may only grant history rights that are already granted to you.
3. Select the groups from the Groups list to which to assign rights. Press and hold Ctrl to
4. Click Add right.

Revoking Global Rights
To revoke group rights, click the next to each right to remove.

Glossary
Account
A record of information about a Content Manager user. It includes credentials (login,
password, IP address), name, and other Content Manager-specific information, for example,
group membership. There are two types of accounts: End-user and Administrator.
Administrator accounts can be used by physical persons or by external systems. End-user
accounts are associated to mobile subscribers, identified by their IMSI, MSISDN or any other
unique ID.
Administrator
An Administrator has rights on the back-office and uses an Administrator account. In most
cases, this account is used by a physical person to access the Content Manager web back-
office to administrate Content Manager. An administrator account is attached to one or
several back-office groups.
Back-Office
See Administrator.
Bulk process
A bulk delivery of one or several bundles to several users. To decrease the load on the
platform, the bulk process follows a certain session sequence.
Bundle
A bundle (formerly called a package option) enables association between topics, patterns and
triggers. It is always associated with a parent offer.
Bundle Template
A bundle template contains all useful bundle information, delivery triggers, and topic filters.
A bundle template’s format is used to automatically format new bundles.
Capability group
A list of devices that share one common capability — they are compatible with a certain
Handset Manager feature, have access to a certain online help, and so on. Capability groups
are associated to compatible content templates.

Glossary
Capability group handler

Capability group handlers are used to automatically define capability groups.
Category
A classification of information that can be used to tag a content or an offer.
Content
A series of binary and/or text data identified by a unique ID and uses a content template. It
is made up of one or several content versions and content metadata.
Content metadata
An element of a content that is not used directly for delivery to a device, but adds other
information to the content.
Content provider
An entity that publishes contents. It can be a remote system, a group of administrator
accounts, or an application, for example. Contents can be published by the entity itself or by
those accounts which have rights to publish contents on behalf of this entity.
Content template
A template describing the different elements required to generate a content that can be
delivered to a device.
Content version
A content version is an element of a content that can be delivered to a device. A content
version is compatible with one or several devices.
Content version template

A template describing the different elements of a content version that can be delivered to a
device.
Device
A device is a terminal used by an end-user that can be addressed by Content Manager. Each
device is associated to a type (mobile phone, for example), an address (a phone number, for
example), a model (Nokia 3330, for example), an IMEI.
End-user
An account that allows a user to purchase and receive contents from Content Manager and
access the front-office interface. It is associated to one or several devices.
Feature
A type of content that can be delivered to a device.

Glossary
Formatting Token
Formatting tokens are used to balance the load between two formatting applications sending
content to any given handset.
Front-Office
See End-user.
Group
A set of end-user or administrator accounts with similar rights. A group inherits rights from
parent groups and passes on its rights to child groups.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

The most popular standard for mobile phones in the world. GSM service is used by over 1.5
billion people across more than 210 countries and territories. The ubiquity of the GSM
standard makes international roaming very common between mobile phone operators,
enabling subscribers to use their phones in many parts of the world. GSM differs significantly
from its predecessors in that both signaling and speech channels are digital, which means
that it is considered a second generation mobile phone system.
Handset Manager
A handset device management application that communicates with Content Manager to allow
for administrative tasks such as adding, updating, or deleting handsets. Handset Manager is
not intended for use by clients, but rather intended for use by internal system administrators
or developers.
International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI)

A unique number given to every single mobile phone, typically found behind the battery.
IMEI numbers of cellular phones connected to a GSM network are stored in a database (EIR -
Equipment Identity Register) containing all valid mobile phone equipment. When a phone is
reported stolen or is not type approved, the number is marked invalid.
Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS)

The ability to send messages using a combination of text, sounds, images and video to MMS
capable handsets. Similar to SMS, MMS is a store and forward method of transmitting
graphics, video clips, sound files and short text messages over wireless networks using the
WAP protocol. Carriers deploy special servers, dubbed MMS Centers (MMSCs) to implement
the offerings on their systems. MMS also supports e-mail addressing, so the device can send
e-mails directly to an e-mail address. The most common use of MMS is for communication
between mobile phones.
Mobile Subscriber Integrated Services Digital Network

(MSISDN) Number
The dialable number that callers use to reach a mobile subscriber. Some phones can support
multiple MSISDNs, for example, a US-based MSISDN and a Canadian-based MSISDN. Callers
dialing either number will reach the subscriber.

Glossary
Offer
An offer (formerly called a package) is a set of bundles. It is associated to a certain front-
office service and can be downloaded by end-user members of certain groups.
Pattern
A pattern can format contents (following a certain template) into messages for delivery over
a certain media. A pattern also includes information on content adaptation to different
devices.
Right
An entitlement attributed to members of a group to perform certain actions (view, create,
use, delete) on a certain resource (another group, a category, a billing model) in Content
Manager.
Service
An instance of Content Manager that uses its own accounts, content, and services. Several
Content Manager services can share common resources, for example and end-user account
database, a content database, and so on.
Session
The process where several bundles are delivered to a device after a trigger is activated. This
process follows a certain kinematics, described by the session sequence.
Short Messaging Service (SMS)

A general name for the technology that allows users to send and receive text messages using
mobile phones.Messages can be up to 160 characters of text in length. Many new mobile
phones let you send bigger messages, and automatically split your message up into 160-
character chunks. Messages can comprise of words or numbers or an alphanumeric
combination (binary format is even supported). SMS is a store and forward service, which
means messages are not sent directly from sender to recipient, but always through an SMS
Center instead.
Template
A predefined format used to create items and store contents in Content Manager. See also
Bundle template, Content template, and Content version template.
Terminal ID
A unique number assigned by a system administrator that identifies the handset device for
administrative purposes (for example, adding, updating, or deleting handsets). The Terminal
ID is required for communications between the Content Manager application and Handset
Manager.

Glossary
Topic
An association between one or several categories where contents and one or several events
is retrieved. Contents must be associated to all selected categories to be fetched by the
topic.
Trigger
An event that activates the delivery of a certain bundle. The triggering event may be the
reception of a message, a request from an end-user, the publication of a new content, and
such.
User agent
User agent information is included in the http headers of a WAP page or the Multimedia
Messaging Services Center (MMS-C). This information is detected when a device accesses a
WAP page or the MMS-C. The correct device can be identified based on the user agent
profile.
Wireless Application Protocol (WAP)

The leading standard for information services on wireless terminals like digital mobile
phones. Wireless Markup Language (WML) is the language used to create pages to be
displayed in a WAP browser. The wireless industry came up with the idea of WAP. The point of
this standard was to show internet contents on wireless clients, like mobile phones.
Wireless Markup Language (WML)

The language used to create pages to be displayed in a Wireless Application Protocol (WAP)
browser.

Index
A accounts, front-office, continued

editing 84–98
about
editing services 87
Content Manager 2 managing 81–97
filters 8–10 managing addresses 91–93
rights management 12–20 managing credit information 95
session sequences 407 managing devices 89–90
access managing SIM cards 93–94
granting to a resource 48–49 managing timeslots 94
removing from a resource 49 parent groups 87
rights 12
accessing
searching 81–82
bulk content processes 426
bulk import process 164 actions
workflows 411–418
account imports, bulk
workflows, creating 416
creating 102–104 workflows, deleting 418
managing 101–104 workflows, editing 417–418
searching 102
viewing 101–102 activating
device application types 231
accounts
device application versions 244
quick start, importing 25–27 device applications 238
searching by alias 366 device features 200
searching by MSISDN 365 device IMEI ranges 186, 251
accounts, back-office device profile capabilities 281
adding 53 device profiles 276
adding parent groups 57 device user agents 190, 255
creating 53 devices 177, 194
deleting 59 adding
deleting parent groups 57 actions, workflow 416
editing 54–59 back-office accounts 53
managing 51–59 back-office groups 43
managing IP restrictions 58 back-office parent groups 57
parent groups 56 bulk account imports 102–104
rights 12 bundles 339
searching 52 capability groups 204
viewing 51–52 condition rules, workflow 421
accounts, front-office conditions, workflow 420
creating 83–84 content 139–140
deleting 97 content categories 116

Index
adding, continued application types, device, continued

content metadata 151 managing 226–231
content providers 109 searching 228
content systems 382–384 viewing 226–228
content topics 370
application versions, device
content versions 144–146
activating 244
countries 461
associated device applications 235
delivery categories 302
creating 243
deactivating 244
deleting 244
device applications 236
details 241
device profile capabilities 262
editing 240–242
devices 180
managing 238–244
formatting tokens 216
searching 240
front-office accounts 83–84
user agents 242
front-office groups 73
viewing 238–240
IMEI ranges 185
message patterns 396–399 applications, device
messaging credentials 393–394 activating 238
mobile network operators 465 application versions 235
offer bundle templates 316 creating 236
offers 312 deactivating 238
phone prefixes 469 deleting 237
services 62 details 235
session sequences 404–406 editing 233–236
states, workflow 413 managing 232–238
subscriptions 365–366 searching 233
synchronizations, trust source 296 user agents 235
trust sources 286 viewing 232
user agents 189
applying filters 8–10
versions to trust sources 285
workflows 409 archives, DKB
generating 291
addresses
managing 290
front-office account 91–93
searching front-office accounts by 82 association type, user 73–75
administrator group. See back-office group automatic user association 73–75
Administrators menu 41
aliases B
devices by brand 176
devices by model 182–183 back-office account
searching accounts by 366 adding 53
searching front-office accounts by 82 adding parent groups 57
creating 53
application types, device
deleting 59
activating 231 deleting parent groups 57
creating 230 editing 54–59
deactivating 231 managing 51–59
deleting 231 managing IP restrictions 58
editing 228 managing parent groups 56

Index
back-office account, continued bulk process, continued

rights 12 rights 19
searching 52 viewing statistics compilation 449
viewing 51–52
bundle templates
back-office group capabilities 321
adding 43 content templates 323
creating 43 creating 316
defining rights 47–48 deleting 330
deleting 49 details 319
editing 44–45 editing 318–329
managing 41–50 managing on offers 315–330
rights 12–13 on content triggers 324–325
searching 42 on message triggers 325–326
viewing 41–42 on schedule triggers 326–329
searching topics 320
brands, device
topics 320
aliases 176
cache management 388 bundles
deactivating 177 bulk processes 357–361
details 175 compatibilities 346
editing 174–176 creating 339
managing 172–176 deleting 355
searching 173 details 342
downloading 355–357
browser, device profiles 266
editing 341–354
bulk account imports managing 337–357
creating 102–104 metadata 354
managing 101–104 on content triggers 352
searching 102 on message triggers 348
viewing 101–102 on schedule triggers 348–352
popularity 353
bulk campaign, quick start guide 22–39
searching 339
bulk content topic patterns 344
accessing a process 426 topics 343–346
deleting process reports 439 viewing 337–339
importing 158–163
managing processes 425–427
process rights 439 C
searching processes 426
viewing processes 425–426 cache
editing management 387–391
bulk import
managing 387–391
accessing a process 164
creating a process 160–163 cache management
deleting a process 164 brands 388
process timeslots 163, 361 device profile capabilities 390
searching 159 device profiles 389
models 388
bulk process
bundle, creating 357–361 capabilities
quick start creation 37–39 content topic devices 374
retry sessions, creating 434–435 offer bundle templates 321

Index
capabilities, device profile compilations

activating 281 searching statistics 448
deactivating 281 viewing bulk processes 449
deleting 280 viewing statistics details 448
editing 279
condition rules
managing 260–263, 278–281
searching 277
workflows, deleting 423
capability group handlers workflows, editing 422
creating 207
conditions
deleting 211
workflows 419–423
editing 208–211
managing 206–211
workflows, deleting 423
searching 207
workflows, editing 421
viewing 206–207
configuring
capability groups
bulk campaign 22–39
creating 204
content repository, quick start 23–25
deleting 205
delivery options, quick start 33–36
editing 203–204
end-user database structure, quick start 22–23
managing 201–205
history files 471–472
resetting 204
MO interface, quick start 36–37
searching 202
searching handler created 210 content
viewing 201–202 adding 139–140
viewing handler created 209 adding metadata 151
bulk imports 158–163
catalog rights 18, 367–368
cloning 157
categories, content copying 157
creating 116 creating 139–140
deleting 121 creating versions 144–146
details 119 deleting 157
editing 117–121 deleting metadata 153
managing 114–123 deleting versions 149
managing providers 119–120 details 142
rights 16–17, 120, 121–123 download statistics 454
searching 116 editing 140–156
viewing 115–116 editing metadata 152
editing versions 147–148
categories, delivery
files 160
creating 302
managing 137–158
deleting 309
managing metadata 150–153
editing 304–309
quick start, creating 28–33
managing 300–309
searching 138
searching 302
statistics 453
viewing 300–302
statistics per provider 454
changing login password 3 using xml files 165–169
using zip files 164
cloning content 157
viewing 137–138
compatibilities viewing categories 115–116
bundles 346 viewing versions 143
offer 330

Index
content categories content topics, continued

creating 116 editing 372–376
deleting 121 managing 368–381
details 119 metadata 376
editing 117–121 publishing 379
global rights 121–123 rights 18, 377
managing 114–123 searching 370
managing providers 119–120 viewing 368–370
rights 16–17, 120 content triggers 324–325, 352
searching 116
content versions, managing devices 148,
Content Manager
153–156
about 2
interface overview 5 content, bulk
logging in 3 accessing a process 426
logging out 4 managing processes 425–427
menu bar 5 searching processes 426
rights definitions 11–19 viewing processes 425–426
version information 6 copying content 157
Welcome screen, Content Manager 5
countries
Content menu 107
creating 461
content providers deleting 462
creating 109 editing 461
deleting 113 managing 459–462
details 111 searching 460
editing 110–113 viewing 459
managing 107–114 creating
managing templates 111–112
actions, workflow 416
rights 15–16, 112–113
back-office accounts 53
viewing 107–108
back-office groups 43
content repository configuration, quick start 23– bulk account imports 102–104
25 bulk import process 160–163
bulk process, quick start 37–39
content systems
bundle bulk process 357–361
creating 382–384
bundles 339
deleting 385
capability group handlers 207
editing 384
capability groups 204
managing 381–385
condition rules, workflow 421
searching 382
conditions, workflow 420
viewing 381–382
content 139–140
content templates content categories 116
editing 124–136 content metadata 151
managing 123–136 content providers 109
offer bundle templates 323 content systems 382–384
viewing 123 content topics 370
content versions 144–146
content topics
content, quick start 28–33
creating 370
countries 461
deleting 377
delivery categories 302
details 373
device capabilities 374

Index
creating, continued deactivating, continued

device applications 236 device profile capabilities 281
device detection rules 222–223 device profiles 276
device features 197 device user agents 190, 255
device profile capabilities 262 devices 194
device profiles on devices 191
defining
devices 180
back-office global group rights 49–50
back-office group rights 47–48
back-office offer rights 333
front-office groups 73
bulk process rights 439
IMEI ranges 185
catalog rights 367–368
message patterns 396–399
content category rights 120
messaging credentials 393–394
Content Manager rights 11–19
mobile network operators 465
content provider rights 112–113
offer bundle templates 316
content topic rights 377
offers 312
front-office group rights 76–77
phone prefixes 469
front-office group rules 78–80
retry session bulk process 434–435
front-office offer rights 332, 334
services 62
global content category rights 121–123
session sequences 404–406
global service rights 69–71
states, workflow 413
history rights 473
subscriptions 365–366
navigation rights 48–49
synchronizations, trust source 296
service rights 66–67
trust sources 286
session rights 439
user agents 189
system administration rights 424
versions for trust sources 285
workflows 409 deleting
access to a resource 49
credentials, messaging
actions, workflow 418
creating 393–394
back-office accounts 59
deleting 394
back-office groups 49
editing 394
back-office parent groups 57
managing 391–395
bulk import process 164
searching 392
bulk process reports 439
viewing 391–393
bundles 355
credit information, front-office account 95 capability group handlers 211
capability groups 205
criteria, filter 8–10
csv files 160 conditions, workflow 423
content 157
content categories 121
D content metadata 153
content providers 113
data patterns, managing 400–402 content systems 385
deactivating content topic 377
brands 177 content versions 149
device application types 231 countries 462
device application versions 244 delivery categories 309
device applications 238 device application types 231
device features 200 device application versions 244
device IMEI ranges 186, 252 device applications 237
device detection rules 223

Index
deleting, continued details, continued

device features 200 offer bundle templates 319
device IMEI ranges 186, 251 purge 437–439
device profile capabilities 262, 280 session 433
device profiles 276 statistics processes 443
device profiles from devices 193 workflows 411
device user agents 190, 254
detection rules, detection tool 225
devices 194
DKB versions 290 detection rules, device
formatting tokens 218 creating 222–223
front-office accounts 97 deleting 223
front-office groups 80 editing 220–221
message patterns 403 managing 218–224
messaging credentials 394 searching 219
mobile network operators 466 viewing 218–219
offer bundle templates 330
detection sets, device
offers 336
managing 224
phone prefixes 470
viewing 224
services 69
session sequences 406 detection tool 225
states, workflow 415
device brands
trust sources 287
aliases 176
versions from trust sources 285
details 175
workflows 423
device features
delivery categories
activating 200
creating 302
deactivating 200
deleting 309
deleting 200
dynamic data 305
details 198
editing 304–309
device profile compatibility 198
managing 300–309
editing 197–199
metadata 307
searching 302 Device Knowledge Base
viewing 300–302 See DKB.
delivery options, quick start configuration 33–36 Device menu 170–298
details device models
bundles 342 aliases 182–183
content 142 editing 180–193
content category 119
device profile capabilities
content providers 111
cache management 390
content topic 373
device applications 235 device profiles
device feature 198 activating 276
device profiles 259 browser 266
devices by brand 175 cache management 389
devices by model 182 capabilities 260–263
editing session 430–432 creating capabilties 262
formatting tokens 214 creating on devices 191
message patterns 400 deactivating 276
offer 315 deleting 276

Index
device profiles, continued devices, continued

deleting capabilties 262 download statistics by model 452
deleting from devices 193 editing application types 228, 230
details 259 editing application versions 240–242
device feature compatibility 198 editing applications 233–236
editing 258–275 editing by brand 174–176
editing capabilties 261 editing detection rules 220–221
hardware 263 editing features 197–199
hardware extensions 264 editing IMEI ranges 184
importing to devices 192 editing user agents 187
managing 256–277 front-office account 89–90
managing on devices 191–193 importing device profiles 192
MMS 271 managing application types 226–231
network 268 managing application versions 238–244
OMA DM CP 275 managing applications 232–238
Push 270 managing by brand 172–176
searching 255 managing by IMEI range 249–252
settings 272 managing by model 178–194
SMS 273 managing by user agent 253–255
software 265 managing detection rules 218–224
WAP 268 managing detection sets 224
managing device profiles 191–193
devices
managing features 195–200
activating 177, 194
managing for content versions 148, 153–156
activating application types 231
managing IMEI ranges 183–186
activating application versions 244
managing rights 297
activating applications 238
managing user agents 187–191
activating IMEI ranges 186, 251
rights 17
activating user agents 190, 255
searching application types 228
creating 180
searching application versions 240
creating application versions 243
searching applications 233
creating applications 236
searching by brand 173
creating detection rules 222–223
searching by IMEI 249
creating device profiles 191
searching by unresolved IMEI 100–101
creating features 197
searching by user agent 252
creating IMEI ranges 185
searching detection rules 219
creating user agents 189
searching features 196
deactivating 194
statistics 451
deactivating application types 231
using Quick Search 248
deactivating application versions 244
viewing application types 226–228
deactivating applications 238
viewing application versions 238–240
deactivating IMEI ranges 186, 252
viewing applications 232
deactivating user agents 190, 255
viewing detection rules 218–219
deleting 194
viewing detection sets 224
deleting application types 231
deleting application versions 244 devices, mobile
deleting applications 237 managing 99–101
deleting detection rules 223 searching by IMEI 99–101
deleting device profiles 193
DKB
deleting IMEI ranges 186, 251
deleting versions 290
deleting user agents 190, 254
editing versions 289
download statistics by brand 451
generating archives 291

Index
DKB, continued editing, continued

managing archives 290 device user agents 187
managing versions 287–290 devices by brand 174–176
rights 17 devices by model 180–193
searching versions 288 DKB versions 289
synchronizations 291–297 formatting tokens 213–216
viewing versions 287 front-office account services 87
download codes, managing 335
front-office groups 74–80
download statistics IMEI ranges on devices 184
per brand 451 message patterns 399–402
per content 454 messaging credentials 394
per model 452 mobile network operators 465
per offer 455 offer bundle templates 318–329
per provider 453 offers 314–336
per service 456 phone prefixes 469
services 64–67
downloading bundles 355–357
session details 430–432
downloads, viewing popular 362–363 session sequences 406
states, workflow 414–415
dynamic data, delivery categories 305
subscriptions 366
trust sources 283–285
workflows 410–423
E
end-user database structure configuration,
editing quick start 22–23
actions, workflow 417–418
end-user. See front-office
back-office accounts 54–59
back-office groups 44–45 End-users menu 61
bundles 341–354
errors, session 431
cache management 387–391
capability group handlers 208–211 export file formats 336
capability groups 203–204
F
content 140–156
content categories 117–121 features, device
content metadata 152 activating 200
content providers 110–113 creating 197
content systems 384 deactivating 200
content templates 124–136 deleting 200
content topics 372–376 details 198
content versions 147–148 device profile capability 198
countries 461 editing 197–199
delivery categories 304–309 managing 195–200
device application types 228 searching 196
device application versions 240–242
file formats, export 336
device applications 233–236
device detection rules 220–221 files
device features 197–199 content 160
device profile capabilities 261, 279 csv 160
device profiles 258–275 history, configuring 471–472

Index
files, continued G
history, purging 472
generating DKB archives 291
history, viewing configurations 471
filters glossary 474–478
applying 8–10 granting access to a resource 48–49
criteria and operators 8–10
groups, back-office
text operators 9–10
adding 43
formatting systems creating 43
viewing 245 managing 41–50
formatting tokens rights 12–13
creating 216 searching 42
deleting 218 viewing 41–42
details 214 groups, capability
device profile capabilities 215 creating 204
editing 213–216 deleting 205
managing 212–218 editing 203–204
searching 213 managing 201–205
viewing 212–213 resetting 204
front-office accounts searching 202
creating 83–84 viewing 201–202
deleting 97 groups, front-office
editing 84–98 adding 73
editing services 87 creating 73
managing addresses 91–93 editing 74–80
managing credit information 95 rights 12–13
managing devices 89–90 searching 72
managing parent groups 87 viewing 71–72
managing SIM cards 93–94
groups, parent
managing timeslots 94
rights 12 adding to back-office accounts 57
searching 81–82 managing 46–47
removing from back-office accounts 57
front-office groups
creating 73
defining rights 76–77
H
defining rules 78–80
deleting 80 handlers, capability group
editing 74–80 creating 207
rights 12–13 deleting 211
viewing 71–72 managing 206–211
searching 207
searching created groups 210
viewing 206–207
viewing created groups 209

Index
history logging into Content Manager 3

rights, managing 473
logging out of Content Manager 4
system rights 15
viewing user 96–98 login password, changing 3
history files
configuring 471–472
purging 472 M
viewing configurations 471 managing
back-office groups 41–50
I back-office parent groups 56
bulk account imports 101–104
IMEI
bulk content processes 425–427
searching devices by 99–101
bundles 337–357
unresolved, searching devices by 100–101
cache 387–391
IMEI ranges capability group handlers 206–211
activating from devices 251 capability groups 201–205
activating on devices 186 content 137–158
creating 185 content categories 114–123
deactivating from devices 252 content metadata 150–153
deactivating on devices 186 content provider templates 111–112
deleting from devices 251 content providers 107–114
editing 184 content providers by category 119–120
managing devices by 249–252 content systems 381–385
managing on devices 183–186 content templates 123–136
removing from devices 186 content topics 368–381
searching devices by 249 content version devices 148, 153–156
countries 459–462
import, bulk process
data patterns 400–402
accessing 164
delivery categories 300–309
contents 158–163
device application types 226–231
creating 160–163
device application versions 238–244
deleting 164
device applications 232–238
timeslots 163, 361
device detection rules 218–224
importing device detection sets 224
accounts, quick start 25–27 device features 195–200
device profiles to devices 192 device IMEI ranges 183–186
device profile capabilities 278–281
imports, bulk account
device profiles 256–277
creating 102–104
device profiles on devices 191–193
managing 101–104
device rights 297
searching 102
device user agents 187–191
viewing 101–102
devices by brand 172–176
interface, Content Manager 5 devices by IMEI range 249–252
devices by model 178–194
IP restrictions, managing 58
devices by user agent 253–255
DKB archives 290
DKB versions 287–290
L formatting systems 245–246
lists, viewing and working with 6–7 formatting tokens 212–218
front-office account addresses 91–93

Index
managing, continued message triggers 325–326, 348

front-office account credit information 95
messaging credentials
front-office account devices 89–90
creating 393–394
front-office account SIM cards 93–94
deleting 394
front-office account timeslots 94
editing 394
managing 391–395
front-office parent groups 87
searching 392
history rights 473
viewing 391–393
IP restrictions, back-office account 58
message patterns 395–403 metadata
messaging credentials 391–395 bundles 354
mobile devices 99–101 content topic 376
mobile network operators 463–466 offers 331
offer bundle templates 315–330
metadata, content
offer download codes 335
adding 151
offers 310–336
deleting 153
parent groups 46–47
editing 152
phone prefixes 467–470
managing 150–153
purges 435–439
retry sessions 432 metadata, delivery categories 307
rights 12–20
MMS, device profiles 271
services 61–71
session sequences 403–406 MO interface, quick start configuration 36–37
sessions 428–432
mobile devices
statistics processes 442–446
managing 99–101
subscriptions 365–366
searching by IMEI 99–101
synchronizations, DKB 291–297
triggers 363–364 mobile network operators
trust sources 282–287 adding 465
versions for trust sources 283–285 creating 465
workflows 408–423 deleting 466
manual user association 73–75 editing 465
managing 463–466
menu bar, Content Manager 5 modifying 465
menus searching 464
viewing 463–464
Administrators 41
Content 107 models, cache management 388
Device 170–298
models, device
End-users 61
aliases 182–183
Statistics 442
details 182
System 459
editing 180–193
message patterns managing 178–194
creating 396–399 searching 179
deleting 403
modifying
details 400
actions, workflow 417–418
editing 399–402
managing 395–403
searching 396
bundles 341–354
types 397–399
cache management 387–391
viewing 395–396

Index
modifying, continued O
offers
content 140–156
content categories 117–121 back-office rights 333
content providers 110–113 bundle template capabilities 321
content systems 384 bundle template details 319
content templates 124–136 bundle template topics 320
content topics 372–376 bundle template triggers, on content 324–325
content versions 147–148 bundle template triggers, on message 325–326
countries 461 bundle template triggers, on schedule 326–329
delivery categories 304–309 compatibilities 330
device application types 228 creating 312
device application versions 240–242 creating bundle templates 316
device features 197–199 deleting 336
device profile capabilities 279 deleting bundle templates 330
device profiles 258–275 details 315
devices by brand 174–176 download statistics 455
devices by model 180–193 editing 314–336
DKB versions 289 editing bundle templates 318–329
formatting tokens 213–216 front-office rights 332, 334
front-office account services 87 managing 310–336
front-office accounts 84–98 managing bundle templates 315–330
front-office groups 74–80 managing download codes 335
IMEI ranges 184 metadata 331
message patterns 399–402 rights 19
mobile network operators 465 searching 312
offer bundle templates 318–329 searching bundle template topics 320
offers 314–336 viewing 310–312
preferences 6 OMA DM CP, device profiles 275
services 64–67
operators, filter 8–10
session sequences 406
states, workflow 414–415 operators, mobile network
workflows 410–423 adding 465
monitoring a synchronization process 293 creating 465
deleting 466
MSISDN editing 465
quick start, searching 27–28 managing 463–466
searching accounts by 365 modifying 465
See also phone prefixes. searching 464
viewing 463–464
overview, Content Manager interface 5
N
navigation
defining rights 48–49 P
rights overview 14
parent groups, back-office
network, device profiles 268 adding to accounts 57
managing 46–47, 56
removing from accounts 57

Index
parent groups, managing front-office 87 processes, bulk import, continued

deleting 164
password, changing 3
timeslots 163, 361
patterns, managing data 400–402
processes, statistics
patterns, message details 443
creating 396–399 managing 442–446
deleting 403 post tasks 446
details 400 pre tasks 446
editing 399–402 searching 442
managing 395–403 statistics tables 444–446
searching 396 profiles, device
types 397–399
activating 276
viewing 395–396
activating capabilities 281
patterns, topic 344 browser 266
capabilities 260–263
phone prefixes
creating capabilities 262
creating 469
deactivating 276
deleting 470
deactivating capabilities 281
editing 469
deleting 276
managing 467–470
deleting capabilities 262, 280
searching 468
details 259
viewing 467–468
editing 258–275
popular downloads, viewing 362–363 editing capabilities 261, 279
hardware 263
popularity, bundles 353
hardware extensions 264
post tasks, statistics processes 446 managing 256–277
managing capabilities 278–281
pre tasks, statistics processes 446
MMS 271
preferences, modifying 6 network 268
OMA DM CP 275
prefixes, phone
Push 270
creating 469
searching 255
deleting 470
searching capabilities 277
editing 469
settings 272
managing 467–470
SMS 273
searching 468
software 265
viewing 467–468
WAP 268
processes, bulk
providers, content
rights 19
content statistics 454
viewing statistics compilation 449
creating 109
processes, bulk content deleting 113
accessing 426 details 111
deleting reports 439 download statistics 453
managing 425–427 editing 110–113
rights 439 managing 107–114
searching 426 managing by category 119–120
viewing 425–426 managing templates 111–112
rights 15–16, 112–113
processes, bulk import
searching 108
accessing 164
viewing 107–108
creating 160–163

Index
publishing content topics 379 repository, quick configuration of content 23–25
purges resetting capability groups 204

managing 435–439
resource
searching 437
granting access to 48–49
viewing 436–437
removing access from 49
viewing details 437–439
restrictions, managing IP 58
purging
bulk process reports 439 retry sessions
history files 472 bulk processes 434–435
sessions 432, 435 managing 432
searching 433
Push, device profiles 270
viewing 432
rights
Q account 12
back-office group 47–48
Quick Search 248 back-office offers 333
quick start bulk process 19, 439
configuring a bulk campaign 22–39 catalog 18, 367–368
configuring content repository 23–25 content categories 16–17, 120
configuring delivery options 33–36 Content Manager 11–19
configuring end-user database 22–23 content provider 15–16, 112–113
configuring MO interface 36–37 content topic 18, 377
creating a bulk process 37–39 device 17, 297
creating content 28–33 DKB 17
import accounts 25–27 front-office group 76–77
searching for MSISDN 27–28 front-office offers 332, 334
global back-office group 49–50
global content categories 121–123
global service 69–71
R group 12–13
removing history 15, 473
bundle templates 330 management 12–20
bundles 355 navigation 14, 48–49
capability group handlers 211 offers 19
capability groups 205 service 14–15, 66–67
countries 462 session 19, 439
device application types 231 session and bulk process 439
device application versions 244 system 424
device applications 237 system administration 19
device features 200 tracking 19
device profile capabilities 262, 280 rules, condition
device profiles 276 creating 421
device profiles from devices 193 deleting 423
device user agents 190 editing 422
devices 194
DKB versions 290 rules, device detection
formatting tokens 218 creating 222–223
trust sources 287 deleting 223
versions to trust sources 285 detection tool 225
editing 220–221

Index
rules, device detection, continued searching, continued

managing 218–224 mobile devices by IMEI 99–101
searching 219 mobile network operators 464
viewing 218–219 MSISDN, quick start 27–28
offers 312
rules, front-office group 78–80
operators 464
phone prefixes 468
purges 437
S retry sessions 433
scheduled triggers 326–329, 348–352 services 62
session sequences 404
searching statistics compilations 448
accounts by alias 366 statistics processes 442
accounts by MSISDN 365 synchronizations, trust source 293
applying filters 8–10 triggers 364
back-office accounts 52 using Quick Search 248
back-office groups 42 workflows 409
bulk account imports 102
sequences, session
bulk content processes 426
bundles 339 about 407
capability group handlers 207 creating 404–406
capability groups 202 deleting 406
content 138 editing 406
content categories 116 managing 403–406
content providers 108 searching 404
content systems 382 viewing 403–404
content topics 370 services
countries 460 adding 62
delivery categories 302 creating 62
device application types 228 defining rights 66–67
device application versions 240 deleting 69
device applications 233 download statistics 456
device detection rules 219 editing 64–67
device features 196 managing 61–71
device profile capabilities 277 rights 14–15
device profiles 255 searching 62
devices by brand 173 viewing 61–62
devices by IMEI range 249
session sequences
devices by model 179
devices by unresolved IMEI 100–101 about 407
devices by user agent 252 creating 404–406
DKB versions 288 deleting 406
formatting systems 245 editing 406
formatting tokens 213 managing 403–406
front-office accounts 81–82 searching 404
front-office accounts by address 82 viewing 403–404
front-office accounts by alias 82 workflows 405
front-office groups 72 sessions
handler created capability groups 210 editing details 430–432
import processes 159 errors 431
message patterns 396 managing 428–432
messaging credentials 392 purging 432, 435

Index
sessions, continued statuses, session 431

rights 19, 439
subscriptions
statuses 431
creating 365–366
viewing 428–429
editing 366
viewing details 433
managing 365–366
sessions, retry
synchronizations, DKB
bulk process 434–435
creating 296
managing 432
managing 291–297
searching 433
monitoring 293
viewing 432
searching 293
sets, device detection viewing 292
managing 224
system
viewing 224
administration rights 19, 424
settings, device profiles 272 history rights 15
SIM cards, front-office account 93–94 System menu 459
SMS, device profiles 273 systems, content
software, device profiles 265 creating 382–384
deleting 385
states editing 384
workflows 411–418 managing 381–385
workflows, creating 413 searching 382
workflows, deleting 415 viewing 381–382
workflows, editing 414–415
systems, formatting
statistics managing 245–246
contents 453 searching 245
contents per provider 454 viewing 245
device 451
downloads per brand 451
downloads per content 454 T
downloads per model 452
downloads per offer 455 templates, bundle
downloads per provider 453 adding to offers 316
downloads per service 456 capabilities 321
Statistics menu 442 content templates 323
tracking 447–450 deleting 330
details 319
statistics compilations
editing from offers 318–329
searching 448
managing on offers 315–330
viewing bulk processes 449
searching topics 320
viewing details 448
topics 320
statistics processes
templates, content
details 443
bundle templates 323
managing 442–446
editing 124–136
post tasks 446
managing 123–136
pre tasks 446
managing for providers 111–112
searching 442
viewing 123
statistics tables 444–446
text operators, filter 9–10
statistics tables, statistics processes 444–446

Index
timeslots trust sources, continued

bulk import process 163, 361 editing 283–285
front-office account 94 managing 282–287
managing versions 283–285
tokens, formatting
viewing 282
creating 216
deleting 218
details 214
device profile capabilities 215 U
editing 213–216 user agents
managing 212–218 activating from devices 255
searching 213 activating on devices 190
viewing 212–213 associated device application versions 242
tool, detection 225 associated device applications 235
creating 189
topic patterns, bundles 344 deactivating from devices 255
topics, bundle templates deactivating on devices 190
managing 320 deleting from devices 190, 254
searching 320 editing on devices 187
managing devices by 253–255
topics, bundles 343–346 managing on devices 187–191
topics, content searching devices by 252
creating 370 user association types 73–75
deleting 377
details 373 user, viewing history 96–98
device capabilities 374 using
editing 372–376 xml files 165–169
managing 368–381 zip files 164
metadata 376
publishing 379
rights 18, 377
V
searching 370
viewing 368–370 version information, Content Manager 6
tracking versions
rights 19, 439 creating for trust sources 285
statisitics 447–450 deleting from trust sources 285
triggers managing for trust sources 283–285
managing 363–364 versions, application
on content offer bundle templates 324–325 device application associated 235
on content, bundles 352
versions, content
on message offer bundle templates 325–326
creating 144–146
on message, bundles 348
deleting 149
on schedule offer bundle templates 326–329
editing 147–148
on schedule, bundles 348–352
viewing 143
searching 364
viewing
trust sources
creating 286
creating versions 285
bulk account imports 101–102
deleting 287
bulk content processes 425–426
deleting versions 285

Index
viewing, continued viewing, continued

bundles 337–339 version information, Content Manager 6
capability group handlers 206–207 workflows 408–409
capability groups 201–202
content 137–138
content categories 115–116 W
content providers 107–108
content statistics 453 WAP, device profiles 268
content systems 381–382 Welcome screen 5
content templates 123
content topics 368–370 workflows
content versions 143 actions 411–418
countries 459 conditions 419–423
delivery categories 300–302 creating 409
device application types 226–228 creating actions 416
device application versions 238–240 creating condition rules 421
device applications 232 creating conditions 420
device detection rules 218–219 creating states 413
device detection sets 224 deleting 423
device statistics 451 deleting actions 418
DKB versions 287 deleting condition rules 423
formatting systems 245 deleting conditions 423
formatting tokens 212–213 deleting states 415
front-office groups 71–72 details 411
handler created capability groups 209 editing 410–423
history file configuration 471 editing actions 417–418
lists 6–7 editing condition rules 422
message patterns 395–396 editing conditions 421
messaging credentials 391–393 editing states 414–415
mobile network operators 463–464 managing 408–423
offers 310–312 searching 409
phone prefixes 467–468 states 411–418
popular downloads 362–363 viewing 408–409
purge details 437–439 workflows, session sequence 405
purges 436–437
retry sessions 432 working with lists 6–7
services 61–62
session details 433
session sequences 403–404 X
sessions 428–429
xml files, using 165–169
statistics compilation bulk processes 449
statistics compilation details 448
synchronizations, trust source 292
trust sources 282 Z
user history 96–98
zip files, using 164

Content Manager User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Content Manager User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Content Manager 2.

Chapter 2 Understanding Rights

Chapter 3 Getting Started

Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential i

Chapter 4 Back-Office Management

Chapter 5 Front-Office Management

Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential ii

Chapter 6 Content Management

Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential iii

Chapter 7 Device Management

Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential iv

Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential v

Chapter 8 DKB Management

Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential vi

Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential vii

Chapter 10 System Configuration

Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential viii

Chapter 12 System Information

Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential ix

Glossary ................................................................................. 474

Index ..................................................................................... 479

Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential x

This chapter includes the following information:

About Content Manager.............................................................................................. 2

Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential 1

About Content Manager

Content Manager provides:

About This Guide

Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential 2

Logging In to Content Manager

Figure 1.1: Login Screen

2. Enter your Login and Password.

Changing Your Login and Password Information

1. From the Administrators menu, select Accounts > List accounts.

2. Click Show table.

Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential 3

Figure 1.2: The Edit account Screen

4. In the New password field, enter a new password.

Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential 4

The Content Manager Interface

This section provides an overview to using the Content Manager interface.

The Welcome Screen

Figure 1.3: The Welcome Screen

The Menu Bar

Figure 1.4: The Menu Bar

The menu bar consists of the following menus:

Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential 5

• Content — Manage content categories, providers, and templates. For more

Figure 1.5: Additional Menu Options

Content Manager Version Information

Viewing and Working With Lists

Elements of Content Manager include entities such as back-office (administrator-level) and

Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential 6

Figure 1.6: The List groups Screen

3. Click Reset filters to remove all existing filters.

4. Click Hide or Show filters to hide or display all filtering criteria.

6. Click Refresh to update the list of elements.

7. Browse pages: Previous — go back; Next — go to next page.

8. If present, click the next to each filter to delete.

NOTE: Some columns may not be available for sorting.

Copyright 2006 Mobile 365 Proprietary and Confidential 7

Using the Filters Screen

Figure 1.7: List groups > Filters Screen

• Click the next to the filter to delete.